TEA RESEARCH FOUNDATION OF KENYA

TEA GROWERS HANDBOOK

5th Edition
TEA RESEARCH FOUNDATION OF KENYA

5th Edition

THE TEA BOARD OF KENYA

Published by
The Tea Research Foundation of Kenya
P.O. Box 820
KERICHO

© The Tea Research Foundation of Kenya, 1986

1st Edition 1965
2nd Edition 1966
3rd Edition 1969
4th Edition 1986
5th Edition 2002

ISBN 9966-9886-5-3
All rights reserved. No part of this
publication may be reproduced,
transmitted in any form or by any
means photocopying, recording or
otherwise, without the express
permission of the publishers or authors.

Produced and printed in Kenya by

 Contents
Acknowledgements…………………………………………………………………………. v
Preface…………………………………………....…………………………………………
vi
Chapter I: Land Preparation
Site selection and other basic considerations……………………………………. 1

Sampling soils …………………………………………………………………….…. 5

Soil pH testing ……………………………………………………………………….. 7

Clearing and preparation of land for planting ………………………………….. 9

Killing trees ……………………………………………………………………..…… 14

Land management after clearing …………………………………………………. 18

Road making …………………………………………………………………………. 18

Erosion ………………………………………………………………………………… 21

Mulch …………………………………………………………………………………. 22

Cover crops ………………………………………………………………………….. 25

Windbreaks …………………………………………………………………………… 26

Chapter II: Breeding, Clonal Selection and Propagation 30

Tea breeding …………………………………………………………….……………
36
Clonal selection ……………………………………………………….……………..
46
Tea seed production …………………………………………………….……….….
53
Tea seed nurseries …………………………………………………………….…….
55
Vegetative propagation ……………………………………………………………..

Chapter III: Establishment

65
Field planting …………………………………………………………………………
71
Bringing tea into bearing ……………………………………………………………
82
Replanting………………………………………………………………………………

Chapter IV: Field Management and Farm Records

Plucking, pruning, skiffing and tipping-in mature tea …………………………
83
Rehabilitation of moribund tea plants …………………………………..………..
89
Hail damaged tea …………………………………………………………………….
90
Infilling ………………………………………………………………………………..
90
Rain gauges ……………………………………………………………………………
92
Irrigation ………………………………………………………………………………
93
Farm records ………………………………………………………………………….
Chapter V: Fertilizers and Nutrition 97
Crop Nutrition and fertilizer practice ………………………………………………
102
Fertilizers ……………………………………………………………………………….
106
Foliar application of nutrients ……………………………………………………….
114
Organic manure, composts, and mulches …………………………………………
119
Fertilizers for mother bushes ………………………………………………………..
122
Fertilizer for nurseries ……………………………………………………………….
123
Fertilizer placement in planting holes …………………………………………….
125
Fertilizers for young tea ……………………………………………………………..
126
Fertilizers for mature tea …………………………………………………………….
131
Fertilizers for seed bearers …………………………………………………………..
136
Treatment of hutsites and soil pH higher than optimum ………………………..
139
Symptoms of nutrients deficiency and excess …………………………………….
142
The use of the “paired-plot technique” for evaluating yield response

of tea to fertilizer ………………………………………………………………………

153
Recording and calculating fertilizer use ………………………………………….
162
Elements essential for plant growth…………………………………………………
164

CHAPTER VI: Diseases, Pests, Weed Control and Other Abnormalities

Diseases ………………………………………………………………………………… 170

Pests …………………………………………………………………………………….. 174

Weed Control …………………………………………………………………………. 186

General precautions when using pesticides ………………………………………. 193

Herbicide damage ……………………………………………………….……………. 194

Formulations …………………………………………………………………………… 195

Chemical toxicity ……………………………………………………………………… 196

Safety period …………………………………………………………………………… 197

To calibrate a sprayer ………………………………………………………………… 197

Recommended Pesticides ……………………………………………………………. 197

Lightning damage …………………………………………………………………….. 198

Chapter VII: Tea Manufacturing, Shipping and Fuelwood 200

Tea manufacture ………………………………………………………………………. 209
Shipping ………………………………………………………………………………… 210
Tea quality ……………………………………………………………………………..
 Fuelwood ………………………………………………………………………………. 213

Appendix I: Agents for Chemicals …………………………………………………………. 217

Appendix II: Conversion Tables ……………………………………………………………. 221

Appendix III: Definitions ……………………………………………………………………. 229

Appendix IV: Services provided by The Tea Research Foundation of Kenya..…….. 242

Appendix V: Services provided by The Tea Research Foundation of Kenya for the Kenya tea industry
only ……………………………………………………………..
243
Appendix VI: Equipment for chemical Application ………………………………………
249
Index………………………………………………………………………………………………
258
 Acknowledgements

The Tea research Foundation of Kenya acknowledges, with thanks, assistance

received from all those in the smallholder sector, estates, factories and technical
departments in tea industry and agro-chemical firms who have supplied
information to help the Foundation to compile this handbook. Without all this
generous assistance to us all the information would not have been included,
particularly that in fields of tea manufacturing, fuel wood and pesticides. The
financial help from the advertisers is appreciated. Some of the figures in the
handbook were reproduced by the printers.
The Tea Research Foundation of Kenya accepts no responsibility for claims
made in advertisements in this handbook, nor for changes in agencies, in the
formation of pesticides and fertilizers, nor in the design of equipment nor in any
other or modification which may have been made since the handbook was prepared
for publication.
No part of this book may be reproduced in any form unless written permission
had been obtain in advance from the Director, Tea Research Foundation of Kenya.
 Preface
This handbook is a compilation of the Tea Research Foundation of Kenya’s
(TRFK) recommendations for tea production. It is intended for use as the standard
book of reference for tea growers in Kenya.
This is the fifth edition of the handbook. The first, second and third editions
were produced in 1965, 1966 and 1969 respectively by the Tea Research Institute
of East Africa (forerunner institution). The fourth edition was produced in 1986 by
the Tea Research Foundation of Kenya. This fifth edition contains much new
information derived from the results of the Foundation’s research projects. The
information in the previous editions, has been revised.
The work of revision and re-writing has been completed by the senior staff
of the Foundation except where separate acknowledgement is made. In addition,
most Kenyan producers and tea officers have made their own special contribution
to the text. Consequently the handbook now emerges as a unique testimony to that
willingness to share experience for the benefit of everyone “in tea” in Kenya which
characterises our progressive and expanding tea industry.

J. K. RUTTO
DIRECTOR
THE TEA RESEARCH FOUNDATION OF KENYA
July 2002

TRFK vision for the year 2010

TRFK will be the center of excellence undertaking innovative research on tea
improvement and development aimed at the generation and dissemination of
appropriate, effective, and efficient technologies for the benefit of all stakeholders
in Kenya.

Mission Statement
The mission of TRFK is to generate and disseminate, through innovative research
(conducted with the participation of stakeholders), effective and efficient tea
production, processing and value adding technologies for enhanced productivity
and development of high quality tea products which can compete profitably and
sustainably in the market. The Foundation will give due cognizance to the
important aspects of sustainability and conservation of environment, natural
resource base and human health.
Email: [email protected] An MFE 3 stage tea fluid bed dryer – 650 Kgs/hr capacity
 Chapter I

LAND PREPARATION
(a) Site selection and other basic considerations
Among tropical crops there is none that demands such precise requirements as tea
does, if a paying yield is to be obtained. Tea requires a climate with specific limits
of certain attributes, a soil with special characters, a proper clearing and
preparation of land prior to planting. It is therefore of paramount importance that
in selecting a site for tea, due consideration should be given to climatic and soil
requirements of the tea plant before a decision is made on whether the area is
suitable for tea. A point to remember is that tea, once planted, could last for up to
100 years and beyond.
When considering whether to plant tea, disappointment and unexpected expense
can be minimised if the sites under consideration are critically examined. It is always
advisable to consult the Tea Research Foundation of Kenya, or your nearest Tea
Officer or an officer of the Ministry of Agriculture.
(i) Climatic factors
Tea is thought to have originated within the fan-shaped area extending from the
Assam/Burma border in the west to China in the East; and south from this line
through Burma and Thailand to Vietnam. This is an area of monsoon climate with
a warm wet summer and a cool dry (or less wet) winter. From the main centres of
cultivation in South East Asia tea has been introduced into many other areas of the
world, and is now grown in conditions, which range from Mediterranean type of
climate to the hot humid tropics. Commercially viable plantations have been
established as far North as Turkey and Georgia (42N) and as far south as
Argentina (27S) and between sea level and about 2500 m in altitude. Tea has even
been reported to be cultivated below sea level in Iran.
Despite the generally wide range of climatic conditions found in the different areas
of the world where tea is now grown, the following requirements must be met for it
to be commercially viable.
(ii) Rainfall
1. Minimum requirements
The minimum annual rainfall considered adequate for the successful cultivation of
tea is about 1200 mm without irrigation. It is impossible to judge whether rainfall
is adequate on the annual total alone as distribution of the rainfall is of prime
importance.
Water is removed from the soil by tea roots and lost from the leaves by evapo-
transpiration at a rate which varies from 120 mm to 180 mm per month depending
on the prevailing weather conditions. Ideally therefore water should be available
to the roots in amounts which are of this order each month. Where there are
prolonged periods when rainfall is less than the water lost by evapotranspiration,
the plants must rely on stored ground water. The more even the rainfall
distribution, the less likely is the tea to be adversely affected by drought.
The amount of water lost by evapotranspiration will be increased by wind and
hot weather and reduced by low temperatures and long periods of mist or cloudy
weather. Throughout Kenya, tea requires at least 1400 mm of rain annually to
compensate for the loss. Where distribution of rain is uneven, it is possible that in
months of high rainfall a large proportion is lost by drainage and surface run-off,
and in these conditions a higher rainfall is necessary.
When considering rainfall, it must be remembered that in the extremely dry years,
the rainfall may be only two-thirds of the long term average, and such dry years may
occur once in every ten years. It is important to note that such a pattern may or may
not occur.
2. Maximum requirements
Provided that there is no danger of water logging, i.e. the drainage of the soil and
the height of the water table are all satisfactory and erosion and run-off are under
control, there appears to be no maximum limit under which tea cannot be grown
successfully.

3. Irrigation
If irrigation is intended to be used or is found desirable on consideration of the
climate, the availability of water must be investigated. This must take into account
flow of rivers, as low flow is likely to coincide with the maximum demand for
irrigation. The need for and the practicability of storage in a dam and the cost of
irrigation must be considered (see breakdowns page 93).
(iii) Temperatures and altitude
Temperatures
Regardless of whether or not other climatic factors are favourable, tea, like other
plants, does not grow when temperatures are either too low or too high. There is
evidence that air, leaf and soil temperatures all influence the rate of growth of tea.

1. Air temperature
In some of the most northerly tea areas such as Georgia, China, Japan, Turkey and
Darjeeling, snow sometimes falls during winter months and air temperatures fall
below freezing point; notwithstanding this, tea survives the winter months. However,
it is considered that temperatures below freezing are inimical to tea especially when
followed by a rapid rise in daytime temperatures (as is usual after a night frost)
leading to leaf scorch. It is also suspected that, in general, minimum air temperatures
below 13C are likely to bring damage to foliage. Research has shown that various
tea clones exhibit different responses to air temperature in what is known as base
temperature for shoot extension and development. These base temperatures can be
described as threshold temperatures below which shoot extension and development
ceases. It is also considered that mean maximum temperatures greater than 300Care
likely to be accompanied by humidities so low that cessation of active growth is
inevitable.
2. Leaf temperature
Research findings have shown that net photosynthesis of the tea leaf rises steadily
with increase of leaf temperature up to 35C and then declines sharply, ceasing when
the leaf temperature reaches 40C. It has also been shown that when ambient dry bulb
temperatures are 30 - 32C, that of tea leaves in full sunshine reaches 40 - 45C.

3. Soil temperature
Soil temperature is in many instances of greater significance to plant life than air
temperatures. In Kenya it has been shown that soil temperature influences the growth
rate of tea and hence yield. The optimum soil temperature within the feeder-root depth
of the soil is 20 - 25C.

Altitude
Temperatures are inversely related to altitude, i.e. the higher the altitude, the lower
the temperature. It has been found in Kenya that, within certain limits, there is a
negative linear relationship between yields of tea and altitude at which it is grown.
Using long term average yields data of tea estates situated at different altitudes from
1500 m to 2250 m a.m.s.l. and equation has been calculated which suggests that the
average annual tea production falls by 200 kg made tea per hectare for every 100 m
rise in altitude. The decrease in yield can be more when considering high yielding
clones, which are sensitive to temperature changes. This fall in tea production with
rise in altitude is directly attributed to fall in air, leaf and soil temperatures.
It is therefore important to take note of this information when considering a site for
tea planting.
(iv) Soil factors
Tea may be grown in soils of diverse origin. However, in Kenya good tea soils are
those of volcanic origin of Kericho, Kisii, slopes of Mt. Kenya etc. These soils are
well-drained and are red, brownish red or dark red in colour. In the current FAO-
UNESCO soil classification system, Nitosols (Nitisols) are the predominant soil
type for tea in Kenya.
Tea is known to demand, perhaps more precisely than any other crop, soils with
special characters if economic yield is to be obtained. This means that although tea
can be grown commercially in different areas in different soil types, certain
conditions must be fulfilled in each case if tea is to succeed as a profitable crop.
The most important soil factors to be considered when selecting a site to be
planted with tea are: indicator plants and physical and chemical characteristics of
the soil.

(v) Tea indicator plants

The vegetation on the area is a very useful guide. If the area is already cultivated
the condition of the crops can give some indication of the fertility status of the soil.
Analysis of natural vegetation where this is largely of one species can sometimes
give some guidance.
 One characteristic property of the tea plant, its ability to accumulate aluminium,
gives rise to a very convenient method of recognising a potential tea area. There are
a number of natural species of plants which have a similar property. The presence of
one or more of these in an area is a sure indication that the land is suitable for tea.
These plants have some general characteristics: large flowers with prominent stamens
and parallel leaf veins (Melastomes), changeable flowers (coloured varieties of
Hydrangea macrophylla), beautiful foliage (tree ferns and club-mosses) or bright
blue fruits (Symplocos spp., Lasianthus spp., Psychrotria spp.).Other plants which
are commonly associated with good tea are:
Shrubs
Triumfetta macrophylla, Vernonia auriculiferra, Pauridanta holstii. The spectacular
melastone, Dissotis irvingiana, is very often seen in waste land, road cuttings and
quarries in Kericho district, Sotik and Cherangani.
Herbs
Borreria princeae is rampant on banks and grassy wastes competing quite
successfully with couch and Kikuyu grasses. It is a troublesome weed in tea, resistant
to most herbicides. Closely related species of Borreria are found in all tea growing
areas of Kenya.

Ferns
Pteridium acquilinum (Bracken) is often regarded as a good indicator of tea land.
However, it also thrives on infertile, very acid soils and in areas which are too dry for
tea. Mention must be made of living fossil fern, Marattia flaxinifolia, the most ancient
of all ferns which is also cosmopolitan in distribution and is particularly common in
ravines in tea growing areas of Kenya. This fern has huge fronds, rather like a palm
tree, or ciycada, on the backs of which are comparatively large, pod-shaped fruits or
spores sacks.

Trees
Newtonia buchanani and Albizzia spp.
When considering small areas, the vegetation on adjacent land is important. For
instance tea must not be planted within 30 m of Eucalyptus trees, as their roots
compete with tea roots for available water. Smallholders, particularly, must bear this
in mind.

(vi) Other considerations

1. Site history
The previous history of the area is important. Cropping in the past may have affected
the soil. Continuous raising of food crops without adequate fertilizers can reduce the
fertility of the soil without a major effect on the pH. This can be of value on a very
rich soil, but on a more normal tea soil, growth will be poor without heavy fertilizer
application. There is a greater risk of nematodes on cultivated land, and Armillaria
on forest clearings.
2. Slope and aspect of the land
The slope of the land is critical. On steep land the risk of severe soil loss by erosion
is high and control measures become costly. Normal estate operations become more
difficult as the land becomes steeper. These points must be carefully considered when
the slope of the land exceeds 20%.

3. Accessibility
Access for bringing in material and removal of leaf can be expensive in some
conditions. Water is essential for domestic, factory and nursery use even if irrigation
of planted tea is not intended. A factory needs fuel, which means either fuel trees
must be planted or access road for fuel tankers to reach the factory must be provided
and be adequately maintained.

4. Physical characteristics.
A deep well-drained soil is essential for successful tea growing. The “available depth”
of the soil in which tea roots can grow freely is very important for a successful tea
area. It is considered that, for tea, 2 m (6 ft) “available depth” should be taken as
minimum. It is necessary, if tea soil selection is to be done with any confidence, that
a soil profile pit be dug in representative sites to open out, at least to this depth, and
the various soil horizons examined as to their suitability for successful tea growing.
An unsuitable sub-soil for tea can be due to several factors, such as a section of
temporary or permanent high water table, i.e. water logging within shallow depth of
the soil. It is always very difficult to provide efficient drainage for these sections
particularly after tea is established. It is therefore important that the sections should
be identified and dealt with prior to planting tea. Soil profile pits dug during wet
seasons in the suspected sections would reveal the degree of the problem.
The most common and perhaps the most neglected cause of unsuitable sub-soil is
impediment caused by hard-pan of clay, murram, gravel or rocks. In new areas which
are still under natural forest vegetation, areas with unsuitable sub-soil due to these
factors are easy to identify visually because more often than not the natural forest
vegetation will not have penetrated the area. Instead, they will be covered by shallow
rooting vegetation which in most cases will be grasses. Nevertheless, if they are not
identified visually, soil profile pits dug in representative sections of the area to be
planted to tea should reveal their presence. Unless it is possible to loosen the hard-
pan, these areas should be avoided at the time of planting tea.
(b) Sampling soils
(i) Chemical characteristics
It is known that successful tea soils are acid in reaction. It is therefore very
important that the acidity of the soil be investigated and only those areas found to
have suitable pH are planted with tea without any pH correction treatment.
Samples should be taken as described below and tested for pH (see page 7).
A soil of pH between 4.0 and 6.0 is, in general, suitable for tea. The best soil for tea
(other factors not limiting) is in the range of pH 5.0 to 5.6. As soil pH decreases below
5.0 deficiency of the base nutrients (potassium, magnesium, calcium etc.) and
phosphate are likely to become troublesome. In soils of pH above 5.8, there are often
problems of establishing tea and it is recommended to treat soil pH at planting (see
page 139).
(ii) Sampling procedure
A single sample might be very unrepresentative of the field from which it is taken.
Several samples should be taken from a field. Ten small pits should be dug in a
grid pattern over each half hectare. About 50g of each of the topsoil (0 - 20 cm),
middle soil (20 - 40 cm) and bottom soil (40 - 60 cm) from each pit should be put
in three bags viz. ten sets of top soil in one bag marked “A”, ten sets of middle soil
in one bag marked “B” and ten sets of bottom soil in one bag marked “C”. Mix the
samples in each bag thoroughly.
For topsoil only it is not difficult to dig ten pits to a depth of 20 cm and take a slice
of soil about 2 cm thick from each side of the pit using a garden trowel. These slices,
put into one bag, will give about 1½ kg of soil for laboratory investigation.
For subsoil sampling, using an auger can save much time and effort. This tool
should be the ordinary carpenter’s type 3 to 5 cm in diameter. The best size is 4 cm
diameter and total length to 60 cm. The twist bit of the auger is 20 cm long and is just
the depth of a normal topsoil. A file mark should be cut at 20 cm and 40 cm above
the top of the bit.
To take a sample with an auger, first make the surface firm by trampling, then press
the top of the bit gently in and turn the handle until the whole of the bit is in the soil.
Then pull the tool out with the soil sample safely lodged in the convolutions of the
bit. Peel off the sample carefully into a polythene bag which contains a piece of thick
paper on which is written the site number and depth letter. The “A” sample can very
easily be taken with one auger dip, and is uncontaminated provided the tool is clean.
The “B” sample is obtained by inserting the auger tool in the same hole, turning the
handle until the 40 cm file mark is reached, and then pulling up and removing the
sample in the convolutions of the twist bit as above. When pulling up the “B” sample
it is almost impossible not to have some topsoil dropping into the hole. In order to
remove this, the auger is inserted and drilled about 5 cm, pulled up and the soil
discarded. The “C” sample can be taken quite cleanly. Contamination of the “B” and
“C” samples with topsoil can be reduced to a minimum if the outer part of the soil in
the twist bit is scrapped lightly with a knife.
The soil sampler then goes to the next hole site with the same three bags and drills
for samples and puts in the three bags. The procedure is repeated for the ten holes
marked previously in a grid over each half hectare. Bags should be securely closed
with a strong string.
Systematic sampling of a field or estate by the above procedure is well worth while
because the laboratory results can be plotted on a plan to serve as a guide for planting
and fertilizer programming.
Hutsites should be sampled in the same way with proportionately fewer holes for
the smaller ones but not less than three holes per hutsite.
(iii) Deeper samples
It is often desirable to obtain samples from depths lower than 60 cm. This can
easily be done with longer augers. By cutting off the 4 or 5 cm bit 15 cm above the
top of the twist and welding this to 120 cm of 12 mm diameter steam or water pipe,
augers of any length up to 6m can be made by connecting with ordinary threaded
rings; the handle is fitted into a standard threaded T-joint with a cross member of
4 cm diameter. Handles should always be of smooth hardwood and should project
not more than 25 cm from either side of the auger. Tapering towards the tips gives
an easier grip and additional strength.
Screw augers work extremely well in red clays derived from volcanic rocks in East
Africa. Gritty soils derived from quartz schist may give trouble by holding back the
auger, but if this is pulled up every two centimetres then a reasonable sample can
usually be obtained.
(iv) Bags
Cloth bags are unsuitable because if the soil is wet the dressing in the bag
contaminates the soil; if the soil is dry then dust passes through the cloth and
contaminates the samples touching it. Bags made of polythene tubular film of 250
or 300 gauge and 30 x 23 cm lay-flat diameter, heat sealed at the bottom, are ideal.
Samples should not be air-dried before sending to the Tea Research Foundation,
they should be sent as soon as collected and not left around in an office or store to be
further contaminated by alkaline cement and wall dust. Supplies of suitable bags can
be obtained from TRFK for a fee. These bags are used once only, and if necessary
can be used in the final storage of the sample for reference purposes.
(v) Labels
Details should be written on labels in indelible ink or pencil, and the labels tied or
stapled on the outside. The same details should also be written on a slip of paper
inside the bag.

(vi) Surveys
Take your sample on a grid with ten auger holes per half hectare. Large estates
could reduce the work by taking sample areas out of each field and then going back
to do problem fields in detail. In uniform soils, if the results from, say, five sample
areas show that the “C” and “B” samples do not vary significantly from the “A”
sample, then only the “A” sample need be taken, but a composite sample from ten
sites is essential in the first sampling.

(vii) Results
The TRFK will determine pH values on soil samples (see page 162).

(c) Soil pH testing

There are various types of electronic instruments available for pH testing. These
instruments measure pH directly and are accurate to 0.1 of a pH unit. They are best
used in a fixed position in a laboratory or soil testing room and require some skill to
use reliably.
 “Pocket” instruments are obtainable in which the electronics are fairly robust. As
the voltage measured is small, faulty contacts can give incorrect pH readings.
The following are required for soil pH testing:
Apparatus
pH meter with glass and calomel electrodes (or combined electrode); small
beakers, i.e. 50 or 100 ml; short stirring rods and distilled water.
Reagents
Standard buffer solutions of pH 4.00 and 7.00 (buffer tablets can be purchased
commercially prepared to these); saturated KCl (about 40 g per 100 ml of water).
Procedure
Each pH meter will have its instruction manual giving procedural steps to be followed
in getting ready for pH testing. Please read these instructions very carefully.
Remember that the glass electrode is fragile and subject to breakage and excessively
rapid deterioration if not properly cared for. It is also expensive to replace.
Before making pH measurements of a soil, prepare a soil suspension by placing a
volume of approximately 40 cc of soil in a 50 cc beaker (the beaker should be about
70% filled with soil in lieu of weighing). Add distilled water to the soil without
stirring until water wets the entire soil. When the soil is completely wet, the soil is
stirred with a rod and drops of water added until the soil is a “thin paste” that just
barely flows together to close around a hole left by the rod. The soil is now ready for
the pH measurements.
The glass and calomel electrodes are inserted in the water-saturated soil, and pH
measurement is made. The glass electrode is moved about to ensure removal of water
film around the electrode, and the pH reading is again taken. When the reading is
constant or nearly so, the pH value is recorded.
The following precautions will help:
1. The electrode is not allowed to remain in the test solution or suspension longer
than necessary, especially if more alkaline than pH 7.0 (i.e. a pH greater than 7.0).
2. Immediately after testing, the electrode is washed off with a strong stream of
distilled water from a wash bottle.
3. For storage after cleaning, the electrode is suspended in distilled water and the
system is protected from evaporation. Drying out of the electrode must be
avoided.
4. Failure of the glass electrode pH meter is indicated when, after standardisation, it
gives a slow response to large pH changes. The glass electrode is immersed in pH
7.00 buffer, then in the original pH 4.00 standard buffer. Readings of pH values
a few tenths higher than the specified pH values of the standard after as little as
60 seconds equilibration indicates “etching” or an over-age glass membrane.
(d) Clearing and preparation of land for planting
Soil samples should be taken and tested to determine the suitability of the soil for
planting with tea (see page 5).

(i) Clearing
After the site has been chosen, the area for planting should be marked out. Sites
will vary from district to district and in each case the amount of clearing will
depend on whether the vegetation is heavy to medium forest or simply grassland.
Gradients of 20 per cent or more should be avoided where possible and gradual
slopes should be preferred in order to keep erosion to a minimum. In planting flat
areas careful checking is necessary to confirm that the land can be adequately drained,
or problems of water-logging may arise later.
Most of the smallholding tea growers in Kenya are currently confined to grasslands;
such areas are abundantly available and more economical to prepare than forest land.
Clearing long grass, such as Napier grass, can sometimes be done mechanically by a
gyramor flail attached to a suitable tractor or by hand, with gangs of labour using
pangas (machetes) and jembes (hoes). Short grasses can be effectively dealt with by
ploughing and harrowing. When clearing mechanically, the necessity for burning off
the vegetation does not arise. Napier grass stems should be pulverised with the flail
so that they do not tangle the plough and harrow at later stages of the clearing
operation.
When a light vegetation covers the land, the modern type rotovator mounted on a
suitable tractor can be put to work without any prior clearing of vegetation. Three
rounds of rotovating are adequate and land is generally ready for lining out. Clearing
by this method has been found to be effective against couch grass. The rotovator
blades tend to throw the roots to this surface where they can be left to dry out or be
removed by hand. The maximum depth to which these machines can cultivate is
about 25 cm.
Trees on forest land clearings should be first ring-barked or frilled in order to kill
the trees before clearing (see page 14). The trees should be felled after they die and
the roots removed as completely as possible. The fallen timber is removed. If a
bulldozer does this, it will even out most of the holes from which the roots have been
removed, but it may be necessary to fill in some of the deeper holes to allow free
passage of the ripping equipment.
It is a very bad practice to bulldoze or dump timber and trash from a clearing on to
land that will be needed for planting with tea in future. This will raise the pH of the
soil of the land on which the trash is dumped, there will be heavy weed growth and
probably a high casualty rate in the newly planted tea. Burning timber and plant debris
can also produce large patches of spoiled land on which the tea will not establish.
Dumping and burned trash must be confined to areas unsuitable for tea planting.
Between each stage of these operations, it is advisable to clear away from the site
all pieces of “couch” grass and free roots which become exposed. The ripping
operation which follows should be done at least twice, the second ripping being across
the first. After each operation, hand forking should be done, to reduce the risk of
losses from Armillaria disease in the tea in future years.
 The main danger from Armillaria is generally from stumps and roots left by the
ripper below forking depth. Thus it may pay to dig these out by hand when they are
seen in a hole from which a tree has been uprooted. This latter operation must precede
bulldozing as these holes tend to become covered while bulldozing. During
bulldozing care should be taken to ensure minimum disturbance and removal of
fertile topsoil.
The final ripping before planting must always be across the gradient, never up and
down the slope.
After clearing, the land should be ploughed and harrowed a number of times to
break down the clods of soil from around the grass roots. The grass roots are then left
on the surface to dry out. This operation can be done by gangs of labour with jembes,
especially in cases where there are heavy layers of Napier grass roots. In forest land,
ripping and subsoiling is normally required to prepare the land for lining out while in
grassland and wattle trees, land ploughing and harrowing, or hoeing for small
growers, is normally required to prepare the land before lining out.
(ii) Sub-soiling
Subsoiling, when necessary, is the next operation, and should normally precede
lining out, or, if contour planting is envisaged, both can be combined (see page
65).
By placing the subsoiling tines at the required spacing, staking can be done by
following behind the tractor and placing marking stakes at the required planting
distances. In some instances the marking of the line spacing has been eliminated and
the planter merely plants along the sub-soiled line at the require spacing.
If subsoiling is not considered necessary or possible, lining is carried out as a
separate operation. Two 30-metre chains and an adequate number of marking stakes
are all that are required for this operation.

(iii) Terracing (see Figures I:1 and I:2)

Before starting graded terracing, any holes remaining from which large trees were
uprooted will need filling. Next, cut-off or down drains should be sited. Should
there be a hollow or depression in the area for planting, this will be the best site for
a cut-off drain. Other cut-off drains can then be measured from this, bearing in
mind that no graded terrace should have water flowing in one direction for more
than 300m. Shorter distances are better as an insurance against heavy storms. In
the event of a road being planned across the top of, or through the area, culverts
must be placed so that they discharge water into a cut-off drain.
The “O” or starting line is then chosen, and points marked at the correct distances
along this from which terraces will run laterally. An “O” line will be necessary
between each two down drains, or between a drain and a road where it is decided
to spill terrace water on to a road and this road is more than 300m from a drain. A
road tracer is considered accurate enough to mark out graded terraces, but if neither
this nor a surveyor’s level is available, a small spirit level which will fit on to a
cord may be used.
Using a road tracer, “shots” of 15m are recommended and marking stakes should
be put up at this distance across the field, the road tracer having been set to give a
fall of half per cent, or more in areas of particularly high rainfall and on steep
slopes (see page 12).
Each graded terrace is marked out from the “O” line to the nearest drain, or to a
road if the roadside drain is to take water from the terraces.
Where a terrace crosses depression and there is no run-off drain there, it is
necessary to take short shots and so follow the contour accurately.
When a spirit-level is used, shots of 7m are most suitable as it is not practicable
to keep the string taut over longer distances. The string can be fixed to the top of
two 1-metre high thin stakes, one being “V” notched 3cm into the top to give the
required fall. The spirit level should be placed midway between the stakes. When
marking out is completed or enough work done to merit a start on making terraces,
the tractor and terracer should start on the first terrace from the top of the field.
Terraces can be done by hand, but tractor-made terraces are far more satisfactory
as they are compacted by the tractor during making.
It is best for terraces to be made alongside and above the marking stakes, as the
tractor driver then has a guide when he is making terraces.
The trough of the terrace should be at least ½ m deep and 2 m wide. When each
terrace has been completed it should be checked with whatever instrument was
used to mark it out, taking shots of 7m working in each direction from the “O”
lines, and all high spots dug out by hand.
On slopes steeper than 20 per cent, the vertical interval can be maintained at 2 m
and terrace banks made narrower. It is imperative that the banks, of necessity made
by hand, are well consolidated and a cover crop of oats or love-grass is planted
immediately. The cover crop should be broadcast over the whole field. Holing and
planting operations for the tea largely bury this crop and a second, inter-row crop
should be planted immediately following the tea planting.
In situations where the slope of the land is steeper than 20 per cent, the fall of the
terraces from the “O” line should be increased from ½ percent to 1½ per cent.
Following this, down-drains (cut-off drains) are put in, care being taken to see
water from the terraces will flow into them. Drains which are to be grassed should
be wide and shallow; concrete or stone drains are better. Drains must be adequate
to take water from heavy storms off the terraces. Terraces must be accurately made;
a badly made terrace is more dangerous than no terrace at all.
A useful guide for making terraces is given in Table I:1. In practice, the slope
of the land may be constantly changing from the top to the bottom of a hill and so
the average gradient is normally used. Only when the slope changes by more than
5 per cent need a new distance between terraces be determined.
 Fig I.1
Method for marking terraces

Fig.I.2
Formation of terraces on sloping land
Table I:1. Distances between terraces relative to slope

Angle of Slope Vertical Horizontal Ground

slope () (%) interval (cm) distance distance (m)
(m)
1° 1.7 74 42.51 42.55
2° 3.5 88 25.08 25.09
3° 5.2 101 19.25 19.28
4° 7.0 114 16.34 16.38
5° 8.7 128 14.59 14.64
6° 10.5 141 13.42 13.49
7° 12.3 155 12.58 12.68
8° 14.0 168 11.96 12.08
9° 15.8 182 11.47 11.61
10° 17.6 195 11.08 11.25
11° 19.4 209 10.76 10.96
12° 21.3 223 10.49 10.72
13° 23.1 237 10.26 10.53
14° 24.9 251 10.06 10.37
15° 26.8 265 9.90 10.24
16° 28.7 279 9.75 10.14
17° 30.6 294 9.61 10.05

Calculations
Vertical interval (cm)
1. % slope = 100 tan  = ----------------------------
Horizontal distance (m)

2. Vertical interval (cm) = (7.62 x % slope) + 60.96

(38 x % slope)
= approximately -------------------- + 61
5

Vertical interval (cm)

3. Horizontal distance (m) =----------------------------
100 tan 

Vertical interval (cm)

= ----------------------------
% slope
Vertical interval (cm)
4. Ground distance (m) = ---------------------------
100 sin 
5. The area, measured in hectares, enclosed by a 100 m length of ground between
two terraces is found by dividing the distance between the terraces by 100 ( e.g.
at a 9 slope, the horizontal area is 0.1147 ha and the ground area is 0.1161 ha).
 Lining or marking out for planting is the next step. For this a 30-metre surveyor’s
chain is best and sufficient supply of half-metre stakes will be needed. First a line of
stakes is put along the middle of the terrace faces and lining starts from these lines.
Take the line along the face of the first terrace and that along the face of the second,
and from the first, work upwards, using whatever distances between the lines of tea
decided upon. As terraces never run parallel, there will be some short lines or lines
that cannot be taken to the end, and by the above method these will come between
the terraces, which is a help towards soil conservation. After lining the first two
terraces, the same system is used until the field is finished (see Figure I:3).
An alternative and more convenient method is to mark out the lines for planting so
that they are parallel to every second terrace. Taking every second terrace is reached.
In this way the short lines will run into every other terrace which can be used as a
path or road convenient for starting and finishing any operations through the lines of
tea later (see Figure I:4).

(iv) Field drainage in low-lying areas

Terraces and cut-off drains are adequate for sloping land (see plates 1 & 2). Low-
lying areas need a system of parallel channels leading into a main drain or
channels laid out in a herring-bone pattern. Whichever method suits the
conditions, the main drain must be in the lowest part of the area, it must have a
fall of at least 1 per cent to ensure disposal of water and channels leading into it
must also have their fall.
Should the area have a high water table and be liable to water-logging, then drains
must be adequate to lower the water table sufficiently to prevent water-logging. This
may entail quite deep drains and a problem of subsoil disposal.

e) Killing trees
The aboricide 2,4,5-T has been effective in killing trees but has been withdrawn from
the market in Kenya. The TRFK has not yet tested another chemical for killing trees.
An alternative is “frilling” (ring-barking), that is, the bark is cut with a panga all round
the trunk and pulled away without removing or cutting the pulled bark to remove it
from the tree (see Figure I:5). The TRFK cannot, from experience, quote the time any
particular species will take to die. The majority of species may take two to three years
to die. This slow dying reduces the food reserves of the roots and this will reduce the
risk of Armillaria infection following removal of tree (see page 170).
 “Point rows” meet
in every second bund.
The other bunds are
taken as master lines.

Fig I:3
Lining for planting: First method

“Point rows” in between

bunds. Each bund is
taken as master line for
half the rows above and
half below the bund

Fig I : 4
Lining for planting: Second method
 Fig. I : 5
Frilling tree trunks
Removing dead shade trees
When shade trees in mature stand of tea have been killed by ring-barking, their
removal presents special problems. The normal procedure is to fell the trees by
sawing or chopping through the trunk as close to the ground level as possible, sawing
off the branches before felling so as to reduce the damage to the tea bushes to a
minimum. The branches and trunk are cut into sections and hauled out through the
tea.
There is no need to remove the complete root system of the trees if they have been
successfully and completely killed.
After cutting, the exposed surface of the trunk which remains in the ground should
be covered with soil to a depth of 10 cm. This will hasten the decay of the wood by
cellulose-destroying fungi and bacteria from the soil. The species of termites which
live on dead stumps and roots are harmless to growing tea.
It should be realised, however, that even this method is seldom completely effective
against Armillaria. It is normal to find a few bushes dying from Armillaria in the
years following the removal of shade trees, particularly in the fields where the trees
had grown very large before being killed.On no account should attempts be made to
remove living shade trees by this method. If this is done, the roots left in the ground
become permeated by Armillaria. So if shade trees are felled before they die, and
living roots are left in the ground, a high incidence of Armillaria deaths in the
surrounding tea bushes will inevitably follow during the next two years.
See also the chapter on diseases control on page 170.
f) Land management after clearing
(i) Preparing land for planting
Persistent herbicides should not be applied to cleared land prior to planting unless
the land is not to be planted with tea for at least three months. Doses of up to 7 kg
active ingredient of each chemical per hectare can be used (Karmex - 8.75 kg).
Couch and other grasses can be removed by Round-up (Glyphosate) at 6
litres per hectare. Tea can be planted six weeks after such treatment, not earlier.
All vegetation should be burnt off by applications of paraquat (Gramoxone).
Repeated applications will discourage deep-rooted plants; Kikuyu grass can be
killed by repeated applications of Gramoxone. Doses up to 1.4 litres, with 280
ml of Teepol, per hectare can be used. Cover crops such as Oats and
Guatemala grass are recommended.
Land treated with persistent herbicides cannot therefore be planted with a cover
crop before tea is planted.
(ii) Tea following wattle
After felling, wattle stumps become infested by parasitic fungi especially of the
general Fomes and Ustulina which are the causal agents of brown root rot and
charcoal stump rot diseases of tea. By the end of the third year after felling the wattle
roots and the fungi themselves will have been attacked and destroyed by harmless
fungi and other bacteria from the soil micro flora.
If tea is to be planted on land which has previously carried wattle trees and
wattle stumps are to be left in the ground, then a minimum period of three years
must elapse between felling the wattle and planting tea, if very heavy losses
from root diseases are to be avoided. This time interval can be reduced if the
wattle trees are frilled before felling but it is understood that this practice
destroys wattle bark.
There is strong evidence that wattle trees greatly improve land intended for tea,
when the recommended three-year interval is followed. In smallholding areas
it is suggested that farmers plant row crops such as beans and potatoes during
the three-year period.
g) Road making
Roads on tea estates are a major and expensive item. Lime can be used to produce a
road-bed which is much more durable than good murram. Some of the trunk roads
reconstructed in Kenya have been made by this method, with a thin layer of tarmac
to provide a better wearing surface.
All types of soil can be stabilised provided sufficient lime is used. The method is
to mix lime evenly with the surface layer of the road while it is fairly dry and then
grade the surface. Wet the surface until it is fairly tacky but not saturated and then
roll it.
The surface so formed will remain solid in most weather conditions. The major
form of loss will be as dust blown off in dry weather. If the surface does get pitted
it can be re-graded, wetted and rolled. This can be repeated indefinitely so long as
lime is present.
The important parts of the operations are:
1. Thorough mixing of the lime with the soil.
2. Adequate but not excessive wetting; it does not need to be so wet that
it sticks to the roller
3. Very thorough rolling.
The amount of lime required will vary with the soil. On big road contracts, the
soil type is tested to avoid wasting lime (see below). Table I:2 gives the quantities
of lime required for estate roads.

Table I:2. Lime quantities for road stabilisation

Soil type Lime Kg of lime per metre length of road, 3
percentage m wide, mixed to a depth of 10 cm
Murram 5 18 kg
Red soil 10 36 kg
Black cotton 20 72 kg
soil

The lime to be used is slaked or hydrated lime; the lowest grade available being
adequate.

(i) Grass roads

Care must be taken in the choice of sites for these roads as they are unreliable for
transport in wet weather, and are apt to cut up and transport may bog down on
them. Boundary roads and intermediate roads are the only suitable sites for this
type of road surface.
One of the best grasses for this purpose in Kenya is Kikuyu Grass, Pennisetum
clandestinum, because:
1 It is frequently available in large quantities and is easy to plant
2 It is vigorous and forms a dense mat which can be kept tidy by
mowing without reducing the vigour of the grass.
When conditions are right for planting, disc harrow the road one or two rounds
to give a tilth which will speed the operation. After harrowing, lines 15 cm to 30
cm apart (according to the amount of planting material available) are opened down
to 8 cm or 10 cm deep. The closer these lines are, the quicker cover will be
achieved.
These lines should follow the road alignment and not cross it. If lines are planted
across the road a corrugated surface may develop and be very noticeable in a vehicle.
Light watering after opening up lies for planting will help the grass to root. It is
recommended that phosphate be added to these lines at the rate of 55 kg P2O5 per
hectare to aid the establishment of the grass.
The grass should be planted in the lines, covered with soil and firmed down. It is
better to leave ends of grass sticking out to reduce erosion until the grass is
established.
It is not necessary to have a lot of growth on grass roads. Roots are what are needed,
and roads should be kept closely cut and the edges trimmed.
 Natural regeneration and establishment of indigenous grasses, followed by frequent
close cutting is sufficient to establish adequate grass roads in many parts of Kenya.

(ii) Grass verges

These are recommended on roadside banks and along the sides of drains, as they
prevent the bank from eroding and exposing the roots of tea bushes. A single, thin
line of grass planted between the metalled road surface and the edge of the adjacent
drain is useful in preventing the loss of murram and gravel by washing into the drain.
It is necessary, however, to have a good camber on the road and periodically to clear
the debris away from the grass and back to the middle of the road so that water can
pass freely through the grass into the drain and not form rivulets down the road.
Love grass (Eragrostis curvula) and Dallis grass (Paspalum sp.) are recommended
for these purposes. Kikuyu grass (Pennisetum clandestinum) is effective but needs
constant attention to keep it from spreading into tea and road, and is therefore not
recommended. Eragrostis curvula is easy to establish as it is a prolific seed producer
and germination from seed is very high. Unless turfs of this grass are available for
splitting and planting, seed should be planted in a nursery five or six months
beforehand.
For planting, turfs are dug up and split into small pieces, trimmed and dibbled in, the
closer the better as this will give quicker cover. Two or three grains of superphosphate
in each hole into which grass is to be planted will improve establishment. The area
planted should be hand weeded after planting to delay weed germination until the grass
is established.
The grass chosen must never be planted nearer to tea than 60 cm or it will adversely
affect the growth of the tea.
Khus Khus (Vetivera zizanioides) grass is sometimes used to reduce erosion because
of its dense mated root system. It tends to grow in clumps, forming gaps in the row
through which erosion channels form, and also competes severely for soil water with
adjacent tea rows in dry weather.

(iii) Road drainage

The run-off from murramed roads is proportionately greater than that from fields.
Drains must discharge into existing or intended cut-off drains, and not into planted
areas.
The directions of flow of a roadside drain to the nearest culvert should be at an even
fall. Should the fall at any place become less, silting will occur at this point and
water may cross the road and spill into the clearing.
Culverts should slope from the upper to the lower side of the road and should have
a trap at the upper end to collect silt and trash. This trap should not be less than 1
metre square and its floor 30 cm below the culvert; the trap should be cleared out
from time to time.
Cut-off drains must be of sufficient capacity to deal with the discharge from road
drains and culverts should not be less than 40 cm diameter. The best type of cut-off
drain is that made of precast concrete sections or stone and cement. Grass drains silt
up and requires careful maintenance.
h) Erosion
One of the factors detrimental to the establishment of young tea is soil erosion, which
is more severe the more sloppy the area to be planted to tea. The danger from erosion
in tea areas is greatest on land prior to and just after planting and even if this land is
terraced (see page 10) there will be movement of soil between terraces during heavy
storms. Mulching or planting with oats is recommended to reduce this soil movement
(see pages 22 and 25).
Since the use of herbicides has become prevalent the trash due to dead weeds
also helps in reducing soil erosion. Young tea is vulnerable to erosion because it
has not formed an appreciable ground cover, and for this reason prunings should
never be removed. An experiment was carried out in Kericho district tea zone to
quantify surface run-off and soil erosion on a sloppy (10% slope) field of tea. The
experiment showed that:
1. Grass mulching gave the best control of soil erosion, followed by a treatment
in which oats were planted between rows of tea. Hand weeding and hoeing,
which produce a surface cap of loose soil, was found to give slightly better
erosion control than non-tillage treatment. (Figure I:6, above). However,
hoeing is undesirable in tea fields because of the potential damage to tea feeder
roots.
2. The amount of tea canopy cover was an important factor in the reduction of the
amount of soil erosion.
3. The very large amounts of soil lost, 211 and 255 tonnes per hectare in the tillage
and non-tillage treatments respectively during the three years following
planting, shows the need for proper and adequate soil erosion control measures
when land is prepared for planting and immediately after planting.
Tea bush management which encourages the early spread of the canopy, such as
pegging, is a better method of reducing the amount of soil erosion than frequent
pruning. In areas of high rainfall (therefore high erosion hazards), tea clones which
spreads easily and quickly following planting should be preferred to those which
spread slowly. Closer spacing at planting can also produce early closure of canopy.
Tea planted on or near a bund of soil immediately below a terrace trench show
remarkable tolerance to extended drought. These bunds (or micro-catchments) are
capable of intercepting run-off water and eroded soil if properly constructed and
maintained. This can be particularly beneficial in young tea plant in sloppy areas.
Water from roads must be kept out of tea areas and confined to drains. Run-off
from roads may be quite high and can cause serious erosion by forming gulleys
which will tend to get progressively deeper, resulting in washing off young tea
or causing serious root exposure in old tea.

i) Mulch
Effects of mulching tea
A surface organic mulch has two types of effects on the soil: a characteristic effect
from being on the surface of the soil, and a general effect it would have if it were
ploughed into the soil, due to the plant nutrients set free as it decomposes.

1. Effects on soil temperature

In many instances, soil temperature is of greater ecological significance to plant life
than air temperature. A surface mulch affects both the diurnal and seasonal
fluctuations of the soil temperature. The effects of mulch depend on its type, the
amount applied and its rate of decay.
A field experiment conducted at the Tea Research Foundation’s station in Kericho
showed that under young tea plants, grass mulches had the effect of reducing
diurnal variations, but generally lowering the average soil temperature at 0 - 10 cm
depth. This had a negative effect on the growth rate of young tea plants. The
general high average soil temperature under the plastic mulch had a positive effect
on the growth of the young tea plants.
The results of the experiment clearly showed that in high altitude areas with cool
climate, low soil temperatures can reduce rates of growth and yield of tea.

2. Effects on soil moisture and other physical aspects.

Mulches reduce the rate at which moisture is lost from the soil by evaporation,
particularly in young and newly pruned tea where a large proportion of the soil is
exposed to direct sunlight and drying wind.
Mulches prevent soil from cracking. They also prevent soil from puddling by the
impact of rain drops thus helping to keep the soil surface permeable. Furthermore,
rain water can only reach the soil surface through the mulch as a gentle stream of
clear water, which gives greater permeability than if the soil surface itself was
exposed to the beating rain. Thus mulch reduces the run-off of the rain and
consequently reduces the amount of soil the water can carry and increases the
proportion of water that percolates into the soil. So, not only is evaporation from
the surface of the mulched soil reduced, but also the amount of water infiltrating
into it is increased. Hence, the water-supplying power of a soil can be considerably
increased by mulching.
3. Effects on nutrition of the tea plant.
Organic mulch supplies extra nutrients to the tea. As the organic mulch decomposes,
the plant nutrients held in it are released into the soil and become available to the
plant. Experiments have shown that organic mulch is particularly beneficial when
applied with inorganic phosphatic fertilizers such as single superphosphate. In the
very acid soils on which tea thrives best this form of phosphate fertilizer immediately
reacts with some elements in the soil forming less soluble and less mobile
compounds. Unless the roots are able to reach them, they will remain unused.
Improvement of the soil’s physical structure, as a result of using organic mulch
enables the roots to reach these tied-up phosphates. In the decomposing of organic
mulch, a chemical solution is released which reacts with the insoluble phosphate
compounds rendering them available to the plant. Results of the experiments
conducted at the Foundation’s station have shown increases in uptake of nitrogen,
phosphorous, potassium and magnesium where organic mulches have been applied,
including tea prunings and leaf falls.
It has been found that tea prunings in four-year cycles can return to the soil as much
as 400 kg nitrogen, 25 kg phosphorous and 200 kg potassium per hectare.
It is therefore very important to leave prunings in situ. Removal of prunings has
been found to result in a yield drop of 30 and 27% in the first and second year,
respectively following pruning.
Continued application of organic mulching material high in potassium such as
Napier grass has been shown to induce magnesium deficiency. On the other hand,
continued application of potassium deficient material such as Eragrostis curvula
grass can induce potassium deficiency. It is therefore recommended that remedial
application of the respective mulch deficient tea nutrients be made where
necessary.
When fresh plant material is applied as a mulch during wet weather, the decay of
the mulch initially reduces the soil nitrogen available for use by the tea and this
can lead to a marked reduction in the growth rate of young tea plants, particularly
if the mulch itself has a low nitrogen content, as in the grasses. When this material
is applied together with nitrogenous fertilizer, the response to nitrogen in terms of
crop has been shown to be higher on mulched tea than on unmulched tea. However,
it has been demonstrated that a high level of nitrogenous fertilizer applied together
with a grass mulch in young tea can be harmful in some areas.

(ii) Suitable materials

The following materials have been found to be suitable for application as mulch. The
list is not exhaustive but, while mulching tea; care should be taken not to introduce
weeds in tea gardens. Prunings and leaf fall of tea
Guatemala grass (Tripsacum laxum)
Napier grass (Pennisetum purpureum)
Weeping grass (Eragrostis curvula)
Oats (Avena sativa)
Maize stalks (Zea mays, L.)
Guatemala grass has proved to be the most effective of all the mulching materials.
However, in high altitude and colder tea areas, its growth is comparatively slower
than in the warmer tea areas as it takes 18 to 24 months from planting to become
sufficiently well established to stand cutting.
Napier grass should be cut and thoroughly wilted before spreading. It need not be
chopped into small pieces as leaf shrinkage is minimal and rotting down is slow,
thus offering a good soil cover. A mulch depth of five centimetres can be
considered appropriate.
The main problem that accompanies the large-scale use of mulch is the cost of
growing and applying the material. For example, to grow Napier grass to provide
mulch for tea at the rate of 40,000 kg ( 40 metric tons) per hectare requires about
one hectare of planted Napier grass for each five hectares of tea to be mulched.
Mulch in the form of mature tea prunings and leaf litter, if conserved properly, will
confer benefits for several years, depending on the condition of the tea at the time
of pruning. This is why it is advised that tea prunings should never be removed
from tea fields.
Following the application of mulch it is important that the soil is not disturbed and
any weed control must be effected by chemicals or by hand pulling. Mulch is most
effective when applied before the onset of the dry spell i.e. in
November/December.
Weeping grass mulch is more resistant to decomposition as an additional
advantage over the other grass mulches on the effective duration in conserving the
soil.
In order to provide sufficient vegetative matter, oats would need to be planted
continuously in the first two or three years of planting tea. A shallow ( 2.5 cm)
trench, width of a cheel hoe, is scraped out between each contour row of tea. For
less sloppy areas, the planting may be at every interval of two rows of tea. In newly
cleared land, the sowing of oats should be accompanied by a light application of
single superphosphate at the rate of 30 gm per running metre (or 260 kg per ha).
This will assist the oats to obtain a good stand and much of the fertilizer thus used
would eventually become available to the tea plants. The cutting of oats should be
carried out as soon as the first signs of flowering are observed. This encourages
the oats to tiller and provide mulching material from loppings obtained from the
oat cuttings.

(iii) Some negative effects of mulching of tea

Mulching of tea may also have negative effects on tea growth. Continuous mulching
has been found to induce shallow rooting as the tea roots tend to grow laterally. This
causes the tea plants to be susceptible to drought.
In the cold high altitude tea areas, heavy mulching of tea can further reduce soil
temperatures especially during the cold months. Low daily temperatures prevailing
over a long period have been found to reduce tea growth rate.
When mulch is applied to newly planted tea, care should be taken to avoid the dry
mulching material touching the young tea plants. This is important especially in areas
where destructive ants (e.g. termites) are a problem where the mulching material will
form a habitable medium for the ants.
 Considerable damage to tea can be caused if dry mulching material is allowed to
catch fire. Great care should be taken during dry weather.

j) Cover crops
Land which has been cleared and terraced should be covered by an easily removed
crop as soon as possible. These crops include oats and Crotalaria sp. There are two
main advantages for this:-
1. The cover crop will reduce soil erosion to a minimum at a time when, without the
cover crop, the recently disturbed bare soil is most liable to erosion by heavy rain.
2. It will reduce the loss of organic matter from the soil. Without some form of
cover, the organic matter in the upper layers of the soil is rapidly destroyed by the
action of heat and ultraviolet rays from the sun.
The method used to establish the cover crop will depend upon the time which
will elapse between clearing the land and planting tea.
It sometimes happens that after land has been cleared and prepared for planting,
planting has to be delayed. When this happens, the normal practice is to allow
weeds and grass to regenerate over the area. If planting is unduly delayed, woody
shrubs and trees soon become re-established on neglected soil and re-clearing
becomes necessary.
These practices are no longer recommended. When a delay between clearing and
planting is inevitable, the land should normally be planted to oats (Avena sativa)
or Guatemala grass (Tripsacum laxum). Should it be desired to grow a food crop,
either beans or Irish potatoes are suitable. Maize, sunflower or sweet potatoes
should not be grown on land intended for the cultivation of tea because these are
heavy feeders and thus would remove a lot of nutrients from the soil.
If the period before planting tea will be a few months, then the land must be
planted with a cover crop as soon as possible.
If tea planting will follow immediately after the land has been cleared and
terraced, then oats should be sown between the lines of tea as soon as possible after
the tea as been planted.
In most areas the best cover is oats. This crop is simple and cheap to establish,
remains in the field for up to one year, and its stubble remains for up to two years
as a guard against soil erosion.
Several perennial leguminous plants can be used. Examples include Crotalaria
anagyroides and some varieties of Lupin.
Weeds which become established among oats can be killed by spraying with
herbicides which contain 2,4-D, which does not affect oats. There is no effective
method of controlling weed growth in the other suggested species.

(i) Oats
The recommended oats variety is Suregrain. The seeds can be sown at the rate of
about 170 kg per hectare; at the same time, single superphosphate should be mixed
with the top 5 cm of soil at the rate of about 56 kg per hectare.
When the oats are to be broadcast, the seeds and superphosphate should be
dispersed evenly over the whole area and then mixed into the top 5 cm of soil. This
can be done by hand, using garden rakes, or by tractor using harrow.
If the oats are to be established after the tea has been planted, the oats and
superphosphate should be spread in a shallow scrape, 30 cm wide, made with a
jembe between the lines of tea. The seeds should then be covered by the soil
scraped from the sides by the cheel hoe (jembe) and firmed down by foot. These
broad bands of oats are sufficient in contour-planted tea, but in regularly spaced
tea care should be taken to ensure that the bands of oats are, as far as possible,
parallel to the contours.
In the bands, the requirement is 1.5 kg oats and 3 kg single superphosphate per 100
m of band. It will always be simpler to broadcast the oats before the tea is planted.
The oats should be cut back to a height of 8 cm whenever the first signs of
flowering are seen. This encourages tillering. The stubble should be allowed to
remain to reduce soil erosion and the roots, as they decay, will add organic matter
to the soil and will improve the aeration of the soil.

(ii) Lupins and Crotalaria

These should be established in the same way as oats. In some tea areas these species
have been grown as miniature shade trees. This is not the purpose of these crops; they
should be lopped at a height of 60 cm two or three times a year and the loppings used
as mulches.

Mulching with cover crops

During wet weather, the breakdown of the mulch cut from these cover crops results
in a temporary depletion of nitrogen in the soil. This can severely retard the growth
of the young tea plants.
To overcome this, the cover crop cuttings and the application of nitrogenous
fertilizer should coincide as nearly as possible. If the cutting is carried out when
no nitrogenous fertilizer would normally be applied, it may be beneficial to
make a special broadcast application of nitrogen at the rate of 10 kg per hectare.
All cover crops should be cut down at the onset of an extended period of dry
weather. If left standing, they will rapidly remove water from the soil and this
will exaggerate the effects of the dry weather. On the other hand, the mulch
can be spread over the soil and this will help reduce evaporation of water from
the soil.
In the areas where strong winds occur during the dry weather the effect of this
wind on the young tea plants can be reduced by allowing a light stand of the
cover crop to remain during the dry weather.

k) Windbreaks
Dry air takes up water from any soil and vegetation over which it passes and the
stronger the wind, the faster will the water be removed from the soil by evaporation
and from the vegetation by transpiration. In dry weather, this process can cause a
reduction in tea yields.
In severe cases, not only may the soil dry out to such an extent that the plants suffer
from drought, but even when a plentiful supply of water remains in the soil, the
transpiration rate may be so high that the roots cannot supply water to the leaves
fast enough. Eventually the leaves wilt and may suffer permanent damage.
The object of a windbreak is to reduce the speed of damaging winds over the tea
plants. The best kind of windbreak is formed by a belt of growing trees which are
taller than the tea.
The beneficial effect of a windbreak decreases as the distance from that windbreak
increases, so it is necessary to have a series of windbreaks across the direction of
the prevailing and most damaging wind. It has been found that on level ground, the
distance between adjacent belts should be ten times the effective height of the trees
in the belts. The effective height is defined as the height of the tree above the tea.
The effective height of trees which are 10m tall which will protect tea plants about
1.5 m tall at most, is therefore 8.5 m so the belts of trees should be 85 m apart.
On sloping ground, the distance between adjacent belts should be less than this,
but if the belts become too close the yields will be reduced by shading and by
competition with the shelter trees.

(i) Siting
Turbulence is greatest over and around hills, up valleys and beside any obstacle in
the path of the wind such as buildings, woods etc. The windbreaks should be sited so
that they interrupt the wind across exposed hills and across narrowing valleys.
It is essential, therefore that the direction of the wind should be determined as
accurately as possible, bearing in mind that the direction alters over small distances
as a result of topographical features. It is helpful to prepare a plan of the area to be
protected, showing hills and valleys and their relationships to the wind direction.
The windbreaks should then be sited at right angles to the wind, especially on
windward slopes, over the top of the hills and across the valleys. Because of local
changes in wind direction, these belts will not form straight lines except on flat or
uniformly sloping ground. Changes in direction of the belts of trees should be
gradual, so that no re-entrants are formed which can funnel he wind. Similarly
there should be no gaps in the belts through which the wind can accelerate causing
even more damage to the tea.
Because wind goes round the edges of windbreaks, the belts of trees should extend
at least 20 m beyond the limits of the area which is to be protected.

(ii) Composition and establishment

1. Hakea saligna has proved to be the best tree for windbreaks in tea. It grows faster
than tea in the first few years and eventually reaches a maximum height of about
6 m. Although all plants growing in tea will compete with the tea to some extent
for soil water and nutrients, Hakea appears to compete less than most other
species and, moreover its leaves do not taint the tea. It superficially resembles
some species of Eucalyptus but in fact it belongs to a completely different family
of plants.
Hakea is normally grown from seed, which should be sown under light shade.
Individually they can be sown in polythene sleeves and transplanted to the field
when they are 20 cm to 40 cm tall. Weak and exceptionally vigorous plants should
be discarded.
The shelter belts are best planted before the tea is established, but if Hakea is to
be planted in standing tea, care should be taken to ensure that the Hakea plants
are not shaded by the tea as they will not grow well under shade. The belts should
be about 75 m apart; the trees 2 m apart in each belt.
2 Tea itself may be used to form windbreaks especially in established tea fields.
The tea plant should be allowed to run up, being trimmed to form fan-shaped trees
with fans of adjacent plants in the belts touching each other forming a continuous
windbreak at right angles to the wind. Adjacent belts should not be more than 100
m apart and normally 75 m apart.
3 Grevillea robusta may also be used as a windbreak. In the application of these
trees or tea as shelter belts in tea, it should be borne in mind that the shelter trees
should not constitute a complete barrier to wind flow through them. The rows of
trees should only reduce the speed of strong winds thus creating an environment
for good tea growth.
 Chapter II

BREEDING, CLONAL SELECTION AND

PROPAGATION
TEA BREEDING
Introduction
This chapter, formerly entitled “Propagation” has been restructured into three
sections consisting of breeding, clonal selection, and propagation. Breeding has been
treated in more detail and clarity than before, to cover important breeding objectives,
breeding and selection strategies, selection criteria, tea genetics and clonal response
to environmental variation.
In clonal selection, the classical TRFK four-stage selection programme has been
retained to preserve the information for users preferring the method. However, this
approach is too long, usually taking about 20 years or more. Therefore, a two-stage
selection programme involving progeny tests followed by full-scale clonal field
trials has been introduced. The progeny trials last six years, while the clonal field
trials last two pruning cycles, thus, shortening the duration of the breeding cycle
considerably.
New information on grafting has been added on the propagation section.

Taxonomic classification of tea

Correct name
The correct botanical name of cultivated tea is Camellia sinensis (L.) O. Kuntze,
regardless of varietal differences, and it consists of three distinct varieties, namely,
(i) China – C. sinensis var. sinensis (L.). Characterised by small, narrow, serrated,
erect, dark green leaves. It is slow growing, dwarf and shrub-like, and
originated from China.
(ii) Assam – C. sinensis var. assamica (Masters) Kitamura. This is typified by
large, horizontal, broad, mostly non-serrated, light green leaves. It is the
predominant variety grown in Kenya due to its high yield potential.
(iii) Cambod – C. sinensis var. assamica ssp lasiocalyx (Planchon ex Watt). It is a
hybrid between China and Assam varieties, with semi-erect leaves. It is found
in Indonesia but it is not common in Africa. The Tea Research Foundation of
Kenya has introduced six clones for use in breeding and clonal selection.

Clarification of nomenclature
Originally, Linnaeus classified tea as Thea sinensis (1752). Later, two varieties were
identified and classified by Masters (1844) as Thea sinensis (China type) and Thea
assamica (Assam type). Thea and Camellia were thought to be separate genera.
However, Thea is actually classified as a section within the genus Camellia, and C.
sinensis is classified under this section. The genus resembles and interbreeds freely
with tea. However, hybrids with tea do not produce suitable tea beverages. C.sasanqua
Thumb is a wild non-tea species found in Japan. Some of the wild species are resistant
to environmental stress (e.g. drought, cold temperatures, pests and diseases) and,
therefore, can be used as a source of resistance genes in tea breeding.
 Breeding objectives
The primary aim of the tea improvement programme is to provide growers with suitable
clones with combined optimum potential in yield and quality, ideally and adequately
buffered naturally against biotic (pests and diseases) and abiotic (environmental stresses
e.g. drought and high soil pH), with good adaptation and stability to prevailing
environmental conditions within the different tea growing zones in Kenya. The objectives
of the tea improvement programme include: -
.Breeding for combined optimum yield and quality.
.Breeding for environmental stress, i.e. drought resistance, high soil pH tolerance, cold
tolerance and adaptation to replanting in old tea soils.
.Breeding for pest and disease resistance.

(i) Breeding for combined optimum potential in yield and quality

In tea production, high genetic potential in yield and quality are economically important
and, therefore, constitute the main objectives of tea breeding and clonal selection. It is
particularly desirable to have an optimum combination of both for maximum profitability.
In Kenya, deliberate and successful clonal improvement of high yield potential has been
attained, with average yield potential of 3000-4000 kg of made tea per hectare year. The
improvement of clonal quality potential, however, has not received due emphasis, hitherto.
This situation can be ascribed to favourable environmental conditions found in Kenya which
favour high tea quality (Kenya tea is mainly high grown), coupled with high management
standards, particularly consistent fine plucking, which also enhances tea quality. Therefore,
there was no pressure to accord high priority to breeding for high quality potential, as there
was for high yield potential, since nature and good management assured acceptable tea
quality. However, environmental conditions are unpredictable, and climatic variations can
affect tea quality, hence, the need and importance of consistent quality assurance by
breeding for high quality potential.
It is also important to take into account market requirements and constraints to further
expansion in tea production. Naturally, consumers prefer high quality tea, which,
therefore, generally attracts greater market demand and higher prices, and this would be
especially advantageous in the event of a glut in the world market. Moreover, expansion
in production has diminished considerably both in the small scale and estate sub-sectors,
making it imperative to maximise profits per unit area of land using intensive production
methods, including the use of clones with high potential in yield and quality.

(ii) Breeding for environmental stress

Resistance or at least tolerance to environmental stress, is also important in tea
improvement. The adverse effects and long term impact of the 1997 El-Nino related drought
on tea production, clearly illustrated and emphasised the importance of using drought
resistant clones. Green leaf production dropped by 10-43% among small-holders and by
about 90% in some tea estates, and many tea bushes died. These effects can be mitigated
using appropriate management strategies, which include the development of strong deep
roots while bringing young tea into bearing, careful use of fertilizers, and correct timing and
methods of pruning. However, some resistant clones are available, as was evident in
research plots during the 1997 drought in which clone SFS 150 from Malawi and Tea
Research Foundation of Kenya’s clone 303/577 were less affected by the drought.
Therefore, drought resistance forms an integral and important component of tea breeding.
Other environmental stresses, which can partly be overcome through the breeding of suitable
clones, include soil pH, cold temperatures and difficulties with replanting in old moribund
tea fields. In Kenya, pockets of high pH due to past settlement can be ameliorated using high
soil pH tolerant clones, particularly TN 14-3. Clones STC 5/3 and TAI are also tolerant to
high pH, but clone STC 5/3 has not found widespread use because it is low yielding.
However, the range of improved high pH tolerant clones could be diversified through
breeding. Similarly, low pH particularly below the lower limit (pH 4.0) of the normal range
(pH 4.0-5.6), can also be detrimental for optimum tea growth and, hence, is also important
in tea breeding. Likewise, selection of clones suitable for replanting in moribund tea fields
may constitute part of the long term solution to this complex problem.

(iii) Breeding for pest and disease resistance

In Kenya, tea pests and diseases can cause significant crop losses. Tea mites, particularly the
red crevice (scarlet) mite (Brevipalpus phoenicis), can reduce tea yields by 14-30% in localised
areas of the Mt Kenya region. Similarly, scale insects, especially the fried egg scales
(Aspidiotus species) and the soft scales (Ceroplastes species) can lower tea yields by 5-10%.
Among tea diseases, concern has heightened on stem canker (Phomopsis) caused by the fungus
Phomopsis theae. Increased incidences of Hypoxylon wood rot and Armillaria root rot have
also been noted. Breeding for pest and disease resistance constitutes the most viable control
option because of the high cost, health and environmental effects associated with chemical
control.

Breeding and selection strategies

Successful plant genetic improvement depends on the correct selection of breeding stocks
(parents), use of controlled hybridisation, and proper evaluation of the resulting progeny for
the desirable traits using reliable selection criteria.

(i) Selection of breeding stocks

Important considerations in the selection of breeding stocks include the genetic potential of
the breeding stocks, and a broad genetic base (i.e. genetic lineage) of these stocks.

(a) Genetic potential of breeding stocks

Genotypic traits are hereditary and different genotypes vary in their genetic constitution, i.e.
in the type of genes and alleles responsible for the phenotypic expression of specific traits.
This variation forms the basis of genetic segregation and recombination, and clonal selection
during evaluation in field trials.
Principally, high yield and quality form the primary goals in tea improvement, but breeding
for environmental stress and resistance to pests and diseases constitute important secondary
considerations which have to be incorporated as much as possible in the selection of
breeding stocks.
Yield and quality are complex quantitative polygenic traits, each with many components,
which are controlled by many interacting genes. The genetic constitution of a genotype is
hereditary and is reconstituted in the progeny of each new generation through the segregation
and recombination of alleles of the parent stocks. However, it is highly unlikely that any single
parent can possess all the desirable alleles for a particular trait at its gene loci. Therefore,
parents with some of the desirable traits are usually crossed to create progeny with new genetic
recombinations. These F1 populations are used to select genotypes with the desired traits and,
ultimately, the optimum gene combinations for the desired traits may be assembled and
accumulated through recurrent selection over several generations.
According to genetic modes of inheritance, most progeny from controlled biclonal crosses
assume mid-parent values. However, allelic and epistatic gene interactions may cause
transgressive segregation in which some progeny will be significantly improved than the best
parent. This is important and fundamental in achieving satisfactory gains in plant breeding,
hence, the importance of correct choice of parents, and the role of controlled hybridisation.

(b) Genetic base of breeding stocks

A broad genetic base is essential for the attainment of genetic advance in plant breeding: -
 To provide a large magnitude of genetic variation and, therefore, ensure high frequency
of genetic recombination and generate many new genotypes (progenies) from specific
biclonal (paired) crosses to be screened for desirable traits.
 To sustain future genetic advances in tea improvement.
 To minimise possible inheritance of adverse genes, e.g. susceptibility to pests, diseases
and drought.
 To safeguard against genetic erosion, i.e. maintain a high degree of genetic variability in
the breeding stocks and commercially cultivated clones.
It may be tempting to over-exploit genetically outstanding clones, as has happened in
the past in East Africa, but the practice will erode and narrow the genetic base, thus,
diminishing the level of genetic variation and posing the risks noted above.
African teas derive their genetic base from restricted, random open-pollinated (half-sib)
hybrid provenances in Assam, India. In Kenya, mass selection among popular seedling
populations, and subsequent breeding using a few elite parents, and replanting with a few
outstanding clones, are thought to have eroded the genetic base further. In particular, clone
6/8 alone accounts for 60% of the number (45) of TRFK released clones. Similarly, only
five popular clones, namely, clones 6/8, S15/10, BB35, 31/8 and TN 14-3, form the bulk of
the commercial clones. The first three are susceptible to drought, while the last two are
moderately susceptible; clone S15/10 appears to be susceptible to Phomopsis (stem canker)
caused by the fungus Phomopsis theae, yet all are among popular breeding stocks in Kenya.
Thus, both the genetic base of the breeding stocks and some of the commercially grown
clones are restricted. This has limited genetic advances in the selection for high potential in
yield and quality, and some clones derived from some of the parents, e.g. 6/8 and S15/10,
are prone to Phomopsis.
It is relatively easy and rapid to characterise the magnitude and pattern of genetic variation
and diversity, and estimate the extent of genetic relatedness within and between taxons using
molecular techniques, Recent studies using Randomly Amplified Polymorphic DNA
(RAPD) have shown that a high degree of genetic diversity and differentiation exists within
and between commercial tea clones in Kenya. However, closely related clones were
discerned, indicating common pedigrees, obviously due to over-reliance on a few breeding
stocks, thus, underscoring the need to ascertain genetic relatedness. A similar study using
Amplified Fragment Length Polymorphic DNA markers (AFLP) validated these findings
among Kenyan tea clones compared to Indian clones. Therefore, a broad genetic base exists
in the genetic pool of tea in Kenya, but care must be taken to use disparate parents in
breeding programmes.
In recent years, the genetic base of the breeding stocks at TRFK has been broadened to
include Cambod tea (Camellia sinensis variety assamica subspecies lasiocalyx), naturally
occurring polyploids and some wild species of Camellia. Cambod tea clones are considered
to be putative hybrids of Assam and China teas, and have shown good potential in high yield
and quality in field trials in Kenya. Polyploids are relatively more vigorous than diploid
clones, and this can be exploited in tea breeding and clonal selection, in addition to possible
use as rootstocks. Wild species may be used to transfer any useful genes to cultivated tea
e.g. resistance to drought, low temperatures.
 Moreover, investigations have been initiated at TRFK to rationalise the existing gene pool
through a comprehensive characterisation of germplasm accessions based on phenotypic,
genetic, cytogenetic, biochemical and chemical traits. In this way, information gathered on
the extent of genetic variation and pattern of genetic diversity will facilitate the identification
of disparate seedling populations, clones and breeding stocks; and the exclusion of
duplicates especially within breeding stocks and living museums. The germplasm will also
be screened to identify sources of resistance to important biotic and abiotic factors.

(ii) Controlled hybridisation

The breeding method used is also important and has to meet certain criteria to be effective.
First, it must be able to assemble and accumulate all the desirable traits, e.g. high yield
potential and high quality, and drought resistance, in one clone. Obviously, no single parent
is likely to possess desirable genes for every trait and, therefore, parents with some of these
traits need to be crossed to obtain new genotypes, some of which may possess good genetic
combinations of the desirable traits.

A B A B A B A B A B A
B B
A A B A B A
B B
A B A B A A
B B
A A B A B A
B B
A B A B A A
B B
A B A B A B A B A B A

Previous breeding schemes in East Africa and Kenya in particular, have mostly been based
on mass selection in seedling tea populations and uncontrolled open cross-pollination.
Mass selection is largely subjective and relatively inefficient, while the seedling teas
represent heterogeneous open-pollinated genotype, which were derived from parent
sources of unproven genetic potential, in which occurrence of superior genotypes is
extremely low. The disadvantage of uncontrolled open-pollination (half-sib mating) is that
the genetic potential of only the female parent is known, in contrast to controlled cross-
pollination (full-sib mating), either by means of hand-pollination or isolated biclonal
breeding populations in which both the male and female parents are known. Clearly, the
best breeding option must involve controlled cross-pollination of the selected parents.
Controlled-pollination can be mediated artificially by hand or under natural conditions in
isolated seed baries. In tea, artificial seed production is usually low compared to natural
seed production. High seed set enhances the chances of producing elite genotypes.
Therefore, natural pollination is preferable, though it may allow low levels of
contamination from extraneous pollen.
However, contamination can be minimised using adequate isolation distances between
biclonal seed baries, with 2-3 rows of closely spaced buffers consisting of alternating
guard rows of both parents.
It is suggested that each barie should contain 16 plants, eight of each clone, and these
should be surrounded by a guard row of the same two clones planted close together. Seed
should be collected only from the central 16 trees.
 (iii) Selection criteria
Tea is a perennial, highly self-incompatible crop, with a long breeding cycle. Therefore, tea
breeding is long term and, hence, requires precise selection. Phenotypic selection (mass
selection) based on morphological characteristics was used widely in past field selection
programmes in East Africa, but phenotypic traits are influenced by environmental factors
and the technique is subjective.
Selection criteria are usually related to the commercial product, i.e. harvestable yield and
quality, consisting of the terminal tender shoots only. Therefore, leaf characteristics
constitute the principal selection criteria in tea and, therefore, it is logical and essential that
selection for high yield and quality is done concurrently, as well as for any other important
agronomic characteristics, e.g. drought resistance.

(a) Yield selection criteria

Yield is primarily determined by shoot numbers, shoot weight and the rate of shoot
regeneration and extension, which, though intrinsically genetic, are influenced by
environmental factors. Therefore, their phenotypic expression varies according to
environmental conditions and is generally weakly correlated.
Clonal differences in dry matter production and partitioning and harvest index may
also be used to select for high yield potential. The harvest index of tea is low, ranging
between 7 to 24%. Generally, however, high yielding clones tend to have greater above
ground biomass and, therefore, high dry matter production and harvest index than low
yielding clones. In one study, for example, clone S15/10 which is a very high yielding
clone with a record yield of 11000 kg of made tea per hectare per year, also has a high
harvest index (37%).
However, the use of dry matter production and harvest index in clonal selection in tea
is not routinely practised, because the measurements involved are very laborious, tedious
and time consuming, and, thus, are less attractive for routine practical use in large selection
programmes. Similarly, morphological traits associated with high harvest index with
regard to light interception, notably, leaf area index and leaf pose angle are not routinely
used. However, given adequate resources, any method that complements others in clonal
selection should be utilised.

(b) Selection criteria for quality potential

Theaflavins and thearubigins, whose precursors are the green leaf flavanols, are genotype
dependent, mainly determine plain black tea quality. These flavanols consist of many
compounds including (+)gallocatechin, (+)catechin, (-)epicatechin, (-)epigallocatechin,
(-)epigallocatechin gallate and (-)epicatechin gallate. Caffeine, associated with the
briskness of black tea, is also genetic. Total green leaf polyphenol content is positively
correlated with brightness, thearubigin content, total colour and sensory evaluation of
plain black tea quality. The valuation of black tea has also been found to be correlated with
theaflavin content and (-) epigallocatechin is highly correlated with theaflavin level and
valuation of black tea. The levels of theaflavin-3,3’-digallate and the theaflavin digallate
equivalents of black tea relate strongly with sensory evaluation than with total
(Flavognost) theaflavins. It has been shown that (-) epicatechin gallate, (-)
epigallocatechin gallate and caffeine are strongly correlated with sensory evaluation.
These findings suggest that green leaf flavanols, particularly, total polyphenol content, (-
) epicatechin gallate, (-) epigallocatechin gallate; green leaf caffeine content; theaflavin
content and the levels of theaflavin-3,3’-digallate and the theaflavin digallate equivalents
of black tea, may be used as reliable indicators of quality potential.
Flavour indices based on the volatile flavour compounds (VFC) of black tea aroma, can
also be used to predict the quality potential of tea. There are four main flavour indices,
notably, Wickremasinghe-Yamanishi, Yamanishi-Botheju, Owuor’s Flavour Index and
Mahanta. Two of these indices, Owuor and Wickremasinghe-Yamanishi exhibit significant
relationships with sensory evaluation of black tea.
Black tea quality may also be predicted using green leaf pigment composition. -carotene
and chlorophyll a and b are associated with black tea quality and show clonal variation.
Therefore, visual light leaf colour may be indicative of high quality potential, and is
generally preferred over dark leaf colour in routine selection. Chlorophyll fluorescence,
molecular markers and near infra-red spectroscopy may also hold future promise for
predicting quality potential.
Clearly, many fairly reliable selection criteria for quality potential have been developed,
but like those for yield potential, are not routinely used in clonal selection. This is partly
because of the need for specialised equipment and expertise, and associated high costs.
However, the main reason may be the desire and selection for high yield potential per se,
little attention being dispensed for high quality potential, which would require concurrent
selection for both.

Tea genetics
Improvements in plant breeding, termed genetic gain, genetic advance or simply genetic
progress, also depend on knowledge of the genetic control of pertinent agronomic traits.
Yield and quality are controlled by many genes and, therefore, have complex modes of
inheritance which are difficult to study and to manipulate in plant breeding. In tea, there is
dire paucity of information on basic prerequisites for efficient breeding and selection
strategies. These include information on the genetic control, heritability (extent to which
parents pass characteristics to progeny), mode of gene action (e.g. additive, non-additive,
dominance, epistasis), and combining abilities (genetic ability to recombine and express
genes for specific traits, between potential parents when hybridised).

Adaptability and stability

Genotype-environment interaction trials are useful selection criteria for determining clonal
genetic potential and adaptation. In Kenya, environment factors are known influences of tea
yield and quality. Therefore, potential clones should be tested for environmental response at
representative sites.

CLONAL SELECTION
Mass selection
Pioneer commercial cultivation of tea in Kenya was based on tea seeds obtained from
northern India during the first quarter of the 20th Century. These seeds originated from
random open-pollinated (half-sib) natural hybrids between the Assam and China varieties
from the Assam region. The seed collections were obtained as polyclonal mixtures. Several
jat stocks from the original Assam hybrid seed provenances that proved adapted to East
Africa, e.g. Betjan, and formed the basis of local selections of improved assamica type
clones from seedling tea, through phenotypic or mass selection.
In seedling tea populations, outstanding genotypes may occur in extremely low
frequencies (0.0025%) because the original provenances were not specifically selected and
bred for high yield and high quality. Therefore, one seedling in 200-300 may be high
yielding, or has good quality, and one seedling in 40,000-100,000 may combine
outstanding yield and quality.

(i) Selection in fields of mature tea

In old fields, the natural growth habit of a bush is often masked by accidental damage, which
might have occurred earlier. Similarly a large bush need not have great genetic vigour since
an adjacent vacancy occurring soon after the field is planted may allow the bush to spread
into the vacant space. Mature fields are therefore not ideal for selection schemes as the
present appearance of the plants is not always a good indication of their natural growth
potential.

Selection procedure
1 A plan of the field should be drawn showing how the rows of bushes in each row are
numbered. A bush might then be numbered as 132/96, showing that it is plant No.96
in row as No.132. The plan should show the position of neighbouring fields, roads,
paths, leaf-sheds and any other useful features. It is difficult to give numbers to bushes
in contour planted fields, but the effort may be worthwhile.
2. Stake all bushes which, one or two days before being plucked, have a high density of
pluckable big shoots.
3. Prune these bushes.
4. Inspect these bushes about four months after being pruned. Retain only those bushes
which have made most regrowth and on which the new shoots are fairly even in length
and evenly distributed.
5. Test fermentation by the chloroform test (see page 38).
6. Prune the bushes which pass the chloroform test, about six months after the previous
pruning, and establish a 1st Rooting Trial (see page 40) with cuttings prepared from
these prunings.
7. Proceed with selection in the 1st Rooting Trial and successively clonal establish the 1st
Field Trial (see page 40), the 2nd Rooting Trial (see page 41) and the 2nd Clonal Field
Trial (see page 41). At each stage of selection, reject those clones which are worse
than the control clone in any character.

(ii) Selection in fields of young tea

The amount of growth made by seedling plants during their first two years in the field is a
better guide to inherent vigour than is the size of a mature bush. Even so, soil conditions and
other factors can influence this growth to a considerable extent and the selection carried out
in the seedling field should be of the simplest kind, as in mature tea.

Selection procedure
1. Stake or label all bushes which have grown better than their immediate neighbours in
terms of height or spread.

2. Prune these bushes. This should be the second formative prune, or should be carried out
after pegging.
3. Check the regrowth from this prune and thereafter continue as in mature tea.

(iii) Selection in seedling stump nurseries

 The amount of growth made by two- to three- year- old seedlings in the nursery is
probably a better guide to inherent vigour than can be obtained at any later stage when
the environment has exerted its influence.

Selection procedure
1. Shortly before the seedlings are to be transplanted, place the markers at intervals along
each nursery bed. The length of bed between successive markers should contain 200-
250 seedlings.
2. Tie a label to the top of the two tallest seedlings in each marked length of bed. Ignore the
seedlings growing at the very edge of it.
3. Inspect these pairs of seedlings and retain only the one which is thicker round the stem at
ground level. Alternatively, if the seedlings are pulled before this inspection has been
made, retain the one with larger root. Reject the seedlings with few but very large
leaves or the ones with many, but very small shoots such as those of the China species.
4. Plant these selected seedlings in a holding plot at normal spacing.
5. Select within this holding plot in the manner described for selecting in fields of young tea
(see page 37). Because this plot contains only the best seedlings a larger proportion of
them will be selected than in normal fields of young seedlings.
NB. To enhance selection, six months before the normal time of propagation, cut across all the
seedlings which have been selected, at a height of 90cm. The regrowth is made into cuttings
for the 1st Rooting Trial. Towards the end of the 1st Rooting Trial, parent seedlings may be
uprooted if their clones become rejected whilst the stumps of the parents of selected clones
are transplanted into a holding plot.

(iv) Special selection in nurseries

A higher rate of selection will be possible if the nursery is planted with only the best seeds.
For this purpose, the seeds used should be those which sink within eight hours of the start
of floatation. These should then be graded for size and only 25 per cent of the largest seeds
used. In practice it would be convenient to use only those which fail to pass through a
mesh of about 16mm. The selected seeds should then be planted in a normal nursery and
selection carried out as described under (iii) – Selection in seedling stump nurseries.

(v) The chloroform test

(This eliminates all poor fermenters, but is itself no test of absolute quality).
1. Two fresh, fully-opened first leaves from flushing shoots are placed with their petioles
upwards in a test tube which contains 12 drops (0.5-1.0ml) of chloroform. A 15 cm by
2.5 cm boiling tube is suitable. The tube should be tightly corked. One tube is similarly
prepared for each of the bushes to be tested.
2. After about two hours (up to four hours in cold, dull weather) some of the leaves will
have turned coppery brown. At this stage grade all the bushes or clones; “A” for those
which have turned a rich brown, “C” for those which still show a lot of green, and “B”
for intermediate.

3. Repeat this test three times on each bush or clone. Throw out all the selections with
gradings only of “B” or “C”, retaining those which at worst are one “A” and two “B”
gradings. On these, repeat a further three times, retaining only those which after the six
tests, are no worse off than four “A” and two “B” gradings. This should effect a (50-
75%).
 4. In later schemes use a known good fermenter as a control and grade the clones as soon
as this clone reaches its optimum colour. Select only those bushes or clones which are
as good as or better than the control.
5. During these tests, the tubes should be kept away from the sun but in good light. Do not
test too many at once otherwise the time lag between the first and the last may become
excessive; it is preferable to test material in small batches.

(vi) Rooting and field trials

The root systems of seedlings and of clonal plants from these seedlings are frequently dissimilar.
The amount of work in selecting within seedlings should therefore be kept to the minimum and
the main emphasis should be in comparing the clones. A standard rooting medium is usually used
because if different rooting media are used the final selections could be different from those
selected using the standard rooting medium.
There is no theoretical reason why a full-scale field trial should not be established immediately
after the best seedlings have been chosen, but in practice this would be extremely wasteful of
land and man-power. To avoid wasting land and to save the time of pluckers and recorders, a
four-stage selection programme incorporating two field trials each of which is preceded by a
rooting trial can be used. The final field trial is relatively small.
Soil can vary considerably over quite small areas and if the trials were to contain only one plot of
each clone then the true growth potential of the clones could be masked by variations in soil
fertility. To overcome this, each trial should have three or more “repeats”; in each repeat there
should be one plot of each of the clones under test. Furthermore, counteract the effect of a possible
general fertility gradient, which might change gradually from one end of the trial to the other, the
positions of the clonal plots within each repeat should be allocated at random. One simple way to
do this is to write the clonal numbers on small pieces of paper, shake all these together in a large
tin, and then draw out the papers one by one. The first number to be drawn goes into the first plot,
and so on. This operation is repeated separately for each replication in the trial. Make allowances
for the positions of the plots of the control clone (see below).
The clones which are finally selected should be able to respond efficiently to high levels of
fertilizer applications. Whereas one clone might appear to be the most vigorous when normal
applications are made, some others might outyield it when the fertilizer application rates are
increased. It is essential, therefore, that plants in the field trial plots are given more fertilizer than
would normally be given to seedling plants of the same age.

(vii) Control clones

The object of selection is to find a clone which is better in every way than those which are currently
available for planting. Some standard clone or clones in current use (e.g. clones TRFK 6/8 and
31/8) should therefore be included in the field trials as controls. Any clone which is better can be
selected whilst any clone which is merely as good as the control clone or worse will be rejected.
To gauge the advancement in comparison with seedlings, it is suggested that a common seedling
jat entry should be included in each final field trial.

In field trials, there should be  n control plots in each repeat where “n” is the number of clones
being tested. At the TRFK, the number of plots is taken to be the whole number below the perfect
square root of “n”. Thus, with 160 clones, the nearest square roots are 13 (square root of 169) and
12 (square root of 144); 12 would be chosen. In very large trials the number of control plots should
be increased so that no clonal plot is farther than 10 plots away from a plot of the control clone.
However, due to general non-uniformity of fields where trials are conducted, trials are usually not
too large.

The control plots should be spaced regularly throughout the trial to facilitate comparisons between
the clones under test and the control clone.

In rooting trials a number of clones will be rejected. Therefore, proportionately fewer plots of the
control clone are needed. In general the number of control plots in each replicate should be 2/3 
n, where “n” is the number of clones being tested in the rooting trial.

(viii) 1st Rooting Trials

Sufficient plants of each clone should be raised in this trial to permit the establishment of the 1st
Clonal Field Trial.

Procedure
1. Have three randomised replications, each with one single-line plot per clone in each repeat.
A single line of 14 sleeved plants per plot is used at TRFK. This ensures that with a clone
of average rooting potential, eight plants from each replication are raised for the 1st Clonal
Field Trial.
2. When the plants are nearly ready for transplanting, count the survivors in each plot.
3. On the basis of total number of deaths, reject the worst one-third of the clones. Among the
remainder, reject all clones which have made less growth than the control clones. The
remaining clones, which will be about half the number included in the trial, will be
transferred to the 1st Clonal Field Trial along with plants of the control clones.

(ix) 1st Clonal Field Trials

The object of these trials is to determine the ability of the clones to withstand transplanting
and pruning, and to compare their early growth with that of the control clone.

Procedure
1. Have three randomised replications each containing plots of a single line of at least eight
plants, spaced 1m square or normal estate spacing. As far as possible, plants for the first
replication should be taken from the first repeat in the rooting trial, and so on. Vacancies
need not be infilled in this trial immediately unless the vacancies have been caused by
accidental damage.
2. The plants should be pruned at 20 cm and 40 cm (as described on page 71) or pruned at 20
cm and pegged thereafter (as described on page 80). About four months after the 40 cm
prune, or soon after tipping-in in the case of pegged plants, the clones should be graded on
the basis of survival and of field vigour in comparison with the control clone. Only those
clones which are at least as good as or better than the control clones should be retained in
the selection scheme.
3. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 50 per cent greater than that applied to seedling tea of the same
age.
4. These trials can be uprooted after the growth assessment following the 28 cm prune.
However, in many estates where the land is available uprooting is not done because this
would mean a loss of revenue from the plants which are about to be plucked for the first
time. Instead, new land is opened for new field trials.
(x) 2nd Rooting Trials
Sufficient plants of each clone should be raised in this trial to permit the establishment of
the 2nd Clonal Field Trial. Usually, this stage is reached after the plants have been fully brought
into bearing and are plucked for some time. However, to save time, the cuttings should be planted
at about the same time as the plants in the 1st Clonal Field Trial are pruned at 28 cm. The 2nd
Rooting Trial will therefore include clones which will later be rejected in the 1st Clonal Field Trial,
and will be rejected in the nursery as soon as they are rejected in the field.
If possible, this trial should be replicated three times, with plots of 60 or more cuttings per clone
in each replication. The number of cuttings will depend on the size of plots in the 2nd Clonal Field
Trial and the success of rooting of cuttings in the nursery. Use the same procedure as in the 1st
Rooting Trial.

(xi) 2nd Clonal Field Trial

These trials constitute the main test of the clones and should contain enough plants of each clone
to permit miniature manufacture and tasting as well as a fairly accurate estimate of yield potential.
Other factors to be considered include response to mature pruning; resistance to pests, diseases
and drought; ease of plucking and growth habits. In addition, the ratio of the weight of fresh leaf
to manufactured leaf should be calculated, so that weights of plucked green leaf can be converted
to yields of made tea. Where possible, clones should be tested for their adaptability to various
environments at this stage. Those which do not meet the required conditions are rejected.

Selection procedure
1. Similar procedure as in the 1st Clonal Field Trial is followed with a minimum of four lines,
each with eight plants, for a clonal plot.
2. Infill all vacancies as and when they occur. If a clone is rejected, vacancies which occur in
its plots should be infilled with plants of any vigorous clone (at TRFK plots of rejected
clones are infilled with plants of the same clones to keep plots pure for research purposes).
3. Keep accurate records of yields of each plot until at least one year after the prune
which follows the completion of the first three- or four-year cycle (preferably up to the
end of the second pruning cycle). Tasting of the high potential clones should be carried
out periodically throughout the whole of this period; if the liquoring properties fluctuate
markedly from season to season or deteriorate as the pruning cycle progresses, the clone
should be rejected. Usually more than one tester is used to taste the same samples.
4. Ideally, each clone should be plucked when it is ready; plucking rounds will then be found
to vary from clone to clone. If this is not practicable, then all the clones should be plucked
together on a short round. If this round is too short for a particular clone, no great harm is
done and in any case only ready shoots are plucked, but if the round is too long for a clone,
then the leaf will be left on the bushes of that clone or thrown away when breaking back
and the records will show it is having a yield lower than its true potential.

(xii) Multiplication plots

These plots are used solely as sources of cuttings of the high yield potential clones. The plants
should be brought into bearing by the standard method and thereafter should be pruned every five
to seven months, whether or not the prunings are needed for preparing into cuttings. When no
more cuttings are needed, the plants in the plots are tipped-in and plucked as other bushes. Each
bush should be given 150g of 25:5:5:5 NPKS fertilizer each time it is pruned after the final
formative prune.
Pruning twice a year will eventually weaken these bushes, so if long-term propagation from
these plots is anticipated one-third of the plants in each plot should be rested each year, without
being plucked or pruned.

(xiii) Plot labelling

Labels in the nursery and field plots are essential, but at every stage of selection, plans of the plots
must be prepared. Before starting a rooting trial, prepare a plan for the nursery plots. From this
plan, place labels in the nursery, one label for each plot of each selected bush or clone. At the
TRFK these labels show the replication, the plot position and the number of the clone, thus:- A 54
6/8 means that the plot is 54th in sequence in Replication A and that the clone in that plot is 6/8. A
further set of identical labels is used for tying to the selected bushes in the field. The three labels
on each bush (one for each nursery replication) will be transferred from there to the bundle of
prunings and from there to the container of the cuttings. This container is taken to the nursery
plots, the corresponding labels checked to see that they agree and, after planting, the label from
the container is tied to the stake holding the plot label. At a later stage these pairs of labels are
checked to see that they correspond.
At the time of planting out clonal field trial plots of 32 or more plants per plot, specially made
boxes are used which contain 24 or 32 sleeved plants. The box or boxes containing plants for
each plot is/are labelled, the label/s showing the field plot position and the clone; the field plots
will have been labelled. After planting a plot, the label/s from that or those boxes are tied to the
stake holding the plot label so that, again, the two or more labels can be compared.
It will be appreciated that in all cases the plans should be prepared well in advance of any
planting. In spite of these precautions rogue plants may be found in some plots. As soon as these
are recognised, they should be uprooted and replaced with the right plants.

(xiv) Records
Records should be kept to a minimum, yet at the same time it should always be possible for a new-
comer to take over the schemes at short notice. Hence the records
should be well kept. The following records are the most essential:-
1. Field plan. This should show how the bushes are numbered.
2. Chloroform test records. One line will be required for each seedling which has been
selected in the field following the assessment for recovery from pruning. The following
form below can be used.
 Results of chloroform test Total grades
Clone 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C Result
1/12 C - - - - - - - 1 R
1/26 B A A B A A 4 2 - S
1/42 B B B - - - - 3 - R

Of the three examples shown, clone 1/12 is rejected immediately after its first test. No
“C” grades are allowed. Clone 1/42 is rejected after three tests as no more than two “B”
grades are allowed. Clone 1/26 has the minimum requirement for selection. The letters
“R” and “S” in the last column indicate whether the clone is rejected or selected for the
next stage.

3. Rooting trial records. There should be a plan of the trial so that the position of each
clone can easily be found. Next, there should be record sheets for recording results
of the trial. The data to be recorded include the number of survivors (or the number
of deaths) and an assessment of growth with “A” for better growth than the control
clone, “B” for growth similar to the control clone and “C” for growth worse than the
control clone. The following form can be used:-

Repeat A Repeat B Repeat C Results

Clone Survivors Growth Survivors Growth Survivors Growth

4. 1st Field Clonal Trial records. There should be a plan of the trial. Records to be kept are the
same as in the rooting trials and the same form can be used.
nd
5. 2 Field Clonal Trial Records. There should be a plan of the trial. There should be a list of
all clones in the trial; on this can be noted the reason for rejecting a clone. Yield records
should be kept as in the following form:-

Weight of green leaf in grams

Repeat:-

Date of plucking Clones

A large number of these forms will be needed. Periodically, the total yield per plot should
be determined and clones obviously yielding less than the control clones should be
rejected. At TRFK running total yields are calculated each month. During the first year or
two of plucking, it is helpful to calculate the yield per plucked bush if there have been
several vacancies which have been infilled. This becomes unnecessary once a complete
cover of tea is obtained. The records of all field operations, notes of interest and analyses
should be kept.

6. Master record. This sheet is useful in allowing the progress of the scheme to be assessed
quickly. The list should include all clones which pass the chloroform test and there should
be columns for each stage of selection. In these columns, the letter “R” can be entered if the
clone is rejected at that stage.
Clone 1st RT 1st CFT 2nd RT 2nd CFT
Growth Yield Manufacture

(xv) Quality assessment

The rolling system used in miniature manufacture should be similar to that which will later
be used for full-scale manufacture. Thus, if CTC rolling will be used for bulk manufacture
there is no point in testing the clones only by a system which includes a miniature orthodox
roller and vice versa.
Whenever clonal samples are prepared for tasting, an exactly similar control sample
should be included for comparison. This will normally consist of leaf from the control
clone, but it is useful to include a sample of popular seedling leaf. Leaf for the control
samples should be taken from bushes of the same age or same time from last prune, on the
same plucking round and, if possible, from the same field as the clonal samples. During
manufacture, all the samples must be given identical treatment.
If a clone proves to be outstanding, its leaf can be manufactured and sold separately,
otherwise the leaf from several clones can be mixed together and even mixed with seedling
leaf. The best price is sometimes obtained from a blend of several clones. In other cases the
best price might be obtained from the leaf of only one of these clones.
The leaf of the various clones should therefore wither, ferment etc., at the same rate as
each other and also at the same rate as the seedling leaf. Sample blends must be tasted
professionally so that the best blend can be determined. Only in this way can be proved
that the clonal leaf can be safely mixed with the bulk seedling leaf, and only in this way
can best use be made of the various clones.

Progeny Tests
The tea plant is highly outcrossing, strongly self-incompatible and, therefore, highly
heterozygous. Consequently, progenies of a cross segregate into variable fixed genotypes in
the F1 generation. This means that each progeny represents a unique genotype, and the
diverse array of the F1 population offers the first opportunity for clonal selection. This initial
selection phase can be conducted mainly within the period of bringing the young plants into
bearing and up to one year after first maintenance pruning cycle to assess recovery from
prune.

Selection procedures
1. Raise the progeny in the nursery from viable seeds selected according to the floatation
test, as sleeved plants.
2. Decenter at 15 cm (6”) when plants attain a height of at least 30 cm (12”).
3. Conduct chloroform fermentation tests in the young nursery plants.
4. Select the best fermenters; transplant to the field at the age of two years and plant in
progeny rows at normal spacing.
5. Include parent clones, control clones for high yield, high quality, and any clones
known to have resistance to biotic (pests and diseases) and abiotic (e.g. drought and
high soil pH) factors.
6. Bring the plants into bearing through tipping to form a plucking table at 50 cm (20”).
This should take a period of 3 years, then pluck until the first maintenance prune at 50
cm i.e. for 3 years.
7. Make early assessments of high yield potential based on general plant vigour and leaf
phenotypic traits associated with high harvest index, e.g. the total number of shoots
per year, shoot density and dry weight, the number of shoot replacement cycles per
year, the rate of shoot regeneration and extension, leaf area index and leaf pose angle.
Record also the annual yield per bush for the 3 years leading to the first maintenance
prune, as a guide to the yield potential of the progeny.
8. Make early assessments of high quality based on predictions from the fermentation
test and green leaf flavanols known to be associated with black tea quality. In
particular, the total green leaf polyphenol content is known to be positively correlated
with thearubigin content, brightness, total colour and sensory evaluation; (-)
epigallocatechin gallate is highly correlated with theaflavin levels, (-) epigallocatechin
gallate and caffeine are strongly correlated with sensory evaluation.
It is also known that green leaf pigmentation, especially -carotene and chlorophyll a
and b are associated with black tea quality. Therefore, light leaf colour can be used to
predict high quality potential. This can be determined using a chlorophyll measuring
apparatus or judged visually.
9. Consolidate information on the assessments of yield and quality potential and select
only those progenies whose performance is better than that of the control clones and
the best parent. A selection pressure of the top 2-5% performers should be applied
depending on the size of the progeny array and the type of trait under selection.
10. Propagate sufficient plants vegetatively for the establishment of full-scale replicated
clonal field trials.

Clonal Field Trials

Since progeny tests are not usually replicated, it is difficult to separate genotypic and
environmental effects, which can be done through replicated clonal field trials (CFTs). CFTs
may be conducted in a four-stage procedure as described previously. However, this is
lengthy usually taking over 20 years, but it can be shortened substantially by setting up and
conducting selection in a single trial lasting two pruning cycles only. The rooting trials can
be conducted separately.
It is known that clones differ in their growth rates, which may render slow starters
to be missed in selecting for high yield potential. Usually, however, selection is not
intended to capture every genotype with good potential because many genes control
quantitative traits like yield and quality. Therefore, the probability of finding the best
genotype with desirable alleles at all loci for all the traits is very rare. Moreover, past
experience has shown that the selection of elite clones from slow starters is uncommon.
Likewise, fast starters are unlikely to switch of their inherent ability in improved
performance.

Selection procedures
The selection procedures are similar to that of the 2nd CFT approach described previously.

Adaptability
In Kenya, the environment influences tea yield and quality. Therefore, potential clones
should be tested for adaptability at representative sites. This can be done in sub-stations at
representative tea zones, and also through collaborative on-farm trials with growers.

PROPAGATION
Tea plants can be raised from seed, cuttings and tissue culture (micropropagation).
Propagation from seed is less common nowadays following the development of
operationally easy, rapid and cheap techniques of vegetative propagation (VP), which
facilitate easy production of clones. However, if required, open pollinated seed can be
supplied from tea breeding seed baries. Tissue culture is rapid and economical on space.
However, it is costly for use in micropropagation and is appropriate mainly for breeding.
purposes.

Tea seed production

Tea seed gardens or orchards are generally referred to by the Indian word barie.

(i) Site
Preference should be given to sites which are sheltered from the prevailing wind and which
are in a sunny aspect. The soil should be fertile and 2m deep or more and have a pH of no
more than 6.0 (see page 141 for the treatment of soils with high pH). The area should be
cleared of all weeds, especially rhizomous perennial grasses, e.g. couch (Digitaria
scalarum) and Kikuyu (Pennisetum clandestinum) grass, common in East Africa (see pages
9 & 18) before the seed bearers are planted. A field of mature tea can be converted to a
clonal barie by grafting clonal scions onto the mature tea plants. When this is done, the
grafted seed bearers grow faster and flower earlier than seed bearers raised from young
sleeved clonal plants.
Areas liable to damage by hail should be avoided, or protective measures using high
polythene nets with appropriate mesh are used for important breeding stocks during periods
when hail may be prevalent. The Assam (Camellia sinensis var. assamica) type of tea takes
4-5 years to flower at high altitudes and about three years at low altitudes, but as a long term
investment, the differences on the initial time to flowering should not be regarded as a major
constraint. If small amounts of seed are required urgently at high altitudes, clonal seed
bearers can be grown in 20-litre metal containers which has been found to reduce the time
from planting to flowering. In areas prone to drought there should be provision for irrigation.
(ii) Shade
Tea seed bearers should not be shaded.

(iii) Spacing
The foliage of neighbouring trees should just touch at maturity. Generally, in Kenya and
East Africa this means adoption of a spacing of about 6 metres triangular. Since seeds are
borne mostly on the surface of the trees, close spacing reduces the total surface area and,
hence, reduces the seed yield.

(iv) Planting
Holes one metre in diameter and one metre deep should be dug, and the excavated soil then
replaced in the holes. Standard planting holes (see page 66) should be dug in this loosened
soil. Single, double or triple superphosphate fertilizer should be mixed with this soil before
it is replaced round the tea plant (see page 124).

(v) Grafting
Grafting involves the joining of the scion (young clonal plants in conventional nursery
sleeves) of the desired seed bearer onto a rootstock of a mature plant. Four conditions are
necessary for successful grafting, namely, botanical compatibility of the rootstock and scion;
proper alignment of the cambiums (thin layer of tissue between the wood and the rind of a
shoot from which new growth develops) of the scion and the rootstock; inducement of rapid
callus growth at the graft area; and protection of this area from desiccation. Prior tests can
indicate rootstocks less likely to cause rejection.
Approach grafting or chip budding may be used for mature plants and unrooted tea
cuttings, respectively.

(a) Approach grafting

Approach grafting is suitable for use with mature plants. The method is simple, cheap, rapid
and convenient. Up to four low branches of the selected mature rootstock plants are chosen
and the rest of the branches are pruned.
The sleeves with the scion plants are buried at the base of the rootstock, or put on the
ground at the base of the rootstock, and soil is put round the sleeves. The bark of the scion
is pared down to the wood and pieces of bark are cut from selected branches of the
rootstock. The wounds of both scions and rootstock branches must be smooth, clean and
match as nearly as possible. The combined layers may be pressed together, and then the
scions and the rootstock are tied firmly with polythene tapes. Experience has shown that
sealing the binding by covering with grafting wax is very effective in encouraging the
fusing of the scions and rootstock.
Watering daily or as needed is necessary to keep the scions’ roots in their sleeves moist.
Usually, it takes about three months for the scion and rootstock to bind. At this stage, the
binding tapes are carefully loosened. Grafting is repeated if the plants have not joined. If
grafts have succeeded, fresh grafting wax is applied. When the growth of the scions is
sufficiently strong, the scions are cut off from their roots just below the grafts, while the
branches of the rootstock are cut off just above the grafts.

(b) Chip budding

Chip budding involves uniting one bud and a small bark with or without wood to a rootstock
to form composite clone. The upper portion consisting of the shoots and leaves of
the new plant forms the scion, while the lower portion, mainly consisting of the roots forms
the rootstock. The method is simple and suitable for use with unrooted tea cuttings.
The scion is made from a thin shoot by making a cut (a) with a blade below the node,
followed by another cut (b), to remove a chip (c) of same size as the slot in the rootstock.
After tying, the axillary bud of the rootstock is removed. The composite plant is then inserted
onto a growing media and covered with a polythene tent till it takes, and hardened before
field transplanting.
 Cut 1 cm below the bud

Figure II: 2(a)

2(b)
Make a cut 1 cm above the bud, then downward behind the bud and connecting with the
lower cut.

Remove the bud.2(c)

The rootstock consists of a full leaf, axillary bud and a 6 cm length stem. The top cut (Fig
II:2(d) is made near the bud and should slope away from the bud. The lower cut (2) should
slope opposite to the first one.
 (i)
Figure II:2 (d) Preparing the rootstock

A slot of 2 cm is cut on the internodes as illustrated below.

The scion is inserted onto the slot, ensuring that the cambia are aligned properly, then
tied with a polythene strip (Figure II: 2 (f).

Make a cut one

quarterway through the Cut 2 cm above
rootstock the lower cut,
then make
(ii) downward until it
reaches the lower
cut

(iii)

Insert the bud into the root

stock Chip. Both the bud and
rootstockChip must be of the
same size.

Figure II:2 (e): Insertion of bud into the root stock

 Rootstock bud is
to be removed

Point of cutting after union

Soil level after planting

Figure II : 2 (f) Complete chip budding

(vi) Pruning
Dead branches should be removed from the seed producing trees. The lowermost branches
can be trimmed as needed to facilitate collection of seed from the ground. However, the seed
bearers should not be pruned.

(vii) Weeding
Keep the barie clear of weeds. In young baries bare ground should be planted with a shallow-
rooting cover crop such as oats (Avena sativa). Alternatively, lines of non-spreading grasses
such as Setaria, Rhodes grass or Love grass (Eragrostis curvula) may be planted.
Gramoxone (Paraquat) can be used to control weeds (even during seed collection as it does
not affect seeds), at the standard rates, i.e. 1 part of Gramoxone in 400 parts of water plus a
wetting agent. Roundup (Glyphosate) at the rate of 1 part in 1000 parts of water, may also
be used, except during seed collection, as its effect on seed is as yet unknown.

(viii) Fertilizers
Fertilizers are applied to seed bearers as shown on page 136.

(ix) Seed barie maintenance

Inspect the trees several times a year and prune off branches parasitised by mistletoe
(Loranthus spp), taking precaution to cut well below the apparent point of infection. Also
prune off branches likely to interfere with seed collection, including dead or dying, and
trailing branches. Irrigate seed-producing trees in dry weather if possible. Apply about 270
litres per tree every 10 days. In practice, determine (by filling a drum) how many minutes it
takes to apply 270 litters through a hose-pipe; do this at various levels in the barie, as the
time taken will depend on the vertical distance below the tank or source of water. Re-
calibrate if a hose-pipe of different diameter is used or if the pressure of the water source
changes.
(x) Seed collection
Ideally, the seeds should be collected from the ground daily, and should not be left longer
than two days. To facilitate collection, ensure that the ground is smooth and free of weeds.
Start the season by sweeping away all the old seeds.

(xi) Sorting
After collection, the seeds should be floated for 24 hours in water. As they sink, they should
be removed and graded. The seeds must either be kept stirred or should form only a single
layer on the surface of the water, otherwise some of the seeds might remain dry and later be
rejected as floaters. Removal of the sinkers is facilitated if the floatation tank has a sloping
base up which the sunken seeds can be raked.Seeds which still float after 24 hours in water
should be discarded. The sinkers should be run over a 12.5mm (half-inch) mesh,
discarding seeds which pass through. The large seeds should then be picked up by hand
and all bad seeds discarded, e.g. the black, very pale, rotten or empty seeds. Cracked seeds
should be planted immediately. Small seeds are likely to be genetically inferior and should
be discarded.

(xii) Packing and dispatch

Nowadays the use of seeds for planting has become rare owing to the widespread
popularity of clones. However, the following procedures may be used if need be. Seeds
may be packed in sacks if they will be in transit for no more than one day, otherwise they
should be packed in double layers of damp ground charcoal divided by waterproof paper,
in strong cardboard or carton boxes.
The charcoal should be of the best quality, finely ground and oven-dried. Immediately
after it has been dried, sufficient water should be added to increase its weight by 40%.
Poor quality charcoal, and oven-dried charcoal which has been left for some hours and,
thus, has absorbed moisture from the air, cannot absorb this amount of water.
Damp vermiculite mixed with a fungicide can be used for small quantities of seeds
(e.g. for research purposes) for despatch by post. The seeds are mixed with an equal
amount by volume of vermiculite and a small amount of fungicide, packed in polythene
bags, sealed and then packed in a cardboard box or carton and despatched immediately.
Well packed seeds may not deteriorate for up to four weeks in transit.

(xiii) Storage
If seeds are to be stored for any reason, they can be kept mixed in moist charcoal and in
layers to prevent the mass of seeds fermenting (as when packed for despatch), in a cool dry
place, or in slightly moist deep-dug sterile sub-soil. Seeds to be stored should be soaked in
a fungicide solution (e.g. Dithane M45 at 30g/5 litres of water), or dusted with Fernasan D
while the seeds are damp, making sure that the seed coats are completely covered by the
seed dressing. Seeds can be stored for about four weeks (perhaps six weeks in cold, cloudy
weather or two to three weeks in hot weather). Before being packed for despatch, these seeds
should again be tested by floating in water for 24 hours. Any cracked or germinating seeds,
as stated above, should not be packed for despatch but may be immediate planted.

(xiv) Forking
A hard surface may form on the bare soil under the seed bearers. This should be broken up
annually at the start of seed collection by forking to a depth of no more than 5 cm to soften
the soil surface, but need not be repeated during the seed collection season.
Tea seed nurseries
(a) Seed preparation
1 Storage
Tea seed should be used as soon as it is received. If it has to be stored, keep in a cool, well
ventilated room and allow free movement of air all round each of the containers of seed.

2 Floatation
Soak the seeds in water, ensuring that they do not from a thick mass of seeds floating on the
surface; stir the seeds occasionally. Those which sink within 24 hours can go to the routine
germinating area; those which still float after 24 hours should be given a further 48 hours to
sink and should be kept separate at every stage from earlier sinkers. Those which still float
after a total of 72 hours should be discarded.

3 Bad seeds
At all stages between collection and despatch, discard any seeds which appear black and
sticky or which have a fungus growth on them.

4 Cracking
Place the sinkers in full sunshine, making sure that they do not dry out; sprinkle with water
when necessary. They will crack rapidly. As soon as they crack plant them in the nursery. It
is required that the hard seed coat is cracked slightly to allow free entry of moisture from
the soil in the nursery.
In cloudy weather, the seeds can be placed on beds raised 15 cm above the
surrounding soil and which have a 5 cm top layer of coarse river sand. Place the seeds on
the beds in a single layer, cover with a single thickness of hessian and keep the hessian
damp by watering lightly, but if necessary, frequently. Seeds may also be covered with
some dry grass and must be kept damp by light watering as in the case of the hessian. Pick
over the seeds daily, removing all cracked seeds to the nursery. In every case it is suggested
that when 90 per cent of the seeds have cracked the remainder should be discarded. For
small amounts of seeds the suggestion of retaining only the 90 per cent of the cracked
seeds should not apply.

(b) The nursery

1 Site and soil
The site should be well sheltered from the prevailing wind, exposed to the sun so that the
developing plants may benefit from the sun’s warmth. In cold areas such as Kericho and
upper areas of Central Kenya the site should be chosen to obtain maximum benefit from the
sun, but in hot areas, some protection from the full heat of the sun will be beneficial. Low-
lying areas which become very wet during the rains or which get frost during dry months
should be avoided.
The nursery site should be close to a good source of water. The soil should be free
draining and friable. Both the top soil and sub-soil should be tested for pH, which should
be between 5.0 and 5.8 with 5.6 being optimum. If the soil pH is higher than 5.8, acidify
the soil with sulphur at the time of digging the nursery beds. Table V:4 on page 142 lists
the quantity of sulphur required to treat a soil of any given pH. The minimum quantity of
sulphur is sufficient but results will be better if more than the minimum is used. Grind the
sulphur (without using mechanical mill which may catch fire due to heat generated during
grinding) and mix it thoroughly with the soil. Give the sulphur time to act (see page 141).
2 Nursery preparation
For seedling stumps, the nursery site should be dug over to a depth of not less than 75cm.
The soil should then be roughly levelled and beds marked out; the beds should be no wider
than 1½ m, and between adjacent beds there should be a path about 45cm wide. The beds
should be aligned so that these paths can act as drains. Soil should be removed from the
paths and placed on the beds until the beds become raised 15cm above the paths. The beds
should then be raked to provide a soil of fine tilth.
For sleeved plants (see below) forking to a depth of about 30 cm should loosen the soil
below sleeves. The sleeves must be supported by light walls or wire round each bed; walls
are preferable as they will later shade the sleeves on the edges of the beds and prevent the
roots in these sleeves from being sun-scorched.
The nursery should be provided with light dappled shade which in a high shade nursery,
should be raised at least 2 metres above the beds so that it is easy to walk in the nursery.
Some areas need no shade, but if there is any doubt it is safer to have the shade. The shade
should be thinned out gradually so that it is completely removed three to six months before
transplanting stumps. Sleeved plants can be transplanted as soon as the shade has been
completely removed.

(c) Seed planting

The seeds should be planted with their “eyes” horizontal. They should then be covered by
2.5 cm of soil. For stumps, the seeds should be planted at a spacing of 12.5cm triangular.
Seed planting is facilitated by having the beds very finely raked and then rolled very lightly.
The seed sites can be marked by using a board through which long nails have been
hammered at the correct spacing; this board is then pressed on to the bed surface so that the
nails mark the soil.

(d) Nursery maintenance

1 Fertilizers
Fertilizers are applied to the seedlings as described on page 122.

2 Weed control
If plants are grown in sleeves, weeds are not usually problematic. Where seed is planted for
raising stumps, weed may be troublesome in the early stages. Simazine has been applied to
nursery beds in some places immediately after planting the seed. This should be tried first
on a small scale to check that there is no adverse effect on young tea seedlings. Otherwise
the weeding should be manual.

(e) Alternative methods

1 Stump plants
The seeds are planted directly into the nursery beds and the seedlings are allowed to grow
for two to three years. They are then removed from the nursery with bare roots and their
shoot systems are pruned off at a height of 10cm above the level of the nursery soil (page
67).

2. Sleeved plants
The seeds should be planted one per sleeve, covered with 2.5cm of soil and with the “eyes”
horizontal. Sleeves of 250 gauge polythene, of not less than 10cm circular diameter and not
less than 30cm in length are suitable. The soil should be as described in “site and soil” (page
53). Transplanting of sleeved seedlings is described on page 65.
3 Seed at stake
With this method, the seeds are planted directly into the field (at the stake marking the plant
site). With ideal climatic conditions or with overhead irrigation, the method can be
successful, but without irrigation the system becomes a gamble with the weather.
The system is horticulturally unsound as the seeds germinate and start growing over
many hectares of field instead of in a compact nursery, so that expense involved in
weeding, watering, fertilising or protection from pests and diseases is vastly increased.
There can, moreover, be no selection of the best plants except by planting two or more
seeds at each site or by halving the planting distance. Any of these methods, which must
be followed by rouging of the weakest plants, involves an inordinate wastage of potential
planting material.

Vegetative propagation
(i) Nursery site
The site should be similar to that of seedling stumps (see page 53). However, suitable soil
to be used in sleeves can be transported to the nursery, hence the nursery site should be as
near as possible to sources of suitable soil.

(ii) Nursery soil

Ideally the topsoil should have a pH of about 5.6 as that of seedling stumps (see page 53)
but the subsoil should have a pH about 5.0. Subsoil with a high clay content has poor
drainage and therefore should be avoided. Cuttings will not normally root in soils of pH
above 5.5 or which contain a large proportion of organic matter (humus). They should
therefore be planted in subsoil or in soil from below long established grass. The plants will
grow best, however, if the roots can eventually penetrate a more fertile soil. When the topsoil
or subsoil is being used for the first time it is essential that the grower should have the soils
tested for acidity (pH) before filling the sleeves. Soil of pH higher than 5.5 should not be
used unless it is acidified (see page 142). When the soil is acidified, allow at least two months
to elapse between soil acidification and planting for each 150g of sulphur applied per cubic
metre of soil.
The rooting medium for the best results depends on the type of soil used. In practice,
the cuttings should be planted in 7.5-8.0 cm layer of subsoil, or grassland soil, which
covers a more fertile topsoil or subsoil/topsoil mixture. Examples are known where roots
have failed to grow from one layer to the other, so soil-mixtures should be tested on a
small scale before the best mixture is chosen for the nursery.
For fertilizers in the cuttings nursery, see page 124.

(iii) Stump nurseries

Cuttings can be planted directly into the nursery beds and raised as stump plants in the same
way as seedlings. Unlike seedlings, however, the cuttings form widely branching root
systems. This means in practice that the cuttings must be spaced widely in the nursery (not
less than 15cm apart) and when fully grown after two or three years, they must be dug or
forked out carefully. Because of their bulky root systems, the number which can be
transported on a vehicle is small and field planting is expensive as the planting holes must
be large. Once planted, however, they can be brought into bearing by pegging (see page 80)
more quickly than sleeved plants.
The nursery beds must be dug thoroughly to a depth of at least 75 cm. Walls made for
example of woven bamboo laths, should be constructed round the bed and then the
fertilizer should be mixed thoroughly with soil to a depth of about 25cm after first being
broadcast over the surface of the soil. The application rates per square metre will be one
quarter of the amount quoted in page 124 for a cubic metre of soil (e.g. 150 g single
superphosphate per square metre dug into 25 cm). The soil should then be carefully
levelled, covered with a 7.5-8.0 cm layer of subsoil and lightly rolled. After cuttings have
been planted the bed should be covered by polythene sheeting and shade as described for
sleeve nurseries (see below).

(iv) Sleeve nurseries

1 Polythene sleeves
The size of the sleeves will depend upon the size of plants required by the grower. Larger
plants will require larger sleeves and vice versa. When cuttings are spaced widely by use of
large sleeves, they have better lateral shoot growth, but with large sleeves fewer plants are
raised in each bed which adds to the cost of production of each plant. Large sleeved plants
are heavy and transport costs from the nursery to the field are high if distances are long. It
is suggested that if plants are to be 20-30 cm (8-12in) tall at planting, which is usually
reached when plants are six to eight months old, small sleeves which are 10cm (4in) lay-flat
6.25 cm (21/2 in), circular diameter 150 gauge and 25cm (10 in) long should be adequate.
Larger plants than these, e.g. those used for infilling, require larger sleeves for example,
sleeves with circular diameter of 10 cm (4 in) i.e. 15 cm lay-flat, 250 gauge and 35-40 cm
(14-16 in) long.
Sleeves should be spot-sealed or stapled once in the middle of the bottom edge to help to
hold soil in place and to effect drainage. A few holes punched near the bottom edge will
help drain off excess water. Some growers have used sleeves which are sealed completely
along the whole bottom edge, but this might cause drainage problems, especially where
heavy soils have been used to fill sleeves. However, if ready-made sleeves which are
completely sealed at the bottom edge have to be used, it is suggested that more drainage
holes should be punched near the bottom edge of the sleeves and the bottom edge corners
of sleeves cut off to prevent water logging.

2 Filling sleeves
The sleeves should be filled to a height of 17.5-18.0 cm topsoil or topsoil/subsoil mixture
mixed with fertilizer and the top 7.0-7.5 cm filled with subsoil only. The soil filling the
sleeves should be packed fairly firm; it should not be loose nor should it be packed hard and
should be damp at all times. If the soil is dry before filling the sleeves, it will run out of
sleeves as fast as it is put in (where the sleeves are spot-sealed at the bottom edge). On the
other hand if the soil in the sleeves is allowed to dry up, it becomes extremely difficult to
wet it later. All roots and hard soil lumps or stones should be removed from the soil used to
fill sleeves.

3 Nursery construction
The size of the nursery depends on the number of plants required by the grower and can
range from a small unit of about 1000 plants to a large nursery with thousands of plants.

There are two types of nurseries, low shade and high shade. The choice of the type of
nursery to construct will depend upon the availability of the construction material or upon
personal preference. In both cases, nursery beds are marked out after the site has been dug
over to a depth of 30 cm and levelled out.

Low shade nursery

For building walls, woven bamboo laths are convenient (Figure II: 2), but even sacking,
bracken, tree branches, bricks etc. can be used for the side shade. The beds are marked as
those of seedling stumps (see page 54) and the walls are constructed. The beds can be of any
length, but 30 m (100 ft) is convenient for large beds. The beds should lie in a North-South
direction.
The sleeves are then stacked carefully, leaving a gap of about 15 cm and 30 cm between
the stacked sleeves and the side and end walls, respectively. The polythene sheeting, or
tent as it is sometimes called, will be sealed into this gap. To reduce overlapping of the
cuttings’ leaves, sleeves should be stacked triangularly as shown below.

Triangular stacking

Fig. II:2. Low shade nursery bed constructed with bamboo laths

Hoops to support the polythene sheeting should then be placed every 1 m or less along the
bed. These should be slightly curved or slope towards one side of the bed so that rain water
will easily run off the surface of the polythene. The hoops should not be less than 20 cm
above the top of the sleeves.
After planting and thoroughly watering the cuttings the clear polythene sheeting (250 or
500 gauge) should be stretched taut over the hoops and sealed into the space between the
sleeves and the walls. To effect this sealing, soil from the space between the beds should
be lowered. The difference in level between this pathway and the top of the sleeves should
be at least 15 cm.
Until young plants have about 7.5 cm long roots, they should be kept shaded under a
uniform overhead shade which allows only a little dappled light to pass through. The shade
can be provided by bamboo lath frames, hessian sacks, coffee drying cloth, backen woven
into chicken wire frames or frames made from papyrus, maize and napier or elephant grass
stems. This shade should be about 5 cm above the topmost part of the hoops in cooler
areas, but in warm areas the shade should be about 30 cm above the hoops to increase the
air space below the shade and, thus, reduce the temperature (smaller air spaces in cooler
areas take shorter time to heat up and, hence, increase the temperature in the bed). If
cuttings are grown in temperature which is too high they become extremely susceptible to
fungi. cuttings are best grown in temperature of about 27oC. They are also highly
susceptible to fungicides unless these are applied at very much lower concentration than
that which is normally recommended. If fungal disease occur, the polythene should be
opened up immediately to reduce humidity of the air.
The polythene cover serves the following functions:
1. It prevents loss of soil moisture.
2. It preserves a high atmospheric humidity.
3. It increases the air temperature and keeps the temperature range inside the polythene cover
low.
It therefore keeps the cuttings in ideal conditions for growth and dispenses with the need
for expensive frequent hand-watering. However, it is not essential in humid weather in
low and warmer parts. If no polythene sheeting is used, the shade should lie no more than
20 cm above the cuttings. Under these conditions, high shade allows drops to fall on the
beds so heavily that the cuttings can be damaged or even washed out of the soil.

High shade nurseries

In a high shade nursery, walls are constructed along the outside perimeter of the nursery
only and not for each individual bed. As in the low shade nursery, any material can be used
for walls and shade, providing dappled light passes through it. The shade is constructed as
shown below (Figure II:3).
Marking out of the beds is preceded by building the side walls and the shade. Then timber
planks, off-cuts, fitos, smooth fencing wire etc. are used to hold sleeves in place. Digging
trenches 20-25 cm deep to stack sleeves into is not recommended because it can lead to
water-logging. Hoops are then placed over the sleeves as in the low shade nursery.
High shade nurseries are usually cooler than low shade ones and heavy drops of rain water
falling through the shade may damage rooted cuttings. For the beginner, it can be difficult
to manipulate the density of the shade in the nursery or parts of the nursery if plants grow
at different rates (or are propagated at different times) and, hence, need different
treatments. Attempts to improve the growing conditions by thinning out the shade may
lead to excessive shoot growth without corresponding root growth.
When a large annual propagation programme is anticipated, it is often worthwhile
constructing a high shade with permanent or semi-permanent materials. This nursery site
can then be used year after year with a minimum of expense.
 Figure II:3
High shade nursery
(v) Time of year
No one season is better for propagation than others provided that at the time of propagation,
the mother bushes are growing vigorously and are not suffering from drought or recent hail
damage. Seasons of propagation will normally be decided by the need to have plants ready
for the field at the start of the next planting season.

(vi) Mother bushes

To obtain the best cutting material in the greatest quantity, it is necessary to prune mother
bushes twice a year even if the cuttings are needed only once a year. The time of pruning
depends upon the time the cuttings are to be propagated, thus, if propagation is to be in
September, mother bushes should be pruned the previous February to March. The type of
pruning is a straight cut-across the framework, about 2.5 cm (1 in) above the previous
pruning level or at 40 cm (16 in) if bushes were brought into bearing by pegging and had
not been pruned before. Any cleaning out, that is, the removal of weak and crossed branches,
should be done only once a year during one of the prunes. New shoots should be ready for
cuttings between five and seven months after pruning. Where the climate is cool, plants take
longer to produce cuttings whilst in warmer areas plants take a shorter time. Under no
circumstances should the new stems be allowed to remain on the mother bush for more than
seven months as the material becomes hard and the resulting cuttings grow poorly. Mother
bushes should not be covered.
When mother bushes are pruned twice in 12 months and have to provide cuttings for a
number of years, the pruning level would rise quickly if adjustments are not made. It is
suggested that for the mother bushes pruned between January and June the pruning height
be 5 cm (2 in) above the previous pruning level, and when pruned between July and
December the pruning level should be 2.5 cm (1 in) below the previous level. Thus, the
pruning level rises 2.5 cm (1 in) a year. It is further suggested that the mother bushes be
cleaned out during the second prune.
If mother bushes have aphid infestation, their upper foliage should be thoroughly sprayed
with an insecticide (see page 176) before the prunings are taken off. NPKS (25:5:5:5)
fertilizer is applied to mother bushes at the rate given on page 122.
(vii) Preparation of cuttings
The cut branches or prunings for cuttings are wrapped in wet sacking and taken to a shelter
near the nursery where they are immediately watered. These prunings should be kept under
shade. Cuttings should be made under shade and kept shaded at every stage thereafter.
Only vigorous young shoots between five and seven months old should be used to make
cuttings. The very soft tips, which can be determined by placing the stem on two open
fingers and pressing in between with thumb, and the very hard lower parts of the branches
where bark is forming should be discarded; if cuttings are too hard they will grow poorly
and produce flowers which exhaust the food reserves in the stems and this may lead to
death.
The good shoots are made into individual cuttings, each consisting of a single leaf with 3

to 4 cm of stem below the leaf (see Fig. II:3).

This is done by making two cuts; one just above the bud and sloping away from the
bud, and second across the stem 3 to 4 cm below the bud again using a sloping cut. Cuttings
are prepared by using very sharp knives. If the internodes are short, so that less than 3 cm
of stem will be below the lower leaves, use cuttings with extra leaves but remove the lower
leaves. Immediately cuttings are prepared, they should be placed into a container full of
water, such as a basin, karai or debe. They are soaked in water for about 30 minutes before
being planted. Too many cuttings should not be placed in the container otherwise the top
ones will not be in the water and the bottom ones will be pressed so hard that the leaves
may be damaged.
This type and length of cutting stem gives the largest number of cuttings per mother
bush. Cuttings with damaged leaves should be rejected because they generally grow
slowly or die if fungal diseases attack them through the wounds.
 Two or three-leaf cuttings can be used but the number of cuttings per branch, hence
per bush, decreases as the number of leaves per cutting is increased. Multi-leaf cuttings
give more branches to the young plant and are ideal if there is plenty of material. It has
been found, however, that in lower areas with high temperatures and high evaporation
rates the survival of cuttings decreases as the number of leaves per cutting is increased. It
is therefore suggested that multi-leaf cuttings be planted only in the high altitude areas
where cuttings are sealed under polythene sheeting or where a mist unit is available. The
beginner is advised to use single-leafed cuttings to start with.

Care before cuttings are planted

The time from pruning mother bushes to the time the branches are delivered to the cutting
preparation shelter or shade should be as short as possible. Branches should not be exposed
to direct sunlight as leaves would scorch easily or wilt due to loss of water. Compressing
branches will damage the leaves and, therefore, wrapping branches in a hessian sack too
tightly, or having too large a heap of branches when the branches have to be transported by
vehicle should be avoided.

(viii) Planting cuttings

If a leaf or its bud touches the soil they may be attacked by fungi; the leaf then falls off and
the cutting dies. Thus, cuttings are planted in the sleeves so that the leaves do not rest on the
soil surface and the bud is just above the soil level. Where the cuttings’ leaves are naturally
deflexed (bending backwards instead of upwards), the stems should be inserted into the soil
at an angle so that the leaves are clear of the soil. During planting, fingers should not touch
the top or bottom cuts of the stems as the sweat from the fingers may affect survival. The
cuttings are kept moist during planting by frequent watering.
When the whole bed is completely planted, the cuttings and the soil between the sleeves
and the walls (outside the sleeves in the case of high-shade nurseries) are thoroughly
watered. Watering should be done gently as strong jets may displace cuttings. The clear
polythene sheeting is then stretched taut over the hoops and sealed into the soil, all round
the bed. To help stretching and sealing the polythene sheeting, a few turns of sheeting are
made round pieces of wood at both ends of the bed (see Fig.II.4) and after stretching the
polythene sheeting, these pieces of wood are buried length wise in the soil. Immediately
afterwards, the beds must be shaded in the case of low-shade nursery.

Care after planting cuttings

All beds should be inspected at least once a week. If only a little condensation is found on
the under surface of the polythene sheeting, it suggests that the soil in the sleeves is
becoming dry due to either inadequate watering or that the sheeting is torn or that the seal
is poor. These faults should be checked and the aim is to have a heavy condensation inside
the sheeting, sufficient to prevent out a clear view of the cuttings inside. The beds should
be regularly checked for weed growth, insect pests and diseases and treated as necessary.
Weeding should always be by hand pulling. Chemical herbicides should not be used. After
each opening or after the faults in the polythene sheeting are corrected, the beds are
watered thoroughly and covered again.
 Fig. II : 4
Stretching polythene cover over the hoops to cover the cuttings.

If the nursery becomes too cold or the growth of cuttings is slow due to heavy shading,
the shade should be thinned slightly. In the cooler areas the shade should cut out about
half the daylight, but in hotter areas a more dense shade may be necessary. During dry
weather the soil around the polythene should be kept damp. Mist units have been used in
VP nurseries successfully but they are expensive and there is a possibility of losing many
cuttings if there is a power failure. Occasionally there are pests and diseases in the nursery.
For control and prevention, see page 170.

(ix) Hardening-off
When plants grow under polythene sheeting and shade, they are soft and will scorch and
many of them will die if the polythene sheeting is removed too quickly without a hardening-
off period. Generally, there are two main methods of hardening-off plants, though there
could be variations on the methods.

1. Hardening-off in low shade nursery

Note: During the first four weeks of hardening-off, the polythene is gradually opened as
described next. But throughout this period the lath shades or other
types of shades are kept in place and not removed.
As soon as the new shoots are about 20 cm (8 in) tall, the polythene sheeting should
be raised on the side away from the direction of the prevailing winds, at intervals of 3 m
(10 ft) along its length. Each opening is held up by a stake and the rest of the polythene
remains sealed in the soils so that a series of small vents are formed.
The number of vents is doubled one week later by raising the polythene sheeting at 1.5
m (5 ft) intervals. During this time, the soil in the sleeves should not be allowed to dry and
watering is done through the vents by a hose pipe. In the third week, the polythene on the
vent side is rolled up completely to the top of the hoops thereby leaving one side of the
bed covered.
At the fourth week, the polythene sheeting is removed completely, washed thoroughly,
dried and carefully stored under cover for further use. The polythene sheeting should not
be left exposed to the sun for any length of time during storage because it will be damaged.
Two weeks after removal of the polythene sheeting the shade frame is raised 30 cm (1
ft) on one side only and supported by stakes. Thereafter, it is raised 30 cm (1 ft) every
week for three weeks after which it can be completely removed. Plants are ready for
transplanting after the complete removal of the shade. Plants must be watered as necessary
and fertilizer applied weekly until they are transplanted.

2. Hardening-off in high shade nursery

Plants grown in high shade nurseries can be hardened off in the same way as under low
shade up to the stage of removal of the polythene sheeting.
An alternative method involves loosening the polythene sheeting at both ends of the
bed and leaving the polythene sheeting loose on the ground for a week. One week later,
the polythene is rolled up at both ends and left that way for a week so that air may circulate.
Then the polythene sheeting is rolled up 30 cm (1 ft) at each end and a week later it is
rolled up 120 cm (4 ft) at each end. This weekly opening continues to increase by 1.2 m
(4 ft) per week until the whole bed is uncovered. The polythene sheeting is then washed,
dried and stored as before. Care should be taken that the soil in the sleeves does not dry
up during the hardening-off periods. After the polythene sheeting is removed, fertilizer
application is started and continued as for the low shade nursery.
After removal of the polythene sheeting, the shade and side walls are thinned gradually
by removing some of the covering material, a little every week, until all material providing
the shade and covering the walls is completely removed after about four weeks. If the
weather changes and dries suddenly and plants start scorching, the hardening-off should
be postponed or the beds re-covered. When the weather improves the hardening-off is
resumed.
If the plants have to remain in the nursery for a long time after the removal of the
polythene sheeting, the removal of shade and wall-covering material can be postponed
until about a month before the transplanting is anticipated. Then the removal of the wall-
covering and shade material is gradual, exactly as described above. Watering of plants is
carried out as necessary. Leaving the shade and wall material in place reduces evaporation
and, hence, reduces the frequency of watering.
There could be many other variations of hardening-off plants, but whatever method is
used, the hardening-off should be gradual to give the young plants time to acclimatise
themselves to their new conditions and be able to withstand any adverse weather which
may set in later. If plants are hardening-off during a cloudy period, the hardening-off time
can be shortened without the danger of scorching. The grower must, however, be on guard
for sudden changes of weather.
(x) General information
The cuttings must be completely protected from dry soils and dry air until they are rooted,
because they lose more water through transpiration than they can take from the soil. Until
rooted, they require dappled light which reduces evaporation, but there is enough light for
normal growth. Excessive darkness prevents cuttings from developing and encourages
excessive callusing, whereas full sunlight will kill them.

(xi) Size of new plants at transplanting time

Some growers prefer large plants. It is suggested that plants with one shoot 20 cm (18 in)
tall, or 15 cm (6 in) if decentred, or with two or more shoots 15 cm tall and with roots which
have reached the bottom of sleeves (25 cm or 10 in long) are ready for transplanting in a
new clearing. Plants which reach 30 cm (1 ft) tall in the nursery should be cut-across
(decentring) at 15 cm. For in-filling, it is suggested that plants should remain in the nursery
for about 18 months and be pruned at 15 cm (6 in) when they reach a height of 30 cm (1 ft)
and again at 20 cm (8 in) when they reach a height of 35 cm (14 in). This pruning will
encourage low branching. If at transplanting infills have long soft shoots, they should be
transplanted during dull weather or be shaded lightly.
 Chapter III

ESTABLISHMENT
(a) Field planting
Planting should be avoided in excessively wet weather to prevent soil from puddling
around new plants. The ideal planting time is when the soil is damp, rather than wet, and
the weather is cloudy. Once the rains have started, planting should normally commence as
soon as the soil is found to be damp to a depth of at least one metre.
Planting holes should be dug beside the lining stakes. The holes should all have the same
diameter so that the centres of the holes, where the tea plants will be, are at an even
spacing. The excavated soil should form a single heap beside the hole.
In some estates, a subsoiler tine or tines are used to make a channel in which tea is
subsequently planted and this can, in certain conditions, cause problems. On soils of clay
type which have not been ripped both ways, when an abnormally wet year is experienced,
water logging in channels may occur with disastrous results to newly planted tea. Run-off
from terraces is far greater in immature tea areas than in mature tea areas, particularly at
planting time when the land is normally clear of weeds and inter-row crops are not yet
established. Such run-off may uproot plants in the channels.
In areas where the rains follow a hot dry season, the period between holing and planting
should be as short as possible to avoid filling in of the holes which inevitably leads to bad
planting. In practice, lining and staking should be carried out prior to the rains and holing
should be left until immediately before planting i.e. after the first rain has fallen. This has
the advantage that in the event of a hot dry spell occurring a few weeks after the onset of
heavy rains, the plants are less likely to dry out.
Ideally, where there is enough labour, the planting gang should follow immediately
behind the holing gang. Leaving holes open for several days should be avoided, as either
the soil dries out in dry weather or puddles in wet weather. In very heavy clay soils, this
exposure can however be an advantage, causing the smoothed sides of the holes to crumble
enabling the plant roots to easily penetrate.

(i) Planting sleeved rooted cuttings, or clonal plants, and seedlings

1. Removing from the nursery
Sleeved plants are ready for transplanting when the roots have reached the bottom of the
sleeves and also have at least 20 cm (8 in.) of top-growth. At the time of transplanting, the
cylinder of soil in sleeves should not be dry.
The plants must be handled carefully to avoid cracking the cylinder of soil and perhaps
breaking the roots, and for the same reason, they should be stacked carefully and tightly
on any vehicle taking them to the field. Containers should be made which hold reasonable
number of sleeved plants for one or two men to carry. At TRFK these containers (boxes)
are filled in the nursery, stacked on a trailer and taken to the field, and then carried from
the trailers, each man carrying one container (one container carries either 24 or 32 standard
sleeves of 6.25 cm diameter). A number of containers can be carried on a wheelbarrow.
This avoids all unnecessary handling of the sleeves.
 The sleeves should be protected from direct sunshine at all times until planting is
completed to prevent damage to the roots.

Figure III:1
Cross-section of planting hole for selected rooted Cuttings or seedlings
d= diameter of the sleeve
2. Holing
The holes should be 15 cm to 20 cm deeper than the length of the sleeves and double their
diameter (see Figure III: 1), though the minimum should be 25 cm. For standard 25 cm
long x 6.25 cm diameter sleeves the holes will be 40 cm x 25 cm. To reduce damage of
young plants by chafer grubs, holes may be sprayed with Dursnnnnnnnban (Gladiator)
(see page 179).

3. Planting
The soil in each standard hole should be mixed with 30g of single superphosphate (see
Fig. V:1 on page 127). In larger holes, apply single superphosphate in proportion to the
volume of the hole (see page 124). Place 20 cm depth of soil/fertilizer mixture in the hole
and slice the polythene tube with a sharp knife at the side and at the bottom, taking care
not to cut any roots but retaining the sleeve around the cylinder of soil. Place the plant in
the hole and add more soil round it. Gradually remove the polythene and complete filling
of the hole. Firm down the soil with hands, and then feet, until the top of the plant’s
cylinder of soil is covered by 1-2 cm of field soil, making the site flush with the rest of the
field. Failure to give this covering may result in an exposed soil cylinder drying out rapidly
in dry or sunny weather. Exposed roots at the top of soil cylinders also reflect poor planting
a few weeks or months after planting. Such roots should be covered immediately with soil
surrounding the plant and firmed down.
4. Shading
No shading is needed if the plants have been adequately hardened off in the nursery. In all
circumstances, if plants are not well hardened off at transplanting, the plants in the field
should be given the same density of shade as they had in the nursery at the time of removal,
but in the field this shade should be of a kind which will soon break down, such as bracken
fronds stuck into the soil.

5. Planting sleeved seedlings

The Foundation recognises the usefulness of competition of seedlings in the nursery and
thus recommends that only the most vigorous seedlings should be transplanted. The
recommendation is that if tea seedlings are to be planted, the seed should be planted evenly
in the nursery directly in the beds. In 24 to 36 months after planting, about 75 per cent of
the most vigorous seedlings should be transplanted. The rest of the weak seedlings should
be discarded. When seedlings are raised in sleeves, the competition between plants is non-
existent or is reduced, and it is probable that some weak plants will be transplanted to the
field. Such plants will show their weakness years after transplanting when competition
sets in. For this reason, the Foundation does not recommend that seedlings be raised in
sleeves. However, if there is a good reason to raise seedlings in sleeves then they should
be transplanted in the same way as sleeved rooted cuttings (see above).

(ii) Planting seedling stumps

From the late 1960’s most of the planting in Kenya has been carried out with sleeved
clonal plants. During this time seedlings have only been raised for experiments or for
infilling in the fields.

1. Selection
In a seedling nursery, the more strictly the plants can be selected, the better will be the
resultant stand of tea. From any one bed, approximately 25 per cent of the plants are
rejected on the basis of poor stem girth, poor root size or poor height. The rejected plants
will be genetically weak and should not be retained for a further period to increase is size.
Weak patches of seedlings due to poor soil can be left for a further year if necessary, and
the best of these plants should be selected as above.

2. Removing seedling stumps from the nursery

Tea seedlings are ready for transplanting as stumps when they are 1 cm thick at the collar,
provided that they have built up adequate food reserves in their roots by being unshaded
for at least three and preferably six months.
In many nurseries, it is easiest to remove seedlings by pulling them from the soil by a
vertical pull. In this case, the seedlings should be pulled first and then pruned 10 cm above
what had been nursery soil level (see Figure III:2). In poorly prepared nurseries, direct
pulling causes many of the roots to break. In these soils the seedlings should be pruned to
10 cm above the soil level before they are dug out. To make the uprooting easier, the
seedlings should be uprooted after the onset of the rains when the soil in the nursery has
been wetted to a depth of not less than one metre.
 Figure III:2
Seedling stump preparation

All seedlings should have their roots cut to a length of 45 cm and any thin laterals
removed. Some nurseries produce only wide-spreading root systems, often because of
shallow digging during nursery preparation or because of inadequate watering during dry
weather. The roots of such seedlings should not be cut back drastically, otherwise much
of the root food reserves will be removed.

If necessary, the prepared stumps can be stored in a cool building after being washed
free of soil and wrapped in polythene in bundles of 20. Storage in mud baths should be
avoided except for periods of a few hours (up to a day). In wet cool weather, stumps can
also be covered with prunings and stored in nursery beds for a day or two.
At no stage should the stumps be exposed to strong sunshine or be allowed to dry out.
Planting holes should be 15 cm deeper than the depth of the roots (see Figure III:3).
 Figure III:3
Cross-section of planting holes: stump planting.
At the Foundation, where seedling stumps with 45 cm of roots are used, the holes are
dug to a depth of 60 cm and a width of 20 to 30 cm; the first 20 cm of the holes are
excavated by a jembe (hoe) or fork jembe and the rest by another gang or the same gang
using pangas or coffee diggers.
Do not use steel spikes (Alavangas) except in newly loosened deep soils, as they tend to
form smooth-sided holes which restrict root growth and may enclose pockets of air or
water. In clayey soils, the sides of the holes should be roughened with a fork or allowed
to crumble by action of the weather. Mix 60g of single superphosphate (or 30g of double
or triple superphosphate) with the excavated soil.
The stumps should be kept shaded or wrapped in sacking in bundles of 50 until they are
actually placed in planting holes (see Figure III:4).
The stumps should be kept damp. For this purpose, watering cans can be used. The stump
should be held in the centre so that the top pruning cut is 7 cm above the field level and
the excavated soil the replaced firmly, though not rammed, around the stump in the hole.
The soil around the stump should be slightly higher than the field soil to allow for settling,
otherwise a depression may form which could lead to waterlogging in wet weather. Never
plant a stump at the side of the hole as this restricts root development.
 Figure III:4
Seedling stumps being shaded before planting.

After planting, the marking stake should be placed at an angle over the plant. This
guards against the plant being trampled on or damaged during weeding, and act as a
check that the planting has been carried out correctly.

3. Shading
In the nursery, the foliage of the seedlings heavily shades the basal 10 cm of stem. After
transplanting in hot sunny weather, this stem is liable to be severely scorched so some
shading should be provided. The best shade is obtained from three or four bracken fronds
stuck in the soil and bent over about 10 cm above the top of the stump. This gives a light,
dappled shade which gradually breaks down, thus providing a gradual hardening off of the
stem of the tea stump. Leafy branches of any tree, including prunings of the seedlings at
the time they are made into stumps, or woody weeds may be similarly used. Each stump
should be shaded immediately after it has been planted. During wet, cloudy weather,
shading is unnecessary. Bud-break from the stumps may be delayed if the shading is too
dense.

(iii) Planting clonal stumps

The programme will be exactly the same as for seedling stumps, except that the tendency
for clonal stumps to have a wide-spreading root systems will mean that they will more
often need to be forked out of beds, fewer can be held in any given container (e.g. wet
sacking) and the planting holes will have to be wider. As the width of the planting hole is
increased, so the amount of superphosphate applied should be proportionately increased
(see Table V:1, page 107).
Fertilizers used in planting holes are given on page 124).

b) Bringing tea into bearing

During the establishment of tea on an estate or smallholding, there is a period when
financial returns may depend upon the speed and efficiency with which the young tea is
brought into bearing. The system adopted should result in economic production of an even
stand of healthy bushes obtaining their optimum yield potential as soon as possible and
maintaining this optimum yield.
The lower parts of the branch of the bush will form the permanent frame which will
remain largely unaltered throughout the life of that bush or until the bush is down or collar-
prune to rejuvenate it. This frame must therefore be low, strong and should have a good
spread. A system of bringing tea into bearing which enables plucking to be started very
early might seem at first to be satisfactory but might prove to be poor in the long run if the
system restricts root development or encourages more shoot and less root growth so that
the plants are susceptible to drought, or if it results in narrow framed bushes which only
slowly form a complete ground cover and which will again give low yields when next
pruned.
Any operation designed to form a permanent branch system, from the time the plants
are in the nursery to the time they are tipped-in to form a plucking table in the field, is
defined as “bringing tea into bearing”. Three systems of bringing tea into bearing have
been developed which result in the formation of good permanent frames. These are
pruning, pegging and tipping. Any of these methods will be subject to modifications
depending upon the kind of nursery plant which has been raised and its characteristics.

(i) Pruning
Whenever a shoot on a tea plant is removed, axillary buds are stimulated to develop for a
distance of about 10 or 12 cm below the cut. This stimulus occurs if soft apical shoots are
removed, as at tipping-in to form a table, during regular plucking, or if thick stems are cut,
as during hard pruning and during preparation of stumps from the nursery. Any axillary
shoot which develops outwards contributes to the spread of the bush.
All forms of pruning remove photosynthetic tissues, such as leaves and green stems,
from the plant. The manufacture of carbohydrates and assimilation of nutrients from the
soil and air is consequently reduced by an amount dependent upon the severity of the
prune. New shoots which grow after this stimulus can develop only at the expense of the
reserves which already exist in the plant, and particularly in the roots, at the time of
pruning.
While these reserves are being used up, root growth stops. The rootlets only start
growing again when the food reserves have been replenished and this cannot start until the
new shoots become efficient. The plant is therefore short of reserves and its root
development restricted for many months after a hard prune. It is essential that the bushes
are given time to replace these reserves and to extend their root systems before any further
pruning or even plucking takes place.
If the interval between successive prunes, or between pruning and plucking, is too short,
then recovery from prune will be delayed, the root systems will be restricted and in
extreme cases, branch dieback or even death of the plant can occur.
 The timing of successive formative prunes is dependent upon the growth rate of the
plants, which will vary from plant to plant and from district to district, and upon seasonal
variations in weather conditions. It appears that a branch is at a suitable stage for pruning
when red striated wood has been formed and the stems, at pruning height, are about 1 cm
thick. The one exception to this rule is when sleeved plants are given their first prune, i.e.
pruning or decentering them at 15 cm when they are 30 cm tall.
Experiments have shown that stumps, whether clonal or seedling, should be given no
more than two formative prunes in the field unless only one or two stems develop from
the original stump. Sleeved plants should be given no more than three prunes, the first of
which is very light.
It must be noted that tipping-in and plucking have effects similar to, though less severe
than, those produced by pruning. The growth stimulus is constantly being diverted to new
buds on or just below the plucking table so that the bush spreads rapidly at this level. If
the tipping-in level is high, then a relatively narrow lower frame which is left when the
bush is next pruned will support a wide plucking table.

(ii) Pegging
In this system, the shoots which develop from a stump or after the first light prune of a
sleeved plant are bent downwards and pegged so that they radiate outwards and upwards
from the main stem. These pegged branches form the basis of the permanent frame which
is added to the vertical shoots that develop from axillary buds along the branches. The
development of these axillary buds is encouraged by pegging the branches so that they
slope uniformly and slightly upwards; it is retarded or even prevented if the branches are
pegged so as to be horizontal or to slope downwards. If the branches are pegged so that
they curve upwards at first and then downwards towards their tips, the axillary buds will
generally develop only along the upward-sloping portion near the main stem.
Further encouragement to development of the axillary buds is given if two terminal
leaves and a bud are removed from the pegged branches at the time of pegging. The
removal of two leaves and a bud is based on the premise that there are growth hormones
in young tissues at the tips of shoots which encourage terminal growth and inhibit lateral
or axillary bud growth. This phenomenon is known as apical dominance. The removing of
two leaves and a bud at the time of pegging branches removes the axillary buds’ inhibitors
and thus encourages their growth. Tipping-in to form a table of young tea or tea recovering
from pruning is based on the same principle.
It has been found that the best time to peg is when the branches are about 60 cm tall and
have just started to develop reddish bark where they join the main stem. At this stage the
majority of the stems are not brittle if plants have been growing vigorously and therefore
will not break or split when pegged.
Tipping-in the vertical shoots should be carried out at a low level so that axillary shoots
which consequently develop can contribute still further to frame formation. Some large-
leaf Assam-type plants produce very vertical shoots; such plants may benefit from a light
prune at about 35 cm before being tipped-in.
Pegging does not involve the removal of leaves and green stems, so that the root reserves
do not become depleted and there is no check on root growth. Plants brought into bearing
by this method have a larger frame and better developed root systems than those brought
into bearing by pruning. Because of this, pegged plants can be tipped-in and plucked
sooner than the pruned plants and, because of the extra spread resulting from the pegging,
they produce much higher yields for at least the first pruning cycles. The cost of pegging
is greater than that of most pruning systems but this is likely to be out-weighed by the
value of the higher yields and by lower weeding costs which result from the more rapid
attainment of a complete canopy cover of tea.
The ground should be cleared of weeds just before pegging starts so that no further
weeding will be needed for the next three months. After this, the pegged branches will
remain in position even if the pegs are removed. In fact pegs, especially metal ones, should
be removed at about this time to avoid girdling of the branches by the pegs.
Pegging has been found to be very successful, if done correctly and at the right time, in
areas with high rainfall which is well distributed. However, in marginal areas with less
rainfall and also in areas which are prone to long droughts of more than three months,
pegging is not recommended. Since pegging does not involve the removal of leaves and
green stems, during the long dry periods, the pegged plants lose a lot of water from the
soil through transpiration. When the moisture is exhausted around the roots, plants suffer
from drought and may become weak, die or be attacked by diseases associated with plants
suffering from drought stress such as Phomopsis theae. On the other hand, pruning in such
areas removes or reduce transpiring surfaces, i.e. leaves and green stems, and this
conserves moisture. Hence in marginal and drought prone areas, plants should be brought
into bearing by pruning. However in such areas, leaving plants to grow freely during rains
also helps in developing a better rooting system since plant roots grow in proportion to the
shoot.

(iii) Tipping
This system entails tipping shoots (three leaves and a bud) of tea plants at gradually
increased heights. There is great danger that root growth will be reduced in marginal
areas or in areas prone to long droughts so that ultimately the root system is too small for
the large branch system; plants like these may be highly susceptible to droughts.

(iv) Bringing stump-plants into bearing by pruning (see figures III:5,6 and III:7)
The first prune of the stump-plants is done when plants are removed from the nursery
and are pruned at 10 cm from the ground level or collar (see fig. III:2).
1. Prune all the shoots at a height of 20 cm from ground level when most of these shoots
are 1 cm thick at that height (see fig. III:5).
2 Prune all the shoots at a height of 40 cm when most of these shoots are 1 cm thick at
that height (see fig. III:6). With the spreading type of plants this prune may not be
necessary and if it is not done, the bringing into bearing of the plants is hastened.
3 Tip-in for three rounds at a height of 50 cm (previously tipping-in was done at 60 cm)
by removing shoots as soon as they have developed three leaves and a bud above that
height.
4 The prunes at 20 cm and 40 cm are known as formative prunes. Do not tip or pluck the
bushes between the formative prunes as this will slow the bringing to bearing stump-
plants.
N.B. Each prune should be a straight cut across the whole frame of the bush (see fig.
III:7). The cut on each stem should slope slightly to prevent rain water from remaining
on the cut surface and possibly causing die-back. Cleaning-out should be restricted to
removing crossing-over branches, the weaker of the two branches lying on the ground.
Always use a sharp knife for pruning to avoid breaking or splitting pruned branches.
5 When most of the bushes are being pruned at 20 cm, those with only one or two shoots
should be cut-across at a height of 15 cm when these shoots are at least 1 cm thick at
this height. They should later be pruned at 28 cm and again at 40 cm when most of the
shoots are 1 cm thick at these heights. Tip-in at 50 cm.
 Figure III : 5
Pruning a seedling stump at 20 cm
 Figure III:6
Pruning at 40cm
 Figure III:7
Bringing into bearing by the standard TRF pruning method.
Diagrams of bushes immediately after pruning at 20 cm and 40 cm and after tipping at 60 cm.
(v) Bringing stump-plants into bearing (see Figure III:8).
1 Clear all weeds from the ground before pegging starts.
2 Prepare wooden pegs 40-50 cm long from suitable material. Wire pegs can be used
3 Peg the shoots when they reach a height of not less than 45 cm and not more than
60 cm, and when the bark near the base of each shoot has turned reddish-brown.
4 Shoots which are too short for pegging on this first round can be pegged later when
they have reached a height of 60 cm together with other shorter shoots. It should
not normally be necessary to carry out more than two rounds of pegging.
5 Use one peg per shoot and arrange the shoots so that they are evenly spaced round
the stump. It is not necessary to peg more than five branches per plant; there should
not be fewer than three. Where planting is rectangular, shoots should not be pegged
between plants within a row but should be pegged into space between rows (see
Figure III:9).
6 The peg should be closer to the centre of the plant than the branch tip and the pegged
branch should slope upwards along its whole length. Remove two terminal leaves
and bud from each pegged shoot.
7 Tip-in to form a table at 45 cm for at least five rounds by removing shoots as soon
as they have developed three leaves and a bud above that height.
NB. Some clones and some seedlings produce few shoots which often have long
internodes. Such plants should be pruned, after pegging, at a height of 35 cm and
tipped in at 45 cm as above.
8 When most of the bushes are being pegged, those with one or two shoots should be
pruned at a height of 15 cm when these shoots are at least 1 cm thick at this height.
The new shoots which develop after this prune should be pegged as above when
they reach a height of 50 cm to 65 cm. Tip-in at a height of 50cm. An alternative is
to peg the one or two shoots when ready for pegging. New shoots arising near the
bases of these shoots should then be pegged when 60 cm to 65 cm long.
9 At the end of the first pruning cycle, three or four years after tipping-in, these
pegged bushes should be pruned at a height of 40 cm, i.e. 5 cm below original
tipping level.
 Figure III:8
The pegging system of bringing into bearing
(A) Newly pegged bush (B) The same bush after tipping (C) Two types of peg
 Figure III: 9 Arrangement of pegged branches
(vi) Bringing sleeved clonal plants into bearing by pruning.
Young sleeved plants do not normally possess sufficient root reserves to support the
development of new leaves and shoots, so these plants should be pruned only if they
possess some leaves below the pruning level.
Most clonal plants tend to develop a strong main stem. This central growth should be
checked at an early stage so that strong lateral branches can be encouraged to develop.
The earlier this operation is carried out, the lesser will be the check to plant growth and
the sooner will the lateral branches develop strongly. In some districts or in some clones,
it has been found that a “thumb-nail” prune, which removes the apical bud and its first
leaf, is sufficient to stop central growth and divert the plant’s nutrients to axillary shoots,
but in most areas, this operation is ineffective and the axillary bud immediately below
this pruning level takes over as a single main central shoot, i.e. assumes apical dominance.
The most successful method is to prune the central stem or stems, but not lateral
shoots, at a height of 15 cm when the plant is 30 cm tall. The plant can subsequently be
given a cut-across prune at higher levels if need be. The system described below is that
which is used at the TRFK and has been found to be successful in most tea districts.
1. Decenter at 15 cm when the plants are 30 cm tall, but only if there are at least three
leaves on the plant below 15 cm; if there are fewer than three leaves below 15 cm,
the pruning level must be raised until at least three leaves are left on the plant.
2. Prune all the shoots at a height of 28 cm when most of these shots are 1 cm thick at
that height
3. Prune all the shoots at a height of 40 cm when most of these shoots are 1 cm thick at
that height.
4. Tip-in for three rounds at a height of 50 cm by removing shoots as soon as they have
developed three leaves and a bud above that height.
N.B. The best system will vary from clone to clone and some vigorous clones may be
brought into bearing successfully with fewer prunes than in the system.
(vii) Bringing sleeved clonal plants into bearing by pegging
A vigorous tea stump normally produces three to five shoots which are ideally suited to
pegging. A sleeved clonal plant normally produces a very vigorous main central shoot
with comparatively weak laterals. Such plants are not suitable for pegging at this stage.
The strong laterals which develop after the first decentering at 15 cm can, however be
pegged successfully.
1. Decenter at 15 cm when the plants are 30 cm tall, but only if there are at least three
leaves on the plant below 15 cm; if there are fewer than three leaves below 15 cm,
the pruning level must be raised.
 2. Peg the shoots when they reach a height of not less than 50 cm and not less than 50
cm and not more than 65 cm, and when the bark near the base of each shoot has turned
reddish brown.
3. Shoots which are too short for pegging on this first round can be pegged later, when
they have reached a height of 65 cm, together with other shorter shoots.
4. Pegging, shoot-tipping and subsequent tipping-in should be as described for pegged
tea stumps (see page 79). Tip-in at a height of 50 cm.
N.B. Plants which have insufficient lower-foliage to be decentred and plants which
respond to decentering by producing one (single stemmers) or two lateral shoots,
should be pegged when they become 45 cm tall. New shoots will normally then
develop from the base of the pegged branch, and these can in turn be pegged later
in other directions. If the pegged main shoot or shoots snap, do not cut off the
broken part; if it is not completely broken it will supply assimilates to the other parts
of the plant.
(viii) Bringing sleeved seedlings into bearing.
Methods of bringing sleeved seedlings into bearing have not been studied at TRFK
because raising seedlings in sleeves is discouraged, but practical experience on many
estates show that good frame formation can be initiated by removing the top few leaves
and apical bud from these plants when they are 25 cm tall. Lateral branches which may
have developed should not be pruned at this stage.
Subsequent to this early light prune, the seedlings can be brought into bearing by
pruning or pegging in the same way as sleeved clonal plants.
(ix) Bringing tea plants into bearing by continuous tipping.
This system entails tipping the shoots at gradually increased heights. There is a great
danger that root growth will be reduced so that ultimately the root system is too weak to
support the large branch system; plants like these may be highly susceptible to drought
in marginal areas.
1. For both stump-plants and decentred clonal plants, tip at a height of 20 cm, and again
at 30 cm and 40 cm, for two rounds by removing shoots as soon as they have
developed three leaves and a bud above those heights.
2. Tip-in at a height of 50 cm for at least five rounds by removing shoots as soon as
they have developed three leaves and a bud above that height. Regular plucking
follows this.
NB The tipped shoots may be processed into made tea if the third leaves and their stems
are broken off and discarded. If there is a delay in tipping plants at 20 cm or if only
a few shoots have developed, the shoots should be snapped at that height but not cut
off. These will supply assimilates to the other parts of the plant and help in the growth
of new axillary shoots.
Anything which affects the spread of plants also affects bringing into bearing. One of
these is potassium deficiency, which is described on page 145.
(c) Replanting
 Uprooting old tea bushes and replanting with improved clonal or seedling plants
becomes imperative where tea yields are very low despite the application of optimal
cultural practices. Replanting procedure involves uprooting and removal of the
moribund tea stumps. This is followed by construction of terraces, cut-off drains and
waterways as soil conservation measures, then cover cropping with oats and soil
conditioning crops such as Guatemala grass for up to two years in order to rehabilitate
the soil. Finally, the field is replanted with suitable high yielding, good quality clonal
plants.
Research is still continuing in trying to understand the problem of moribund/old tea
soils and as soon as information is available, growers will be informed accordingly.
Replanting is a major capital development which is very expensive and should be
considered only when the tea become completely uneconomic to maintain.

Litho Colur printers, gold foil embossing,

Calendars and desk diaries manufacturers,
Colour separations, artworks, typesetting
and photography.
Hallmark is a registered trade mark
P.O. Box 44466 Nairobi, Kenya
unit I-Lower Kirinyaga Road
Tel: 335210, 22035, 331873, 340530/1
Fax: 340533, 745788
E-mail: [email protected]
Unit II-Industrial Area (Behind Firestone)

Tel: 540999, 533895, 531310 Fax:: 541145

 Chapter IV

FIELD MANAGEMENT AND FARM

RECORDS
(a) Plucking, pruning, skiffing and tipping-in mature tea
(i) Functions of the leaves
The economically important part of the tea bush consists of the terminal tender shoot,
made of the succulent stem and one to three leaves and a bud, which protrude above
the plucking table or surface.
The tea bush, like all other green plants, obtains its food primarily from the
atmospheric carbon dioxide, which diffuses into the plant through small pores or
stomata on the leaf surface; and from water which is absorbed by roots and passes up
the stem into the leaves. In the presence of chlorophyll (the green pigment in the
leaves) the carbon dioxide and water react to synthesize sugar in the process called
photosynthesis which is dependent upon light. If there is insufficient light
photosynthesis will be reduced or even stop all together.
An efficient plant manufactures more sugar than is needed for current growth. The
excess sugar is converted into starch and stored mainly in the roots. The stored starch
is available for use by the plant in an emergency such as when new shoots are produced
after pruning, or when the rate of photosynthesis drops at night; during periods of very
hot, dry weather; during very cold weather or when only old and inefficient leaves are
present on the plant.

(ii) The maintenance foliage

The production of new shoots after pruning, skiffing or plucking is dependent upon
the plant's starch reserves. If the existing foliage on a skiffed or plucked plant is highly
efficient, the starch that is used will be replenished quickly. But if it is inefficient the
amount of stored starch decreases every time the bush is plucked to the point when
shoot production could cease whenever the plant is subjected to sub-optimal growing
conditions. It is therefore essential that the tea bush is allowed to retain at all times an
adequate amount of efficient foliage. On a plucked tea bush this foliage is called the
maintenance foliage or layer.
If the maintenance layer is too shallow or too sparse then the rate of sugar production
may be too slow to permit the accumulation of starch reserves. Therefore, after
pruning, a deep and dense layer of green leaves must be allowed to form before
plucking starts. While depth of the layer depends on the height at which plucking starts
above the level of the lowest leaves, the density of the layer depends upon the number
of shoots which will have developed before plucking starts. Tipping in practice,
increases this density. It has been found that less than 5 per cent of sunlight penetrates
below 15 cm of the maintenance layer. Therefore, a maintenance layer 25 cm deep is
adequate.
Once an adequate maintenance layer has been formed and plucking has started the
maintenance foliage gradually becomes senescent and dies. It is therefore necessary to
keep adding new efficient leaves to the layer. This is achieved gradually by leaving a
new leaf on the bush whenever a shoot is plucked above the plucking table, or in steps
by missing out one or more plucking rounds and restarting plucking at a higher level.

(iii) Plucking
The object of plucking is to provide the factory with leaf that is suitable for processing.
The factory management is accordingly responsible for deciding on the type of leaf
suitable for manufacture. On the other hand, it is the responsibility of the field
organisation to provide regularly the type of leaf required by the factory in order to
achieve and maintain a good standard of tea making. Therefore the whole of the
plucking operation should be centred on the absolute necessity of maintaining a regular
flow of standard leaf to the factory.
Two groups of terms are used in describing plucking standards. The first pair of terms
relates to the type of shoot that is sent to the factory: -
'Fine' plucking is the removal of one or two leaves and the bud. 'Coarse' plucking is
the removal of three or more leaves and the bud.
The second pair of terms relates to the amount of new foliage left on the plucked
shoot above the plucking table: -
'Light' plucking leaves some new foliage above the previous plucking level.
'Hard' plucking means that the shoots are plucked right down to the previous
plucking level so that new maintenance foliage can hardly develop.
It is possible to combine the pairs of terms to obtain four basic types of plucking:
Fine and light, fine and hard, coarse and light, coarse and hard. In general the finer the
plucking the better the overall quality of the made tea.
Light plucking ensures that the adequate depth of maintenance foliage is present on
the bush, but if the plucking is too light then the plucking table rises rapidly and the
potential crop is thus wasted by leaving pluckable leaf on the bush. On the other hand,
hard plucking cannot be continued indefinitely as at some stage new maintenance foliage
must be permitted to develop on the surface of the bushes.
The leaf standard set by the factory must not be too rigid, but should indicate the
maximum permissible proportion of over-standard and damaged shoots that can be
accepted. No plucking can be entirely "two leaves and a bud". There will be always be
a number of 3+ bud shoots, banjhi shoots, broken shoots and detached leaves.
During plucking, soft banjhi shoots must be plucked as soon as they rise above the
plucking table; if left they might become too hard at the next plucking round. Thus hard
banjhi shoots should not normally be found above the plucking table, but if they do occur
they must be plucked and discarded (breaking-back) unless the banjhi state is caused by
drought. Banjhi shoots below the plucking table should not be plucked. They are part of
maintenance foliage and are useful as their leaves are efficient at manufacturing the
sugar, which is utilised by the rest of the bush.
It has been observed in the Kenya highlands that a normal leaf on a pluckable shoot
takes 8 to 9 days to expand fully from the growing bud. Therefore a young growing
shoot with only one normal leaf and a bud takes the same period to reach a pluckable
stage of two leaves and a bud. Since most shoots to be plucked in the subsequent round
would have emerged from below the plucking surface, the duration of 8 to 9 days, or
multiples of these, may be used as guides for fixing the plucking round lengths.
The length of the plucking round should be adjusted according to the rate of growth
of bushes. Once pluckers have been trained as to what kinds of shoots to leave on the
bush then the management must check samples of plucked leaf every plucking round. If
it is found that too large a proportion of immature shoots have been plucked then the
plucking round should be lengthened, and if there is too large a proportion of over-
mature shoots then the round should be shortened.
To assist the pluckers maintain a flat plucking table on the bushes, they should be
provided with long straight sticks or "wands", which can be placed across several
bushes and pushed down gently so that they are just at the plucking level. On sloping
fields the wands must be placed parallel to the slope and not the contour. Failure to
do this leads to "step-plucking" when each contour row of tea has a horizontal surface
partly shaded by the row immediately above it on the slope.
Breaking-back is only necessary when the plucking round is so long that after the
standard shoots have been plucked, the stubs of these shoots bear several leaves above
what should have been the plucking table. The pluckers then have to break these stubs
off at the plucking table and throw them away. This is a waste of both leaf and
manpower and the operation should be avoided during peak periods of leaf
production.

(iv) Leaf collection and transport

No matter how good the plucking and the manufacturing might be, good quality tea
cannot be manufactured unless the plucked leaf arrives in the factory in perfect
condition. Bruised leaf will immediately start to ferment, so it is important that the
leaf should be plucked into baskets of an adequate size so that it does not have to
be compressed and that, if transferred to other containers for transporting to the
factory the latter containers are not so large that the leaf is compressed by the weight
of other leaf above it. If sacks are used they should never be packed tightly, piled
on top of each other or sat upon. They should be stacked in single layers or hung
from hooks.
The interval between plucking and delivery at the factory should be kept as short
as possible, otherwise leaf on the outside of the containers might become dry in
comparison with that in the centre, resulting in uneven withering in the factory.
At no time should plucked leaf be left lying in the sun, as this will lead to rapid
deterioration of the leaf.
Leaf containers should be kept clean and should not be rested on soil, since dirt
picked up this way is liable to taint the tea while the pieces of grit included with
the leaf can damage machinery in the factory.

(v) Pruning
1. Normal pruning
Under normal plucking the table rises gradually with time at the rate of about 20 cm
annually. After 3 to 4 years from pruning the table reaches an unmanageable height
(120-150cm) and plucking is considered cumbersome, leading to reduction in plucker
productivity. At this stage it is necessary to prune the bushes down so that plucking
can be started at a lower level.
 The duration of successive prunes of the pruning cycle may vary with locality
due to differences in climate, the jat of the tea or clone, the style of plucking
adopted and the nutrient status of the plants
The pruning level should be raised gradually. A rise of 5 cm each time has been
found satisfactory. Pruning at the same level each time leads to the formation of large
knots of callous tissue or clubs.
The pruning should be a straight cut-across parallel to the slope of the ground (see
Figure IV:1). The pruning cut on each stem should slope slightly so that rainwater
drains off the cut and does not remain to induce branch dieback.

.
Figure IV:1
Pruning a mature tea plant

2. Lung pruning
In this type of pruning, a number of branches are left on the bush unpruned until
the bud-break stage of re-growth when they are then removed. Research has shown
this type of pruning to aid in faster recover and contribution to the overall yield has
also been noted especially where rim-lung pruning is used. In rim-lung pruning the
branches to be left are those on the periphery of the bush, and arranged such that
adjacent rows of tea would have lungs on one side to enhance plucker productivity.
Twelve branches are recommended per bush, until tipping-in time.
3. Down or height-reduction pruning
After a number of pruning cycles, the pruning level may be so high that the plucking
table reaches an unmanageable height too soon. It is then necessary to lower the pruning
level from the maximum of 70 cm down to 45 cm and start off a new series of pruning
cycles. This low prune is often called a "height-reduction" prune or a "down" prune.
During the down pruning operation, attempts should be made to remove all diseased,
dead and knotted branches
As a guide to pruning at the correct height, a stick clearly marked or notched at the
pruning height, should be placed vertically in the centre of the bush and two or three
branches pruned at the indicated height. Due to a possible change in ground height,
either because of accumulation of organic matter or soil erosion, it is recommended
that this height be checked against the previous pruning cuts and adjustment made to
achieve the required pruning height. The rest of the branches are then pruned at the
correct height, using the already-pruned branches as a guide. The pruning stick can be
pushed into the bush at the level of the already-pruned branches, adjusted so that it is
parallel to the ground, and used as a guide for pruning the rest of the bush.
On sloping ground the prunes should use a horizontal stick with two upright sticks
fastened to it at a distance apart equal to the distance between the rows of tea and with
the height of the horizontal stick equal to the required pruning height. This frame is
then placed over the bush with one of the upright sticks higher up the slope than the
bush and the other upright on the slope below the bush. The horizontal stick will then
be parallel to the ground slope and at the correct pruning height.
When pruning is carried out during hot sunny weather the newly exposed stems may
be damaged by sun-scorch. This damage is started within minutes and can be
prevented effectively by placing some of the prunings over the pruned bush
immediately after that bush has been pruned. Covering the bushes a day after pruning
may be too late as the sun-scorch damage may have occurred. When the pruned bushes
have recovered and the new shoots are vigorously growing and touching the prunings,
the latter are removed and placed on the ground.
The prunings must never be removed from the field. They help to suppress weeds,
prevent soil erosion, improve soil structure, and on decomposition they release large
amounts of plant nutrients into the topsoil where the nutrients become available to the
pruned bushes. Whereas there is no clear experimental evidence as to the best time of
pruning in Kenya, it is considered that the most suitable time for pruning is probably
towards the end of the peak growing period. In Kenya the latter coincides with the start
of the dry season or the start of the cool season (July & August).
Pruning should be done while there is still adequate moisture in the soil. The prunings
then form a mulch that reduces the loss of water by evaporation from the soil. The lack
of foliage on the bushes means that transpiration will be minimal until there will still
be enough water in the soil to support the bushes' continued growth until the end of
the dry season.
The speed of recovery from pruning of a bush depends on the plants' starch reserves
in the roots. Since the starch reserves are withdrawn during the dry season to sustain
the rest of the tea bush, the end of the dry season is a bad time to prune.
(vi) Skiffing
This is a very light pruning operation whereby the bushes are cut across using a
pruning knife, at some level within the maintenance layer. Skiffing may be done to
level off the plucking table when the bushes have developed domed surfaces which
result generally from poor plucking on the sides of the bushes until such a time as the
outer shoots reach the same height as the central shoots.

(vii) Tipping-in
The object of tipping-in after pruning is to produce a dense and upper level surface to
the bush so that efficient plucking is possible and to leave an adequate depth of
maintenance foliage on the bush. Normal plucking should not be started until a
sufficient depth and density of maintenance foliage has formed to ensure the
replacement of all the food reserves used up in the development of new shoots after
the bushes were pruned.
After pruning, the new shoots originate at different heights on the stems and form an
uneven surface above the pruning level. Plucking on such uneven table is difficult and
inefficient. Tipping-in at a fixed height above the pruning level enables all shoots
emanating from the pruned bush to be plucked initially at a uniform height and thus
establish a smooth table.
Tipping-in should start before the shoots go banjhi at a height of about 25 cm to 30 cm
above the pruning level. In practice, it has been found that the best tipping-in height is
10 cm above the pruning level. During tipping-in, shoots that have developed three
leaves and a bud above the tipping-in level should be plucked off at the tipping-in
level. On sloping ground, the tipping-in level should be parallel to the ground since
the bushes would have been pruned parallel to the slope of the ground.
Aids to tipping-in (see Figure IV:2) are similar to those mentioned previously for
pruning. An alternative method is to use a cord stretched tight between two upright
sticks at the required tipping-in height. The sticks should be pushed firmly into the
ground to a standard depth. A strip of strong rubber fastened to the cord is useful in
maintaining tension, but no more than ten bushes at a time in a row can be dealt with
by this method.
At least three rounds of tipping-in, at the same level, should be carried out on pruned
bushes and five rounds on pegged bushes before normal plucking is introduced. During
the second and subsequent tipping-in rounds, the plucker may be aided by use of a
short stick marked or notched at the tipping-in height above the pruning level. A string
tied at the top end of the measuring stick is further tied around the left hand wrist. Any
moment the plucker is not certain of the tipping-in level of a shoot, he quickly uses the
marked stick by placing it vertically onto the nearest previous tipped-in or pruned
stalk.
It is important that tipping-in is not delayed. Undue delay means that the buds just
below the tipping level will become mature and will therefore take longer to develop
into new shoots. Never tip-in with a knife.
The branches of pegged bushes slope upwards and are usually tipped-in directly,
without pruning. On such bushes, the question of tipping-in above the pruning level
does not arise. Instead, the average height of pegged branches is assumed to be 25 cm
in the case of initial single or double-stemmed plants which have been given an extra
prune at 10 cm. The average height of the branches of pegged sleeved plants is
assumed to be 30 cm so that tipping-in is carried out at a height of 50 cm.

Figure IV:2
Tipping
(b) Rehabilitation of moribund tea plants
A moribund tea plantation is one whose production has stagnated or shows a decline in
spite of optimum cultural practices. It has been observed that tea stands aged over 50
years and having more than 25 per cent vacancies are usually moribund and therefore
require drastic action to bring the field back to full production.
(i) Causes of moribund state in tea
Tea yield stagnation has been shown to be due to weakened bushes and gaps resulting
from deaths of some of the bushes. The major causes of plant population decline are
pests (e.g. Mosquito bug or Helopeltis spp., Spider mites, nematodes and moles) and
diseases (e.g. Armillaria mellea, Phomopsis theae and Hypoxylon serpens). Non-
pathological causes of tea bush weakening and death include lightning, removal of
prunings, soil mineral deficiencies, drought, weed competition and inter-row cultivation
which damages feeder roots.
(ii) Rehabilitation methods
In order to establish the need for rehabilitation of moribund tea areas, it is necessary to
monitor the yield level and the percentage of gaps in individual fields. Under optimal
cultural practices, annual yield levels of less than 1000 kg made tea per hectare from tea
fields older than 50 years may be used as a guide to initiate a rehabilitation programme.
The gaps should constitute at least 25% in the field.
 Two rehabilitation methods which have been applied in other tea growing
countries and are under intensive evaluation in Kenya are described below:
1. Rejuvenation pruning
This involves hard or deep cutting back of tea bushes at a height of 10-15 cm above the
ground in order to remove old, diseased, gnarled and knotted branches low down. This
enables new growth which leads to vigorous new framework of a tea bush. Interplanting
with high yielding, good quality clonal plants within the rows of the originally wide-
spaced plants and also infilling the gaps may increase the subsequent productivity of the
field.
2. Replanting
See Page 82.
(c) Hail damaged tea
Most of the tea growing areas west of Rift Valley in Kenya experience hailstorms
which may cause some crop loss through leaf damage and subsequent skipping of
one or more plucking rounds, depending on the severity of the hail damage.
Tea plants recovering from pruning may use most, if not all, of their root
reserves in developing new foliage. A repeated loss of foliage by hail will
have at least the following effects:
1. The plant utilises root reserves in developing new shoots.
2. There is a loss of maintenance foliate.
3. A crop loss is expected as a result of torn off tender leaves and skipping
of one or more plucking rounds.
4. The broken-off leaf acts as a mulch on the soil and its decay may
temporarily cause reduction in the amount of nitrogen available to the tea
plant. In the long run, however, the minerals released from the decayed
broken-off foliage may be available to the tea plants.
5. Scars caused by hail stone injury on tender stems may develop into large
cankers on the bush frame and these may be entry points for disease
pathogens. No shoots develop from the cankerous areas of the bush.
Very severe hail damage results in the dying back of shoots and reduction in
the number of dormant buds which can develop into new shoots. In these cases
it is best to skiff the tea plants below the level of maximum damage. This skiff
might reach the severity of a light prune if the damage was very bad, or might
serve the purpose of merely levelling the table if the hail damage was light.
The action taken after hail damage must allow the redevelopment of adequate
maintenance foliage. Therefore a period of light plucking or even of complete
resting of the bushes by skipping at least one plucking round must be allowed.
(d) Infilling
In a field of tea some plants die due to various causes such as bad weather,
mechanical damage, pests and diseases. The longer the delay in replacing these
plants the more difficult it will be to raise the infills into high-yielding plants. It is
therefore important that infilling in new fields or in mature tea is completed as
quickly as possible after planting or pruning. Only the most vigorous clonal plants
should be used for infilling to enable them to compete with the surrounding bushes.
Tea plants which die as a result of attack by Armillaria should be uprooted
immediately and moved away from the field for burning. A new planting hole 1 m
in diameter and 60 cm deep should be made at the time of the dead bush's removal.
All pieces of diseased roots found during this process should be carefully removed,
while taking care not to damage the roots of adjacent bushes. Should larger pieces
of old root remaining in the ground from forest trees be exposed during the
excavation, they should carefully be removed down to a depth of 100 cm and
burned.
For replacing plants which die from causes other than Armillaria a hole double
the size of a normal planting hole, i.e. a hole 50 cm in diameter and 60 cm deep
should be prepared, removing all pieces of roots which are found. A hole larger
than normal is necessary so that roots of neighbouring older tea plants are cut
through and thus do not compete with the roots of the infill plant before it is well
established.
(i) Raising infills in the nursery
In order to ensure that vigorous plants are available for infilling it is necessary either
to select the best plants from a standard nursery or to prepare nursery for the plants
which are to be used as infills. The best plants for use as infills should be large
sleeved-plants of a vigorous clone and which have undergone one prune in the
nursery. To keep multiplication plots only pure plants of the same clones as the
multiplication plots should be used as infills.
Cuttings of the infilling clone should be planted into large sleeves (12 cm circular
diameter, 35 cm length and 250 gauge), be in the nursery for about 18 months,
pruned in the nursery at 15 cm when they are 30 cm tall and transferred to the field
vacancies later during dull weather. This ensures that by the time transplanting is
carried out, the infills will already have developed a good branching system so that
after a further prune or pegging in the field a complete cover of tea is rapidly
attained.
If seedlings in sleeves are used the same system can be followed, except that care
must be taken to select the most vigorous seedlings. With seedling stumps, it will
be useful to have a separate seedling nursery in which the seeds are planted at a
wide spacing of 20 cm by 20 cm triangular. The seedlings are pruned in the nursery
at 10 cm height when the stem base is about 1.0 cm thick and then pruned in the
following year at 20 cm height at the time of transplanting into the field. At least
12 months must elapse between the two prunes to ensure that root reserves are fully
replaced. During this period the seedlings should be unshaded in the nursery as full
sunlight accelerates the rate at which the dormant buds on the stem start to develop
into new shoots, increases the number of such shoots and enhances the rate of
photosynthesis.
Fertilizer is applied to infills as described on page 126.
(ii) Treatment of infills after planting
For infilling within two years of field planting when the original plants are being
pegged or being brought into bearing by pruning, treat the infills in exactly the same
way as the older plants. When the original plants are being pruned, prune the infills
at 30 cm when the main stem at that height is 1.0 cm thick and tip-in with the older
plants at 50 cm.
For infilling fields which are two or more years old, cut back the sides of plants
adjacent to the vacant plant site. Prune the infill at 20 cm when 1.0 cm thick at
that height and tip-in at the existing level of the older plants.
In areas containing several adjacent vacancies, plant three infills for every two
vacancies. After planting, keep the sides of any adjacent bushes cut back. In
young fields give a 40 cm prune and tip-in at the same level as the surrounding
tea bushes. In mature tea it may help to put long stakes next to infills to prevent
the infills from being trampled by the pluckers or weeders.
(e) Rain gauges
The object of installing rain gauges is to obtain an accurate measure of the amount
of water falling on a site in the form of rain and mist. Many rain gauges on tea
estates fail to do this either because of the design of the rain gauge which is faulty
or because the site is unsuitable.
Where consideration is being given to the irrigation of tea, the amount of
water storage required and the capacity of pipes and pumps will depend upon
the rainfall in the area to be irrigated. If rainfall records are inaccurate by as
much as 25 per cent, which is not an uncommon error, the provisions made
for irrigation might be insufficient or, alternatively, might be wastefully over-
generous.
(i) Type of rain gauge
The Kenya Meteorological Department currently recommends the rain gauge
illustrated below in Figure IV:3. The funnel is of a special design, the top being an
accurately turned bevelled brass ring finished to a knife-edge precisely 12.7 cm (5
in) in diameter. To minimise out splashing, the funnel is cylindrical to a depth of at
least 10 cm (4 in).
The funnel and container have soldered seams which should be inspected
regularly for leaks. The spout of the funnel must be kept clear of debris.
(ii) Siting
The site for the rain gauge must be chosen with care as the amount of rainfall
which falls on a small site can be greatly influenced by local wind eddies caused
by buildings and trees and by features such as hills and valleys.
No obstruction should be nearer to the rain gauge than a distance equal to
twice the height of the obstruction and, in the site itself, the surface should be
 level and covered with gravel or short, preferably mown grass; concrete or
bare soil should be avoided. The top rim of the rain gauges should be
maintained at 30 cm above the ground, with the base sunk into the ground.
The rain gauge should never be mounted on a pole or pillar unless the rain
gauge is sited in a field of tea, when it should be raised so that the rim is 30
cm above the plucking table.
Because rainfall can vary over quite short distances, a grower who is obtaining
rainfall data to help him plan for irrigation should have one rain gauge for every 50
ha. of tea.
iii) Recording
Rainfall should be measured at 0900 hours daily. The collected water should be poured
into a measuring cylinder which is graduated in millimetres or in tenths and hundredths
of an inch. The bottom of the measure should be tapered so that small quantities can be
measured accurately. When 0.05 mm (or 0.005") or less is measured, the rainfall should
be recorded as a trace (Figure IV:5). When taking rainfall readings, the eye level should
be at position A as shown in Figure IV:4 avoid possible parallax error. The recorded
data should be in a clear and permanent form for future reference.
Figure IV:3

Standard raingauge, as recommended by the Kenya Meteorological Department

(f) Irrigation
Although the total rainfall in a year may be adequate for all the year round production of
green leaf in most tea areas of Kenya, when temperatures permit, the distribution of this
rainfall month by month is often inadequate. Most tea areas of Kenya experience both
cool, wet and warm, dry seasons. The latter comes when growing conditions are most
favourable and water requirement of the plant is at the maximum. Water loss by
evapotranspiration soon exceeds rainfall, leading to soil moisture deficit. When this
situation is prolonged a water imbalance in the plant system ensues which is followed by
wilting and an immediate reduction in crop or a complete stop without crop at all. This
may be alleviated or eliminated by irrigation.
Water is not the only factor controlling growth. It is useless to begin watering tea at the
end of the dry season if the temperature is low. It is also useless to water tea unless the
crop is provided with sufficient nutrients. If irrigation has therefore to be applied
profitably, it has to be applied judiciously.
In the late 1960's tea irrigation studies were concluded at Ngwazi in Mufindi district in
Tanzania. This was an area where a long dry season is experienced every year which
made it possible to apply and withhold water at will during the dry season, without
interference by rain.
The studies indicated that although irrigated areas out yielded the unirrigated tea,
intermittent irrigation during the day resulted in larger yields than irrigating the tea every
ten days. This observation had also been reported from Georgia (CIS*). The reasons for
this observations were attributed to the following changes in the environmental conditions
under irrigated tea compared to the unirrigated fields:
1. There was a general increase in the size of the stomata (without irrigation, the
stomata tend to partially close in the middle of the day even when there was
adequate water in the soil);
2. There was a reduction in sap tension, air temperature and vapour pressure
deficit.
In Kenya it has been a policy to grow tea in areas where irrigation is least
anticipated. But with the extension of tea growing in new marginal areas and the changes
in the climatic patterns, it has been advocated that some areas could benefit from irrigation.
The question is: where and when will irrigation pay? The answer to this question depends

1. The frequency and duration of the dry seasons

Obviously the more frequent and longer the dry seasons the greater the need will be for
irrigation.

2. The age and vigour of the tea

Young, shallow-rooting tea is more susceptible to a short dry season than older deeper-
rooted tea both of which have the same degree of ground cover. Healthy bushes will
survive a dry season better than weak, sickly bushes, and they will also produce more crop
when irrigated.

3. The depth, type and fertility of the soil

Tea growing on shallow and/or sandy soil, will be more susceptible to a dry season than
tea growing on a deep and/or loam soil. Although irrigation will increase the availability
of some nutrients, it will not by itself, make up for nutrient deficiency. Maximum returns
will only occur when the nutrient status of the tea is at an optimum level.
4. Availability of water suitable for irrigation
Pumping water to a height or from a distance is expensive. The closer the water
supply is to the tea that is to be irrigated, the cheaper will be the cost of irrigation.
Remember however, that the maximum demand for water for irrigation is likely to
occur when water supplies are at their lowest.
Irrigation should only be considered when other more easily controllable factors
such as nutrition have been corrected. It then becomes necessary to assess each
individual situation on its merits so that a rational decision on the benefits likely
to result from irrigation can be reached.
In those areas where the dry seasons last six weeks or less it seems unlikely that
irrigation of mature tea will pay, at least initially. Similarly, if the soil is shallow
and the tea always look "sick" after a few weeks of dry weather then irrigation is
most likely to pay. However, in the latter areas, irrigation of newly planted tea is
likely, in the long run, to prove the most profitable enterprise. Irrigation of such tea
will not only allow planting to proceed evenly throughout the year but will also, as
stated earlier, raise the yield potential of those plants in succeeding years, providing
of course they are always properly fertilised.
In the search for immediate short-term gains in yield through irrigation one must
not lose sight of the following indirect, but equally important benefits that may
result:
1. The tea crop production will be more even throughout the year with
obvious managerial advantages.
2. Irrigated tea will have the capacity to respond to even higher levels
of nitrogen when phosphate and potassium levels are optimum.
3. Well fertilised, irrigated tea can be plucked harder. Hard plucking
may mean longer pruning cycles with increase yields.
4. Irrigation is primarily a means of supplying soil moisture if there is
a deficiency. This is important in improving the health and vigour
of the tea crop.
The healthy vigorous crops are more resistant to the ravages of
disease and pests than the less healthy crops. Diseases such as stem
canker (Phomopsis theae) thrive well in droughted bushes.
NB: Over-irrigation may negatively affect root development by
encouraging shallow rooting and root exposure. If later the rate of
irrigation is reduced or stopped the plants will be rendered
susceptible to drought.
To obtain the maximum benefit from irrigation, the water must be applied in
the correct amounts and at the correct time. The effect of irrigation should be
to maintain the soil water content at some level between field capacity and
the wilting point of tea. At field capacity the soil is fully moist and any
additional water would simply drain downwards through the soil. At the
wilting point of tea, the soil becomes so dry that any water remaining is
tightly held by the soil particles and can no longer be extracted by the tea
roots: the plant then wilts. As the soil dries up it cracks and in the process it
may break the tea feeder roots. The actual water content at this stage will
vary from soil to soil.
Irrigation should start as soon as the water content of the soil has fallen below
field capacity by a certain amount. This is known as the water deficit, expressed
as the depth of surface-applied water needed to bring the water content back to
field capacity. It is normally estimated from two sets of information; the quantity
of rain which falls on the field and the amount of water lost by evaporation from
the soil and transpiration from the tea plants. These two causes of water loss are
jointly termed evapotranspiration.
Rainfall data (see page 92) when properly taken and kept are essential for accurate
planning for irrigation systems.
Evapotranspiration tanks designed and built as recommended by the Kenya
Meteorological Department are the other essential means of estimating water loss
from tea by evapotranspiration.

5. Irrigation equipment and water supply

The Foundation is not in a position to recommend any system of irrigation
equipment, but in Kenya several suitable types are available.
Before an irrigation system is installed, it is essential that provision be made
for supplying adequate water from rivers or dams. Care should be taken to
ensure that legal requirements are met for taking water from rivers, dams or
bore holes, and the advice of experts should be sought regarding the siting
and construction of the necessary facilities.
There are two main systems of irrigation which can be used in tea:
1. Furrow irrigation: water is led to the plant by surface furrows which allow the
water to trickle gently down the slope of the ground, percolating into the soil
as it does so. This system is wasteful as much of the water drains through the
soil below the furrow; many nutrients are leached from the soil; the system
can be used only on suitable terrain. On the other hand, the power
requirements are low as the water reaches the plants by gravity.
2. Overhead irrigation: which allows water to be applied through various
designs of sprinkler equipment in accurately controlled amounts and with a
minimum of wastage. However, one climatic factor affecting the utility of
overhead (sprinkler) irrigation is wind, which may move the water droplets
and distort the sprinkling pattern.

(g) Farm records

Keeping of good farm records is very vital in tea production for formulating good
farm policies.
In Kenya, large tea estates have experienced employees who can keep good farm
records, required in tea production. On the other hand, there are small scale
growers whose records are kept by Kenya Tea Development Authority.
In between these types of growers, there are those with substantial hectarage of
tea and in most cases they themselves manage their own tea farms. They may
become under capitalised due to other competing enterprises and they depend on
workers who, in most cases, do not have enough experience in tea production.
The grower must be ready to supervise and inspect farm records, and should keep
simple farm records if the work has to be easy.
Most farmers keep good farm records but there are those who are not sure which
type of farm records should be kept and the following explanation might benefit
them.
If the grower does not stay on the farm or has no time to visit the farm it is
suggested that the farm records should be kept in duplicate. The original should
be sent to the farm owner and the duplicate kept by whoever runs the farm. The
copy sent to the owner will enable the grower to know the progress in the farm
and how the employees are working. Before giving a list of some important farm
records, one thing should be stressed. The farm owner should know the area of
his farm and the amount of tea in every plot. The way tea is planted; problem area
(hut-sites), land topography, etc., all contribute to the differences in the amount
of tea in every area planted. For example when making estimates of costs involved
in the pruning work, the actual number of tea bushes should be known.

(i) Daily Muster Sheet - Attendance Register

The purpose of this record is to show the daily situation of workers in the farm.
The record is made daily to show the number of employees, those who did not
report to work, the sick and those on leave.

Example 1
Date Reported to work Absent Sick On leave Tota
l
Type of (present)
work
Plucking
Weeding
Pruning
Etc
TOTAL

(ii) Labour Distribution Register - Attendance Summary

The purpose of this record is to summarise the daily number of workers under
different activities or items in the tea farm for the whole month. It more or less
summarises and consolidates what is recorded in the Daily Muster Sheet. If
properly recorded, it will show the total number of workers who did a certain
job daily, and the number of days it took to complete a particular task. It will
show the grower which work item is consuming more money.
Example 2
SECTION .....................……FOR THE MONTH OF ..................……………..
Item Work done Date TOTAL
1 2 3 4 5 6 etc
10 Weeding 21 - - - -
12 Spraying 5
Etc Etc etc
TOTAL 26

(iii) Check/Muster Roll

The purpose of this book is to record daily, on individual worker basis, days earned
in the month, absent and sick days, as well as kilograms of tea plucked. Overtime
hours earned daily are also recorded. This is also where monthly wages are
calculated and statutory deductions such as NSSF, Union dues, etc., are recorded.
Example 3
MONTH OF ...............……………. ESTATE/FARM ....................……………
Date 1 2 3 4 - Sub 11 - Sub Leaf Days
10 Total 20 Tota Plucked worked
No. Name l (kg)
1. John Run 30 30
1 1
2. Sam Yes 45 40 85

3. Nick Two 36 36
1 A A 1
etc etc
Total leaf (kg) 111 40
Total Days - 2 151
No. of 2
pluckers
Checked by

(iv) Green Leaf Sheet (Field Weight)

This is where daily green leaf plucked by individual workers is recorded. The
Green Leaf Clerk records it on plucking gang basis. The leaf recorded on these
sheets is transferred daily to the Check Roll.
Example 4
Green Leaf Field Weights

NO Name of Weights under field numbers (kg) Total

supervisor
1 Rutto 500 - - - 650 - - 1150
2 Ratemo 750 910 1660
etc etc etc
Total 1250 2810
...................... Leaf Clerk ...........................Check Roll Clerk ..............……..
Checked by ........................ Manager/Head Clerk ............................
(v) Green Leaf Summary
This summarises total tea plucked on one particular day. It is recorded on gang
basis, and it shows the farmer the differences between factory weight and field
weight, helping therefore to check performances of his pluckers.
Example 5
Daily Green Leaf Summary Estate .................. Date ........….20 ......
Green Leaf Gang No. of Field Factory Field + Plucking +
leaf Clerk Supervisor pluckers No. weight Weight Kg Average %
(kg) -

TOTAL LEAF PLUCKED

(vi) Green Leaf Register

This records plucked tea on daily basis for the whole month. The sheet is arranged on field
basis and its hectarage. It also shows the field and factory weights separately, and total
made tea plucked from each field. From this record the grower will be able to compare
productivity of his fields throughout and at the end of the year.

Example 6
Field N0. 1 3 3 Factory Field Diff. + Diff. + Made Checked
Hectares 10 12 12 weight weight or - or - tea by
Date kg kg kg kg kg kg % Kg
1.7.2000
2.7.2000
etc
Total current
Month
Made Tea
This month
Previously
To-date
kg. Per ha.
This month
Previously
To-date
Estimate

(viii) Stores Register

This is required to keep track of the movement of tools in the estate/farm. Any changes in
the number of tools like new ones, those written-off or lost etc., will be noted here. The
management should set a time interval, preferably monthly, to check these records against
the actual physical count of the various tools. In this way one will know the state of his or
her tools and take appropriate action where necessary.
 Chapter V

FERTILIZERS AND NUTRITION

(a) Crop nutrition and fertilizer practice
(i) Nutrients and the factors influencing their uptake
A plant nutrient is strictly defined as a chemical element that is essential for the
growth of the plant. It has been found that many species of plants require the same
nutrients, and it is usual to refer to a group of elements as essential nutrients for all
green-leaved plants of the type grown as agricultural crops. In section (0) a list of
sixteen essential nutrient elements is given for reference. It is assumed that tea
follows the general rule, and that this list applies. Thirteen of the elements are
grouped as mineral nutrients, which is a convenient terminology, as all the nutrients
for which fertilizers or manures may be used, fall into this group. The three
remaining nutrients, carbon, hydrogen and oxygen make up the bulk of plant
tissues, but are supplied by air and water, and are not discussed here.
Occasionally, it is found that elements outside the list of sixteen can improve the
field performance of certain crops, without in fact being essential to the survival
of that species. There is no evidence that tea is influenced in this way. Again,
chemical compounds generated from more than one element have been found to
influence plant growth, for example, "plant hormones" or growth regulating
substances. This is by virtue of the way in which the compound is formed, and is
not simply the effect of the individual elements. These considerations may affect
fertilizer use for certain crops, but in the absence of firm evidence for tea, it is
preferred to restrict attention to the individual nutrient elements.
Roots extract mineral nutrients from the soil, by means of physiological process,
which require energy to be expended by the plant. Transport of nutrients within the
plant, and their utilisation in the tissues also require energy. Efficient nutrition, in
the sense of the full use of mineral nutrients, can only be thought of as one aspect
of the whole complex of factors affecting plant growth such as the supply of water
and air, light and temperature effects, and (for crop plants) cultural techniques. The
vigour of roots, and their potential energy release, depends largely upon the supply
of compounds transported to them from the leaves and the soil.

(ii) Nutrient release from the soil

Plant nutrients, and other elements, occasionally exist in solution in the films of
water surrounding the soil particles, and in forms that can be absorbed immediately
by a plant root. Provided that the soil mass is thoroughly filled by active roots, a
plant has full opportunity to use these readily available sources of nutrients. The
leaching effect of rain, which may wash nutrients below the reach of roots which
are concentrated in the topsoil, is a serious factor limiting the value of the freely
soluble reserves. More often, plant nutrients exist in the soil in forms which are
held, more or less firmly, in chemical or physical combination with the mineral and
organic components of soil. Roots need to expend more energy to exploit these
reserves, the release of which can be hastened by the action of soil flora fauna, and
also by chemical compounds deriving from the decay of organic matter, and from
root excretions.
Some organic residues may decay so slowly that, in agricultural terms, any
nutrients which they may contain are virtually unavailable to a crop. Minerals
from the rocks which gave rise to the soil, contain widely varying proportion of
nutrients, which are equally variable in their rate of release in forms which plant
roots can use. In general, it is true to say that the absolute nutrient content of a
soil, is a poor guide to the availability of those nutrients to plants.
The plant itself can influence the availability of nutrients in the soil mass, and also
their exploitation. Movement of roots to sources of nutrients is often more
important than the movement of nutrients to roots. Most nutrient movement in
soil is downwards. If a plant has an extensive root system, which can also
penetrate the soil profile in depth, it has a greater chance of removing nutrients as
they are washed down, in addition to exposing a greater volume of nutrients to
root action and possible release.
Tea is a crop which, under present systems of management, can bring about
marked changes in soil conditions, which themselves can be expected to influence
the relation between soil nutrients and root uptake. The accumulation of leaf and
wood residues on the soil surface, alters the physical condition of the top-soil, and
adds nutrients to the same zone. As the root system matures, lower zones in the
soil profile will give up nutrients to the bush, eventually to contribute to the
enrichment of the top-soil. Soil disturbance has become increasingly unnecessary,
as tea has been grown to provide a closed canopy. This added protection to the
soil surface lessens the rate of loss of organic matter and certain nutrients from
the top-soil. The trends have been seen over the past few decades, in more than
one tea-growing country, and they have begun to reverse the soil deterioration
which followed the earlier planting of tea.
Much of the original tea planting in Kenya was done on virgin land or on and
which carried a reasonable cover of secondary vegetation. Physical conditions
and nutrient availability on the top-soil encourage good growth of the young tea,
but the exposure of the soil led to a rapid loss of nutrients, other than that
proportion which contributed to the development of the bush. As nutrient reserves
fell, at different rates in different areas, the effects of nutrient deficiencies were
recognised in the resulting debilitation of the tea. The Foundation at first
concentrated its attention on remedying nutrient deficiencies, but a few years ago
a change was made to an overall fertilizer policy which aimed to be flexible
enough to cover prophylaxis and to guard against the possibility of further nutrient
shortages limiting the anticipated rise in crop yields. The present assessment of
this policy, which is the purpose of this section, is connected with the techniques
available to evaluating fertilizer usage, the subject of the following sub-section.

(iii) Relations between fertilizer and crop growth

Experience in Kenya has shown that it is not generally safe to expect the soil to
provide sufficient nutrients for more than a short period, to support the high yields
of tea which we now know can be obtained. Without supplementing the nutrient
supply in one form or another, it may not even be possible to maintain yields at an
economic level for more than a few years. The only practicable way of adding those
nutrients which the soil reserves cannot supply, is by the use of fertilizers. Organic
manures are mentioned briefly in a later section, but for reasons of economics, they
could never be expected to play an appreciable part in tea nutrition. Soil application
of fertilizer is, with the exceptions of zinc and copper which are dealt with towards
the end of the chapter, the technique which will be considered a normal.
All the fertilizer nutrients, once they have come into solution in the soil, react to
a greater extent with the soil itself, or with rainwater percolating through the profile.
Studies of crop utilisation of fertilizers in general, have shown that relatively little
of the nutrients applied can be accounted for in the plant as a whole. A recovery of
over half of the applied nutrient is considered to be good. Loss in drainage water
certainly accounts for some of the readily soluble nutrients, such as potassium and
nitrate-nitrogen. Chemical reaction with soil minerals can render some phosphorus
unavailable to roots. In spite of intensive research, this sort of problem has still not
been solved, and fertilizer efficiency remains generally poor. It is not known in
detail how efficiently tea in Kenya uses fertilizer, but there is reason to believe that
this can vary greatly from one site to another. An earlier series of formal, fertilizer
field experiments on tea in all Kenyan major districts showed very clearly that the
degree of yield response to a given nutrient was highly variable. Of course, not all
the variations would be attributable to interactions between fertilizers and soil but
the integration of agricultural factors was such as to lessen the value of
generalisation regarding probable fertilizer effects. Reports of these experiments
will be found in the Tea Research Institute’s Annual Reports from 1963 to 1979
and Tea Research Foundation of Kenya’s Annual Reports from 1980 to 1996, Tea,
Volume 2, Number 1, July 1981, and Tea, Volume 18, Number 1, July 1997.
One feature that was shown by several of these experiments was that the
magnitude of the increase in yield tended to diminish, as the total level of fertilizer
nutrient increased. In some experiments, a point was reached, where an increase in
application of a nutrient did not result in any further increase in yield. This is a
general finding for crops which can show a beneficial response to fertilizer
application, and is known scientifically as the Law of Diminishing Returns. The
economic implication is obvious: the value of additional crop may well at first
exceed the costs of applying fertilizer, but eventually so little additional crop will
be obtained for each increment in fertilizer, that no monetary gain will be achieved.
The critical point, in economic terms, will change as market costs and returns
change, and cannot be fixed by any biological definition. Nor is it possible to fix a
biological critical point, however defined. Climatic changes influence the shape of
a yield response curve, as also do methods of bush management and type of tea.
Tea which is not yet mature may show different response curves as it does mature,
when a larger proportion of the absorbed nutrients contributes directly to the crop,
as opposed to the developing frame and root system. Finally, mature tea grown in
a soil/plant system which is being continuously changed by the bush itself, may
alter the fertilizer/yield relation the whole time.
The evaluation of the fertilizer by the grower depends on assessment of this sort
of relation, and as current market factors make the liberal use of fertilizer less
attractive, so the need for a more individual approach becomes imperative. This
applies with particular force to high-yielding mature tea. Treatment of lower-
yielding mature tea, as mentioned again in the next sub-section, will to a large
extent, be guided by experience already gained with the better tea.
(iv) Attempts at chemical estimation of fertilizer needs
Chemical analysis of the soil was, historically, the approach which first received
intensive study for many crops. The present finding is that this technique can give
useful information for some crops, especially annuals, but that for others its value
is limited. Tissue analysis or as it is commonly known, "leaf analysis", was
introduced into agricultural research relatively recently, and has had some success,
especially for some perennial crops. Taken together, it might seem that a chemical
analysis approach could answer at least two important points: the potential reserves
of plant nutrients in the soil, the ability of a plant to extract those nutrients. Research
and agricultural experience has shown that it is not a straight forward matter, either
to estimate nutrient reserves, or to explain why a given plant can vary so much in
its ability to exploit those reserves over a period of time. If a nutrient is in very low
supply, the chemical approach can be valuable in detecting the actual or potential
danger. As nutrient supply approaches the optimum, so the precision of chemical
evaluation falls. Leaf analysis has served a useful purpose in detecting gross
deficiencies of certain nutrients in tea in Kenya, but it has been necessary to report
its limitation where nutrition is more nearly optimum. This is elaborated in Tea in
E. Africa Volume 13, Number 1, 1972.
Neither of these chemical approaches can predict quantitatively crop trends which
might result from adjustment of a fertilizer program. Nor can they be used, with
anything more than the crudest approximation, to relate nutrient removal from the
field by a crop, with nutrient replacement by fertilizers. The complexity of the
interaction between a plant and the soil defies simple laboratory at explanation.
A number of years ago, a scheme was introduced into one tea-growing country
whereby a fertilizer-nutrient mixture, and also its rate of use, were to some extent
related to the cropping level of the tea. The reasons for this need not be discussed,
except to say that there was a necessity to find a starting point to guide the growers
in their use of fertilizer. This rule-of-thumb guide proved to be of considerable
value, in circumstances where most or all of the tea was at a low point in the
yield/nutrient response curve. Many modifications were introduced, and various
of these have been put into practice in Kenya. As the scientific basis of the original
ideas was of the flimsiest, it is not proposed to go into detail. As long as an
estimate of yield, whether obtained or predicted, is used as the basis for
calculating a fertilizer program, no very great precision in fertilizer efficiency will
be achieved, unless by chance.
A scientifically designed fertilizer experiment should not only fix fertilizer rates
and examine the crop response which results but should try to study the effects of
various nutrients and their interaction on crop response. This is complex and
expensive. Attempts are therefore being made in this chapter to simply this idea,
in a form which can be used by the grower without the expense.

(b) Fertilizers
(i) Definition
The definition of the term “fertilizer” can not be precise, but is generally applied to
a nutrient-carrying material of mineral-like appearance, as opposed to materials
which obviously appear to be plant or animal residues. A fertilizer may be a
chemical compound synthesised in a factory, or mineral mined and used either raw,
or after mechanical treatment, or an organic material which has undergone intensive
alteration during a manufacturing treatment.
Whatever the origin, the purpose of fertilizer use is to carry nutrients to a crop.
Soil amendments are materials which are used to alter the physical or chemical
properties of the soil, without necessarily containing nutrients, but they may
combine a fertilizer function (ii) c).

(ii) Description of fertilizers

The terminology and method of expressing nutrient contents present an often
confusing picture, some terms being carried over unchanged from the earliest years
of the fertilizer industry. Attempts are being made to rationalise the terminology,
and it is important that the consumer should be aware of the possible alternative
descriptions. It is conventional to define the nutrient in terms of percentage (of the
dry fertilizer) of a hypothetical compound of that nutrient element. This is purely
for convenience, and itself does not imply that the nutrient is actually present in that
form. The following example will illustrate what this can mean.
Nitrogenous fertilizers are invariably quoted on the basis of the “% N” content.
Nitrogen is usually present as the ammonium or the nitrate form, in those fertilizers
which we are considering for tea, the symbols for the two forms of nitrogen being
“NH4+” and “NO3-” respectively.
Phosphorus in fertilizer is, however, still expressed as “P205”. A change to the use
of the element, “P”, has been advocated and our reference table (Table V:I ) lists
percentages under both “P205” and “P”.

TABLE V: I Reference table of the commoner straight fertilizers and soil

amendments used in tea: the quoted nutrient contents are approximate

% of nutrient
Name and abbreviation N P205 P K20 K S Ca Mg
Sulphate of ammonia: S/A 21 24
Ammonium 26 12
sul/nitrate:ASN
Urea 46
Diammonium phosphate: 18 46 20
DAP
Single super: SSP 20 9 10-12 20
Triple super:TSP 40-46 18-20 0-2 14
Rock phosphate 25-30 11-13 20-30
Muriate of Potash 50-60 42-50
Sulphate of potash:Sul/K 48-52 40-44 15-17
om salts 13 10
Kieserite 23 17
Gypsum 19 23
Sulphur 99
Aluminium sulphate 14
NPKS 25:5:5:5 25 5 2.2 5 4.2 5
NPKS 22:6:12:5 22 6 2.6 12 10 5
NPK 20:10:10 20 10 4.3 10 8.3

N= nitrogen S= sulphur
P= phosphorus Ca= calcium
K= potassium Mg= magnesium
 The phosphatic fertilizers listed (see pages 109-110) in fact contain the chemical
conditions known, correctly, as “phosphate”. This term is unfortunately applied
indiscriminately in agricultural circles wherever P or P205 should be used. The
examples set out in Section n show the need for case in using the correct term.
The phosphate compounds themselves can occur in several forms, differing
among other things in their solubility. Fertilizers in current use in tea in Kenya
contain all or almost all of their phosphorus in a water-soluble form. Single
superphosphate has a small proportion of its phosphorus in a form which is only
soluble in dilute acids: the standard laboratory analytical technique for evaluating
this fraction gives to the term citric acid-soluble. Other phosphatic fertilizers may
require stronger acids to release the phosphorus, and although they do decompose
in the soil, they may be described as containing insoluble phosphate.
Potassium is again expressed as its oxide, “K20”, or “potash”, and a change has
been advocated to the use of “K” or “potassium” in fertilizer descriptions. Two
columns are given in Table V:I to cover both descriptions.
Other fertilizer nutrients have tended to follow simpler methods of description,
but it is still necessary to take care over the evaluation of sulphur in straight
fertilizers or in mixtures. If it is present as the element, it is insoluble in water, but
if as the sulphate, it may be readily soluble in water for some fertilizers, or only
slowly soluble in others. Sulphur contents are usually expressed as “% S”, and Sub-
section (iii), B and C pages 108-111 lists the forms in various fertilizers.

(iii) Fertilizers and soil amendments which may be recommended for soil
application to tea
Modern technology has permitted fertilizers to be produced in highly purified,
concentrated forms, and to be stabilised in firm pellets or granules. It is still
possible that less pure or convenient forms may come on to the market, and the
consumer should be warned what this might imply. Distributing fertilizer evenly
in mature tea is far from easy, and the handling properties of fertilizers are
important. These aspects are discussed further in the following sub-sections.

A. Compound fertilizers
This is a group description, denoting intimate mixtures of nutrient-carrying
chemicals, manufactured in such a way that the components cannot be separated
by crude, mechanical means. They are to be sharply distinguished for this reason,
from physical mixtures (Sub-section iv page 112). In their physiological action,
there is little if any reason to suppose that they need differ from a physical mix of
the same forms of nutrients, if this is in fact to be made.
A wide range of nutrient formulae can be prepared, and compound fertilizers are
now usually manufactured in hard granules, which remain dry and separate under
good storage conditions, and permit efficient distribution.
The range of NPK formulae already familiar to the Kenyan tea industry, and of
which 25:5:5 is one, contains nitrogen in two forms, ammonium and nitrate, often
in the ratio 2:1. Phosphorus is present as water-soluble phosphate. Sulphur, if
present, is usually in the sulphate, soluble form. It is not known that the forms of
these nutrients have any influence on their value for tea. Potassium, as in all the
potassic fertilizers dealt fertilizers dealt with in this chapter, is water soluble.
Usually, calcium is present at low levels of about 2%.
Compound fertilizers which contain ammonium form of nitrogen acidify the soil.

B. Straight fertilizers
These are chemical compounds which are made and sold as individual fertilizers.
Each may contain more than one nutrient, but his does not arise because of
deliberate mixing during manufacture, and the ratio of nutrients in the purified
fertilizer is only able to vary very little, or not at all. They can be formulated as
powders, crystals, pellets or granules.

1. Sulphate of ammonia (or ammonium sulphate)

This contains two nutrients; nitrogen 21% N, and sulphur, 24% S. All the nitrogen
is in the ammonium form and the sulphur is present as sulphate. The fertilizer is
usually sold as dry, free flowing, small white crystals. Some powder formulations
can contain free sulphuric acid and are damp. Flakes and pellets of various colours
can also be offered. Their handling and storage properties vary from one
formulation to another, and they may carry less nitrogen than the quoted 21% N.
These variations do not necessarily mean a grade is unsuitable, but full
consideration should be given to the possibility of disadvantages. The dry crystals
are compatible with other fertilizers in this list, except that granular fertilizers in
general are difficult to mix with any material other than powders. Sulphate and
handling well in the field. It acidifies the soil strongly.

2 Ammonium sulphate nitrate

This is a chemical compound, not a mixture, and contains two nutrients; nitrogen
at 26% N, and sulphur at 12% S. The ratio of ammonium - N to nitrate - N is
approximately 3:1, and the acidifying action is therefore slightly less than for
sulphate of ammonia. The sulphur is present as sulphate. The older formulations
were often in a soft crystalline form, which absorbed moisture from the air
(hygroscopic) and became sticky. More stable granular formulations are marketed,
and are the only reasonable forms for use in tea.

3. Urea
A compound of nitrogen, carbon and oxygen, containing 42 - 46% N. This form of
nitrogen decomposes under the action of a soil-borne bacteria, and is converted to
ammonium bicarbonate. A volatile ammonia gas can be generated from this
compound, and if it is formed while urea is still on the soil surface, there is a risk
of a serious loss of ammonia gas to the atmosphere. For this reason, the Foundation
advises care in the choice of weather conditions at the time of application.
Urea is now formulated as small, hard pellets which gradually absorb moisture
from the atmosphere. If storage conditions are damp and the sacks are damaged,
or if the urea pellets (or prills) are mixed with other fertilizers, the urea may
become very sticky indeed. If growers wish to use it, only the prilled form should
be used. Older formulations, as crystals or soft granules, absorb water very
rapidly. It acidifies the soil to a lesser degree than other ammonium fertilizers.
In the case of a grower wanting to substitute the recommended compound
fertilizers as a source of nitrogen with urea, the following conditions should be
observed:-
i. Rates higher than 150 kg N/ha should not be applied.
 ii. Application should be done during periods of adequate rainfall.
iii. If urea as a source of N has to be used continuously, the supplementary
P and K should also be applied so that they do not become limiting on yield. In such
a case, single superphosphate and sulphate of potash would be preferred so as to
supply sulphur. Use of both of triple superphosphate and sulphate of potash or
single superphosphate and muriate of potash would serve the same purpose.

4. Diammonium phosphate
Contains two nutrients; nitrogen at 18% nitrogen and phosphorus at 46%. All the
nitrogen is in the ammonium form and the phosphate is water soluble. This
compound dissolves readily and acidifies the soil quite strongly. It is usually
formulated as hard granules, the older crystalline form being hygroscopic and
releasing ammonia gas in the store. A useful source of nitrogen and phosphorus.

5. Single superphosphate
This is manufactured from phosphate rock and sulphuric acid, and is an intimate
mixture of calcium phosphates and calcium sulphate (gypsum). Contains three
nutrients; phosphorus at 18% P2O5, sulphur at 10% S and calcium at 20% Ca. The
composition varies according to the choice of materials and technology. A small
proportion of the phosphate is citric-soluble, the remainder being water-soluble.
The manufacturer usually states these proportions. Part of the calcium is readily
water-soluble, but part is combined with sulphate in the slowly soluble gypsum. If
single superphosphate is dissolved in water, the sediment consists almost entirely
of the gypsum component. The older, powdered, formulation was liable to cake in
the store and did not mix well with certain fertilizers. At present, a hard granular
formulation is on the market.

6. Concentrated superphosphate
This covers a group of products. variously called "double" or "triple
superphosphate". Phosphate rock is treated with phosphoric acid, to give water-
soluble products, of varying composition; phosphorus at 40 to 50% P2O5, calcium
at approximately 14% Ca, and little or no sulphur. They are formulated as hard
granules, which should be used in preference to powdered forms, and should be
bought on the basis of phosphorus content.

7. Phosphate rock
Deposits of various types of phosphatic minerals exist in East Africa, and although
they have not yet been used in the raw state in our tea, their potential use should be
mentioned. The composition varies widely, phosphorus, up to 30% P2O5 and
calcium being the two main nutrients. They are insoluble in water, but when finely
crushed, they dissolve slowly in the soil, especially where the pH is low and
temperature and rainfall are high. Conditions in our tea soils are favourable to a
reasonable rate of release of phosphate. Powdered phosphate rock does not scorch
foliage, bark, or roots if it comes into contact with them. Most of the other fertilizers
in this list do so, to a greater or lesser extent. Do not confuse with guano, of various
types, which is an animal product of very variable composition.

8. Muriate of potash (or potassium chloride)

This is mined from brine deposits and is purified to remove other salts, which are
not usually deleterious. The potassium content ranges from 50 to 60% K2O. (Note:
although chloride is an essential element, it is required in minute quantities and is
so plentiful in agriculture that its presence in fertilizers is not taken into account in
their evaluation). Muriate of potash is readily soluble, and is formulated as a fairly
dry, coarse powder. Impurities may cause it to be moist, and difficult to handle.
Normally, it will mix well with other fertilizers. It should be bought on the basis of
the potassium content and if a low-grade (less than 50% K2O) product is offered,
the Foundation should be contacted for advice.

9. Sulphate of potash (or potassium sulphate)

Of similar origin to the muriate, this salt contains two nutrients; potassium at 48 to
52% K2O, and sulphur at 15 to 17% S. Both nutrients are water-soluble. In
appearance and properties this compound is similar to muriate, except for the
possible value of the sulphur, and also in its lesser tendency to scorch plant tissues.

10. Epsom's salts, Kieserite and magnesium oxide

Magnesium is not yet used as a general fertilizer nutrient in Kenyan tea, but it
should be included in the present list. Both these compounds are magnesium
sulphate. Epsom's salts is fully hydrated, and if heated strongly, it loses water to
give the partially hydrated kieserite. Epsom salts crystals can lose some water in a
dry atmosphere, to give a white powdery coating on the crystals. This is of no
practical consequence and the fertilizer stores and handles well, remaining dry and
free-flowing. Kieserite can absorb water in the store, and may cake badly. Epsom
salts contains 10% magnesium (Mg) and kieserite 17% Mg. The sulphur contents
are 13 and 23% S, respectively. Magnesium oxide is also available as a fertilizer
with the advantage that it has a high content of magnesium (36%Mg or 60%MgO).
On the basis of nutrient, it is cheaper than the sulphates.
The value of epsom salts for foliar application is discussed on page 114.

11. Gypsum (or calcium sulphate)

The calcium content is 23% Ca, and the sulphur content 19% S. Gypsum is only
slowly soluble in water, cannot scorch tissues, and may be a useful source of
sulphur under certain circumstances. It should be bought in a powdered form.

C. Soil amendments
1. Sulphur (More details are given in Section k page 139).
The element itself is a yellow powder, or lumps, and can be used in tea growing as
a soil amendment, to increase the acidity of too alkaline soils. Although it has an
obvious fertilizer value, other compounds are usually preferable where sulphur is
simply required as a nutrient. Elemental sulphur is decomposed in the soil by micro-
organisms, releasing sulphuric acid. This is a slow process, and roots can be
damaged if they come into contact with high concentrations of decomposing
sulphur. For other precautions which have to be taken when dealing with sulphur,
see Sub-section (iv), below.
2. Aluminium sulphate (Not to be confused with alum) (see Section k for more
details
This compound is primarily used for acidifying soil, and its sulphur content, 14%
S, may be incidental value as a nutrient.
The sulphur is water-soluble, and aluminium sulphate, even in high
concentration, does not damage tea roots. The usual formulation is as lumps
(described as "kibbled") which are very hard and difficult to crush. Unless they are
reduced to small crumbs, or finer, the lumps may take months to dissolve in the
soil.

3. Brimstone90 is a new amendment material for lowering high soil pH which is

under test. It contains 90% sulphur and its main advantage compare to sulphur is
ease of handling. It is also said to have high swelling properties when it comes into
contact with moisture (about 32 times its volume) at the same time releasing active
sulphur.

D. General notes
The above list contains fertilizers and soil amendments which are already familiar
to the tea industry. New compounds and modifications of existing fertilizers are
being developed and may come on to the market from time to time. Some may
have names similar to a familiar fertilizer, but the properties may differ. This can
be a confusing field, and reference should be made to the Foundation for
guidance.
One omission from the list calls for explanation. Calcium ammonium nitrate is
not recommended for use in tea. This is a mixture ammonium nitrate and calcium
carbonate, and when the granules are moistened a chemical reaction can take
place between the two components, ammonia being volatilised. A serious loss of
nitrogen could be envisaged in this way, if the fertilizer is allowed to lie on the
soil surface until sufficient rain washes the ammonium nitrate into the soil.
For some crops, it is known that the form in which a nutrient occurs in a fertilizer,
its association with certain other fertilizer components has a marked effect on the
efficiency of utilisation of that nutrient. In this context, considerations of solubility
in the soil, and risk of scorching tissues, are taken into account in framing the
fertilizer recommendations for tea in nurseries and in the first year in the field.
Otherwise, few stipulations are made concerning the form in which nutrients are
applied, as long as fertilizers from the above list are selected.
It is again stated that calcium ammonium nitrate is not approved as fertilizer for
tea in Kenya.

(iv) Mixing and storing fertilizers

In the current situation where compound fertilizers are available at varying
formulations and competitive prices, it is not envisaged that farmers would like to
make their own mixtures. In addition, there is a commercial company (MEA Ltd),
which specialises in the bulk blending of fertilizer and can produce any
"formulation" desirable by the farmer. However, since the situation may change,
the information on mixing of the fertilizer will be given.
1. Mixing
Economic considerations may arise in the future, which encourage the grower to
mix straight fertilizers, rather than to use the convenient compound fertilizers. Or,
to alternate the use of a high-analysis compound which may be available at a
favourable price, with a straight fertilizer so that the final nutrient output conforms
to the planned programme. This point is dealt with in a later sub-section (page
133).
No practicable difference in crop response is likely to be associated with a change
from one type of nutrient formulation to the other, with two provisos. A few points
of guidance are given.
Two granular fertilizers, or one granular and one coarsely crystalline, may be
difficult to mix evenly. Inclusion of a powdered fertilizer may help to bind the
various sized particles. Commercial organisations which market fertilizer
mixtures on a large scale, may use non-fertilizer binding agents, as they are
concerned to prevent the components from separating out during transport to
consumer. The grower mixing his fertilizers on the spot does not have to go to
these lengths. Examples of the efficiency of mixing are:-
Good: muriate or sulphate of potash, with sulphate of ammonia crystals.
Moderate: granular superphosphate with either of the two potash fertilizers.
Sulphate of ammonia crystals could also be added to the mix..
Poor: Crystalline sulphate of ammonia with granular superphosphate.
A mixture which may appear to be dry and free flowing, immediately after
mixing, may not be suitable for use in mature tea, where it will run a risk of being
wetted. Ammonium sulphate nitrate and urea, for example, are best to mixed with
other fertilizers. If applied alone, the bags being opened in the field, they can
usually be spread before they become sticky.
Home-made mixtures should be spread in the tea as soon as possible, to avoid the
risk of caking or absorbing too much in the store. In general, granular fertilizers
should to be crushed to make them easier to mix with other fertilizers. Their
handling properties might deteriorate, to the point of giving a mixture which
readily became sticky in the field.
Warning: if lump sulphur is to be crushed, for any purpose, no metal equipment or
implements should be used. A small spark can ignite sulphur dust, which burns
violently. Wood or concrete rollers should be used on a concrete or very hard floor.

2. Storage
It is wisest to assume that all plastic bags are damaged, and to keep the store dry.
Jute or paper bags are more liable to absorb moisture, and special care should be
taken to stack them on battens or stones, leaving space for air to circulate round,
and especially below, each stack.
None of the fertilizers listed are dangerous, with the exception of the fire risk of
sulphur. This applies only to sulphur itself. Fertilizers containing elemental
sulphur intimately mixed, are perfectly safe. Some grades of ammonium sulphate
and diammonium phosphate, are liable to evolve very small quantities of
ammonia gas. The small may be objectionable in a small, unventilated store, but
no danger is attached.
These notes on mixing and storage apply only to the fertilizers listed above.
Growers may buy fertilizers for other crops which may not be compatible with
some fertilizers in our list, for example, liming materials, which are not
recommended for tea. If in doubt about mixing, contact the Foundation or other
specialists. Also, consider the practicability of applying different fertilizers at
different times, avoiding the necessity for mixing. This point is dealt with in Sub-
section i (iv).

(c) Foliar application of nutrients

Leaves and young bark can absorb nutrients from solutions, suspensions or dusts
of nutrient-containing chemicals which are applied to their surface. Depending on
the particular nutrient, it can be transported elsewhere in the plant with greater or
lesser efficiency. Tissue surfaces are physically and chemically active, and react
with a variety of applied chemicals. Theoretically, a crop could be supplied with
sufficient mineral nutrients through its foliage, to maintain its full development.
In practice, the expense of applying sufficient solution of suspension to the
foliage, restrict the agricultural use of this technique to the tackling of special
nutritional problems.
Tea has been found to absorb a number of nutrients efficiently, when solutions or
suspensions (in water) are applied as droplets to the upper surface of the leaf.
During spraying, droplets will also lodge on the green bark of the youngest
branches, and rain will wash some of the chemical deposits into the leaf axils.
These notes apply only to the use of nutrient sprays, applied in relatively low
volume to give a cover of small droplets without reaching the stage of run-off.
Wetting agents and stickers are not essential for nutrient sprays applied to tea, and
even in seasons of heavy rainfall the agricultural effectiveness of foliar sprays can
still be worthwhile. Field tea can be sprayed during intensive sunshine, with not
increase in the risk of scorching from concentrated solutions. Indeed, dull and
humid conditions have sometimes increased scorching by certain solutions.
Further guidance on this aspect is given below.
Where a rapid cure of a nutrient deficiency is required, especially for nutrients
which are needed in low concentration in the tissues, foliar nutrition can be a
useful technique. Where a nutrient deficiency arises because soil conditions do
not permit efficient up take by the roots, foliar nutrition may become the best or
only means of restoring balanced nutrition. The cure of zinc deficiency in tea, for
example, has so far not been practicable through soil application of zinc
compounds, but foliar spraying offers a rapid and efficient means of control. A
similar finding has been made for copper deficiency in tea in Malawi.
Spraying solutions or suspensions of zinc compounds on to the foliage of tea, has
been shown to be a very effective and practicable agricultural control measure.
The Foundation's recommendations are based on the results of experiments where
hand-operated knapsack sprayers were used. Motorised-knapsack and aerial
spraying can give a similar type of spray distribution, and results may be expected
to be similar to those obtained from ordinary knapsack application. Dusting may
present other problems, especially if the dust falls on to dry leaf which is then
subjected to heavy rain within a few hours. The Foundation has no experience of
the efficiency of the dusting technique.
Choice of zinc compound for foliar application
Two commercial zinc fertilizers have been tested and, weight for weight of zinc,
have been found to be equally effective. Their properties in other respects differ,
and may influence the choice.

Zinc oxide: 70% zinc

The oxide is insoluble in water, and a finely powdered "Spraying-grade"
formulation must be used. Even so, spraying equipment with a built-in agitating
device would be an advantage, to keep the oxide in uniform suspension.
Zinc oxide does not scorch tea foliage, and it is only necessary to use enough
water to achieve a uniform distribution of the spray. This quantity has been found
in practice to vary according to the equipment used, but may range from 20 to 200
litres per hectare.

Zinc sulphate: 22 to 24% zinc

The form recommended is the heptahydrate. More concentrated, partially hydrated
forms are sometimes offered, but they can be difficult to dissolve under field
conditions.
The heptahydrate is usually formulated as small, free-flowing crystals, which
dissolve in water readily. The solution is sufficiently acidic to corrode metallic
parts of spraying equipment, which must be washed thoroughly after use to reduce
the rate of damage.
Tea is rather exceptional, in that up to a 5% concentration of zinc sulphate in
water can be sprayed on to foliage of all ages without scorching. Inefficient
mixing of the solution in the field is always a risk to be allowed for, and a solution
more dilute than 5% would be preferable. Even dilute solutions can scorch if
directed at foliage with too great a force from a motorised knapsack sprayer. The
underside of a tea leaf has been found to be more susceptible to zinc sulphate
scorching than the upper surface. The underside of the flush leaves, which do
receive some spray droplets, are hairy and the droplets (which do not contain
wetting agents) do not normally penetrate to the leaf surface itself.

(i) Recommended programmes for the routine application of zinc: Knapsack

equipment
1. Tea in plucking
Either
Zinc oxide
Method: light foliar spray
Rate: 3 kg per hectare in 20 to 200 litres of water
Timing: repeat at approximately six-month intervals (see (ii) below)
Or,
Zinc sulphate
Method: light foliar spray
Rate: 10 kg per hectare in no less than 200 litres of water
Timing: repeat at approximately six-month intervals (see (ii) below)
2. Young tea
If regular plucking has not yet been established, and if zinc-deficiency symptoms
are considered to warrant treatment, the above spray solutions and programmes
can be adopted. In such a case there will be considerable wastage of the spray and,
because a young plant has a small total leaf-surface area, an attempt should be
made to cover each leaf with droplets (see (ii) 5). Do not spray so much solution
that it runs off each leaf. It is not possible to state quantities which will be required
per hectare, because of the various sizes of bushes according to age. The ratio of
zinc sulphate to water must follow that given above (i) 1.

(ii) A guide to be timing of zinc foliar sprays

1. It has been established that, if zinc-deficiency symptoms can be recognised in an
area of seedling tea, there is a strong likelihood of an increase in yield if zinc is
sprayed. This applies even though few affected shoots are detectable, and provides
a valuable safeguard against the risk of incurring a major loss of crop before the
cause becomes apparent to the grower.

2. For all practical purposes, the effect of one zinc application can be said to extend
for less than six months. This pattern may permit a selection of spraying dates, to
avoid increasing crops unduly during peak-cropping periods.
Experiments have shown that repetition of the zinc sprays, as set out in the
programmes in (i) 1, causes similar yield trends. If the initial spray was made to
tea suffering severely from zinc deficiency, it would be expected that the resulting
increase in yield would be larger than those resulting from subsequent sprays.
Apart from this, no evidence has yet been seen to suggest any progressive
diminution in response.

3 Absorption of the zinc compounds, whether from the soluble sulphate or the
insoluble oxide, into the leaf tissue is presumed to be influenced by the
physiological activity of the leaf. Spraying should be done when the bushes are
in a reasonably active state of growth. Leaf damaged by drought would not be
expected to absorb nutrients efficiently. Bushes which were moderately damaged
by hail have been shown to respond to zinc sprays, but if the damage has resulted
in loss of whole leaves it would be preferable to wait for new foliage to develop.
In some districts of Kenya, a programme of two zinc sprays within one year one
year will only be feasible if the phrase "at approximately six-month intervals" is
given a very flexible interpretation. Seasonal considerations, for scientific as well
as for agricultural reasons, must guide the actual dates of spraying.

4. Experimental evidence has shown that yield response can vary considerably in
the few months after spraying. During cooler, lower-cropping periods, greater
proportional benefits from the zinc have been recorded. This finding may not be of
universal application, but there is at least preliminary evidence to support the idea
that a zinc spray does not simply increase crops during rush periods.

5. Distribution of the spray should aim to give an even cover of small droplets on
the leaves in the plucking table. Absorption through the upper surface of the leaf,
and presumably through the green bark of the youngest shoots also, is clearly quite
efficient. The volumes of water quoted would not allow for spray liquid to run off
the foliage.
Young tea, which presents a rather different problem, has been dealt with in (i) 2.

6. Spray residues may be more resistant to the action of rain if they have dried on
the leaf surface before rain falls. Although experiments have suggested that this is
not a problem of major importance, it would be prudent to avoid spraying during
seasons of predictably heavy rain.

7. Where the overall spray programme permits, spraying should be done just after
an area is plucked. Again, this is not a major problem, as discussed further in Sub-
section (iii).

8. The first spraying in a pruning cycle should be timed to fall during a reasonable
season, as discussed in (ii) 3, towards the end of the first quarter of the cycle.
Observation of the occurrence of symptoms suggests that it would rarely be
worthwhile to spray any sooner after tipping than this.
The characteristic pattern of yield response (ii) 2 suggests that spraying within
about three months before pruning might not have time to produce a worthwhile
yield increase.

9. The rates of use of zinc have been based on experimental data, but they replace
far more zinc than is taken off in the crop. The question of a possible accumulation
of zinc, to undesirable levels, has been and is continually under consideration. To-
date, no evidence has come to light which suggests that a problem yet exists.

(iii) Considerations of zinc effects on human health and on manufacturing

properties
1. Zinc is not a toxic element, unless ingested in large quantity, but both zinc oxide
and zinc sulphate are freely available in pharmaceutical preparations for external
application to humans. It would be difficult to envisage a risk of toxicity to spray
operators, even if they were grossly careless in handling the compounds.
To-date, little concern has been shown by official organisations over the zinc
content of tea. Analyses have shown that residues on the flush plucked in the first
round after spraying, do not add too greatly to the normal zinc content of the leaf.
Thereafter, zinc contents of the flush have been found to show no appreciable
relation to zinc spray treatments. The possibility of long-term accumulation of
zinc will be studied as experiments continue.

2. No evidence is yet known to suggest that either manufacturing technology or

tasters' valuation have been influenced by zinc spraying.

(iv) Combined sprays

It is natural to consider the practicability of adding other compounds to the zinc
sprays, but care has to be exercised. A few guides are listed, to illustrate the nature
of the problems.

1. Copper additives
Copper spraying has already been practised for several years, in a limited number
of districts in Kenya where poor fermentation has been observed.
Copper sulphate may be added to a zinc sulphate solution, but not to the zinc
oxide suspension, provided that the concentration of copper sulphate remains
below 0.5%.
The Foundation has not experience of the value of copper-zinc mixtures as related
to the cure of copper deficiency, but the cure of zinc deficiency appears to be
efficient. Before using any mixture, growers should contact the Foundation for
advice on experimental use, and it would be prudent to write to the manufacturers
of the products, explaining precisely what is intended.

2. Fertilizer additives
By this term is meant compounds containing plant nutrients other than zinc or
copper.
The zinc oxide suspension is readily destroyed when other chemicals are
present, and in general it would not be advisable to consider mixing.
Zinc sulphate can react with the water-soluble phosphates in certain fertilizers,
and the sediment may cause trouble in the equipment. Urea and either muriate or
sulphate of potash may be mixed with zinc sulphate.
The use of sprays of other nutrients, has been restricted largely to visual
observation of the cure of nutrient deficiency symptoms. At present, there appears
to be little reason to consider this technique of applying those nutrients, to tea in
Kenya. However, interest is sometimes expressed and suggestions for
experimental use of nutrient sprays are given.
Urea, 46% N, is useful source of nitrogen. The risk of scorching foliage is very
variable, for reasons which are not known, but a 2% solution (2kg urea in 100
litres of water) should be treated as a normally safe maximum concentration.
For other nutrients, suitable fertilizers and normally safe concentrations are:
Diammonium phosphate 1%, primarily for its phosphorus content; sulphate of
potash at 2% (muriate may be used, but the risk of scorch is greater); 10% epsom
salts for both magnesium and sulphur.
If maximum output of nutrient per unit area is required, the volume of spray
should not exceed that which just begins to cause the droplets to run together and
drip off the leaf. This condition might well result in less nutrient-containing
solution remaining on the leaf, than if the droplets had remained separate. Hand
or motor-operated sprayers may be used. A spray delivered with considerable
force from a motor sprayer is more liable to scorch the foliage. If the spray is
properly directed, so that the mist from a motor sparer drifts across mature tea it
may be found that more concentrated solutions than those listed can be used with
less risk of scorch.
A motor sprayer would be wasteful for young tea, before a plucking table has
been established. Foliar spraying might be considered as a means of applying
small, but worthwhile, doses of nutrients to very young plants (Section h). In order
to make full use of the limited leaf-surface area, a spray of fine droplets should
be directed at all the leaves; again, run-off should be avoided as far as possible.
Proprietary nutrient mixtures, solid or solutions, are on the market, and may
contain chemicals other than the simple fertilizers listed above. None have been
intensively tested by the Foundation, and there is no immediate intention of doing
so. Their effectiveness may be similar to corresponding mixtures of fertilizers.
However, some contain special chemicals, which may enhance effectiveness
under certain conditions, or which may require careful attention to detail if
damage is to be avoided. The manufacturers' instructions should be followed.
The Foundation's recommendation to water fertilizer solutions on to nursery
plants (Section f), does not constitute foliar nutrition. The solution is thoroughly
washed off the foliage, before it has dried, because the risk of scorching small
plants is to be avoided. Nutrients can be added to irrigation water, and, in
overhead systems, some nutrients will be absorbed through the foliage. Most of
the added nutrient will, of course, fall on the soil. This would be important if zinc
or copper were the nutrients concerned, as it would mean that considerable
wastage occurred.
Addition of nutrients to foliar sprays of insecticide or fungicide, infrequent
operations in tea in Kenya, is at first sight a possibility. This should not be done,
unless approval has been given by the manufacturer of the insecticide or
fungicide, or by the Foundation. Some of the formulations are very sensitive to
the presence of strong chemicals such as fertilizers, and their effectiveness may
be destroyed.
For growers wishing to experiment, the Foundation will offer detailed advice.
In general, growers should take precautions to filter solutions of fertilizers which
are packed in jute bags, before filling the sprayers. Fibres are very effective at
blocking the nozzles. Equipment must be washed thoroughly, immediately after
use, as some of the chemicals likely to be used have a corrosive action on metals.

(d) Organic manures, composts and mulches

(i) Definitions
It is necessary to include a section on organic sources of plant nutrients, using the
word "organic" in a restricted, agricultural, sense to denote materials which retain
obvious signs of their plant or animal origin. Organic materials which have under-
gone manufacture, may not fit this definition.

Manure
Traditionally, the term "manure" has been applied to animal, rather than plant,
residues, or mixture of both, but it is usually now used to describe a broad group of
organic residues, with a sufficient content of plant nutrients to be worth using for
that purpose alone.
Compost
This refers to mainly plant residues which have been specially treated before
applying to a crop. The treatment is basically storage, in such a way as to cause
decomposition. The process of decomposition leads to a rise in temperature of the
organic mass. This is done to kill weed seeds or vegetative propagules, pests and
disease organisms. Animal residues, soil, or fertilizers may be added, to hasten the
biological decomposition.

Mulch
This describes materials, inorganic as well as organic, which are allowed to lie on
the soil surface. Manures and composts can be used as mulches. A growing plant
itself is not described as mulch.
(ii) Nutrient availability
Organic materials which are or can be applied to crops, vary enormously in their
nutrient content, but are never as concentrated as the commonly used fertilizers.
Materials differ greatly from each other and the treatment applied to each batch
before application can also have effect. Exposure to rain can easily remove much
of the nitrogen and potassium, and organic wastes from manufacturing processes
may have only a small nutrient content. Even if a chemical analysis could be done,
on each batch of material just before carrying to the field, this might still give an
incomplete picture of nutrient efficiency. Nitrogenous compounds, for example,
vary in their rate of decomposition in the field, and some which are estimated in the
laboratory analytical technique, may be virtually unavailable to crops. Chemical
analysis, if done, should be taken as a guide to the maximum supply of those
nutrients, if ideal conditions prevailed for their release to crops.
Organic nitrogen compounds decompose at varying rates, and under certain field
conditions this may be advantageous, compared to the rapid release of nitrogen
from fertilizers. Organic compounds themselves can exert marked effects on soil
conditions, which may in turn improve the availability of the nutrients to a crop.
In poor soils, these benefits may be considerable. They can rarely be predicted,
and there is no simple way of assessing a potential "fertility improvement"
properly of an organic material, to guide the grower as to its worth. Testing the
product in the field is the only reliable guide.

(iii) Nutrient losses

Some organic materials, when used as a mulch, may decompose to form gaseous
nitrogen compounds which are permanently lost from the field. This process is
less likely to occur when the material is buried in the soil.
Organic materials which decompose rapidly or which are very low in certain
nutrients, may cause a temporary loss of those nutrients from the soil. Nitrogen
and to a lesser extent phosphorus, are the nutrients which are most affected, being
required by the microbes, which bring about the decomposition, for their own
tissues. When the process has reached its final stages, nutrients which have been
locked-up by the increase in the microbial population, can again be released to
the soil as the excess microbes themselves decompose. In the meanwhile, the crop
may have suffered severe nutritional set-back. The Foundation warned against
these risks, and the point is discussed further in Section h. Addition of nitrogenous
fertilizer may avoid the worst risk, of inducing nitrogen deficiency in the crop.
Tea prunings, left in the field as a mulch, do not cause these problems. Soft green
plant material in general should not be applied soon after cutting, unless fertilizer
nitrogen is also added. Sawdust and some factory wastes may be so low in
nutrients that their use as organic manure becomes of doubtful value, even if
inorganic fertilizer nutrients are added.

(iv) Toxic effects

Organic materials are not necessarily "safe". This warning is all the more needed,
because a variety of products can be offered to the grower, as "manure". Apart
from the danger referred to in (iii) above, there are other risks.
Residues from factories or farms may have alkaline or high pH value. Such
materials are best avoided in young tea, and must certainly not be put into planting
holes. Ash from burning organic matter is invariably of a high pH. The pH value
of a material can be determined readily and promptly, and is an analysis worth
doing where doubt exists. The Foundation will carry out pH determinations.
Manufacturing processes may add toxic materials to the wastes, and growers
should insist on an analysis and an assurance from the manufacturer that a product
is a safe in this respect.
Fresh animal droppings and urine can contain high levels of chlorides and
ammonium compounds, which could damage young tea.

(v) The effect of organic materials on soil conditions

This aspect, which may be the most important benefit conferred by organic
materials in general, will be mentioned briefly.

Mulch
A much can modify soil temperature and moisture status, usually with benefit to
the crop. A very thick mulch in the drier seasons however, may absorb light rains,
to the detriment of the crop. Some mulches carry a fire risk, which should be check
by the provision of gaps.
Placing organic materials in the planting hole is risk. Only well rotted composts
or matured animal manures should be used, and care must be taken to mix the
material with soil in the bottom of the hole, packing it firmly before the tea is
planted. Organic matter, used as a mulch, or incorporated into the soil, usually
improves the structure, in the sense that the soil forms aggregate which improve
aeration and moisture retention together. The humus content of the soil, the highly
degraded organic matter which is in intimate association with the mineral skeleton
of the soil, is not necessarily increased. The opposite may occur, when organic
materials are worked into the soil. The stimulation given to soil microbes can lead
to a loss of the original soil humus, as well as the added organic matter. Mulching
is often preferable to digging in organic materials, for the purpose of increasing
soil humus.

(vi) The incidence of pests, diseases and weed infestation

Mulches can often be used as effective suppressor of weed growth, but many
types of organic material, whether used as a mulch or buried in the soil, can
introduce weeds. Pests or disease organisms may also be introduced, or conditions
in a much may be favourable to the build-up of organisms already present in the
field. Compost must be properly prepared at high temperature, to reduce such
risks.

(vii) General
The Foundation does not recommend that a fertilizer programme should be
influenced by the use of organic materials, in any of the above ways. The
nutritional properties of each type of material, and of each batch within a given
type, vary so greatly that general advice cannot be given. Qualified approval is
given to the use of organic materials for their physical effects, subject to provisos
as set out above, and the Foundation will advise as best as it can, if detailed queries
are sent in.

SPECIFIC FERTILIZER RECOMMENDATIONS FOR VARIOUS TYPES OF

TEA
(e) Fertilizers for mother bushes
Mother bushes are tea bushes which are used as regular sources of supply of
cuttings. They are usually pruned at intervals of five to seven months and, when
pruned, all the prunings are removed to the nursery to be made into cuttings.
Large amounts of nutrients are removed with these prunings; not only with the
softer parts which can be made into cuttings and which probably contain similar
amounts of nutrients to those removed by plucking, but especially with the hard
parts which will not be made into cuttings but which contain larger quantities of
nutrients than would be removed from plucked bushes.
Removal of nutrients from plots of mother bushes is consequently at a much
greater rate than from similar areas of plucked tea, and they should therefore be
given more fertilizer to keep them in a state of vigorous shoot production. Mother
bush health not only affects the numbers of cuttings produced by the bushes,
however, and it is known that bushes which are weak because of lack of nutrients
(or because of pests, diseases, hail, drought, cold and the like) produce cuttings
which strike less easily and which grow more slowly in their nursery than those
from bushes which produce vigorous shoot growth after pruning.
Optimum amounts and kinds of fertilizer to be applied to mother bushes will vary
from place and from clone. As a rule of thumb, it is recommended that mother
bushes should be given twice as much fertilizer, of the same kind, per annum as
would be applied to plucked bushes of the same age (see Mature Tea, Section i).
The fertilizers should be applied in at least two doses each year. If they are pruned
every five to seven months, then the applications can be made two or three months
after each pruning. But the time of application is not as important as ensuring that
the fertilizer is applied, and when small numbers of bushes are being pruned each
day it can be helpful to apply fertilizer to each bush immediately it is pruned. Also
if there are chances of forgetting to apply fertilizer or if it is anticipated that two
or three months after pruning there will not be rain, then the fertilizer should be
applied immediately after pruning.
If practicable, any branch and shoot material left over after the cuttings have been
prepared should be taken back to the mother bushes and placed on the soil surface
as a mulch.

(f) Fertilizers for nurseries

(i) Seedling nurseries
Placement
Seedlings have not responded to fertilizers which have been mixed with the nursery
soil in experiments, and therefore fertilizer placement in seedling nurseries is not
recommended.
If the nursery soil has a pH greater than 6.0, advice should be sought from the
TRFK.
In areas where soils are known from past experience to be deficient in sulphur,
sulphate of ammonia should be applied to the seedlings as described below.
Applications after germination
In areas where the soil is known from past experience to be deficient in sulphur, the
seedlings should have fertilizer applied every four months starting as soon as the
seedlings are 15cm tall. Every second application should be with sulphate of
ammonia at the rate of 16g/m2 ; the alternate applications should be with an NPK
compound fertilizer (or mixture of straight fertilizers) with nutrient ratios 5:1:1, or
more concentrated in P and K, and either with or without additional sulphur. This
fertilizer should be applied at a rate to provide about 4g/m2 of nitrogen (e.g. 16g/m2
of 25:5:5 NPK, or 20g/m2 of 20:10:10 NPK) on each occasion. An alternative is to
apply diammonium phosphate at the rate of 7g/m2.
In other areas, apply an NPKS fertilizer of a 5:1:1 ratio, or more concentrated in
P and K, every four months starting as soon as the seedlings are 15cm tall. Each
application should supply about 4g/m2 of nitrogen. If the NPK fertilizer does not
contain sulphur, every second application should be with sulphate of ammonia only,
at the rate of 16g/m2.
While the seedlings are short, the fertilizers can be applied in solution from
watering cans at the rate of 1.3 litres/m2, followed immediately by an application
of water to wash the fertilizer from the foliage. Later it will be found more
convenient to sprinkle the dry fertilizer over the surface of the soil, care being taken
to spread the fertilizer evenly and to keep it off the seedlings, stems and leaves as
far as possible.

N.B. Most supplies of NPKS are completely soluble in water. Sulphate of

ammonia is also in water. Diammonium phosphate usually contains an inert-filler
which will block sprayer jets if the solution is not decanted or kept well stirred.
Diammonium phosphate contains no sulphur and therefore where it is used,
sulphate of ammonia should be applied in its place every third round to avoid the
problem of sulphur deficiency.

(ii) Cutting nurseries

General
Percentage strike and rate of growth of cuttings not only vary from clone to clone,
but the performance of any one clone in the nursery is dependent upon the physical
and chemical properties of the rooting medium, upon the amount and kind of
fertilizer mixed with the rooting, medium, upon the combination of rooting medium
and fertilizer, and also upon such factors as the density of shade in the nursery, the
kind of cutting planted, the state of health of the mother bush, the time of year of
propagation, and upon several other factors.
Only very general recommendations can therefore be given, and the optimum
rooting medium and fertilizer treatment must be determined for each clone by
experiments in each nursery site.

Placement
Cuttings should be planted into a layer of subsoil, 7.5cm thick, which contains
single superphosphate mixed in at the rate of 600g/m3 or 300g/m3 of double/triple
superphosphate.
Beneath this subsoil "cap", the rooting medium can be made richer by mixing
in some topsoil and additional fertilizer. The optimum subsoil/topsoil mixture must
be determined by experiment in each nursery; and it is important to ensure that the
surface of this lower rooting medium is not so firmed and smoothed that there is a
sharp boundary between it and the subsoil cap. There should be a transitional layer
between the two.
The following fertilizers are suggested for mixing with this lower part for the
rooting medium:
Forest soils Single superphosphate (600g/m3)
Sulphate of potash (300g/m3)
Grassland soils Single superphosphate (600g/m3)
Sulphate of potash (300g/m3)
Sulphate of ammonia (300g/m3)
Exhausted soils Diammonium phosphate (600g/m3)
Sulphate of potash (300g/m3)

Applications after rooting

Fertilizers should not be applied until the cuttings have roots which are at least
10cm long. In practice, it is usually simplest to begin the applications as soon as a
start has been made to removing the polythene sheeting which covers the nursery
beds. The fertilizer should contain nitrogen, phosphate and potash.
These applications not only benefit the plants in the cutting nursery by improving
their rates of growth, but he nutrient reserves which build up both in the plants
and in the rooting medium are of great value to the plants for several months after
they are transplanted to the field.
A simple and effective treatment is to make weekly applications of NPKS
fertilizer in solution; 1g/m2 of nitrogen in 1.3 litres of water. An immediate
application of water should follow, to wash the fertilizer solution off the leaves of
the young plants.
In districts where soils are known from past experience to be deficient in sulphur,
every alternate application should be of sulphate of ammonia, also at 1g/m 2 of
nitrogen (i.e. 5g/m2 of sulphate of ammonia in 1.3 litres of water), which should
also be washed off with water afterwards. Sulphate of ammonia and NPKS
fertilizers are not foliar feeds and if they are left on the leaves to dry they might
cause scorching.
When the plants are to remain in their nursery for long periods (e.g. over 12
months), the frequency of application can be reduced. Apply NPKS solutions as
above for three months and then change to 4g/m2 of nitrogen in 1.3 litres of water
every month.
Proprietary foliar compounds can be applied if desired; they should not be washed
off the leaves. These compounds are expensive.

N.B .The applications recommended above should not normally be exceeded. In

many nurseries it will be unnecessary to make such frequent application, and
judgement on the part of the grower is needed.

(g) Fertilizer placement in planting holes

If tea plants have been properly maintained in their nursery then, at the time of
transplanting, they will contain reserves of N, P, K and S in their tissues and (in the
case of sleeved plants) in the soil round their roots. These reserves help the plants
to grow well after transplanting until the first field applications of fertilizer are
made.
Nevertheless, in most parts of Kenya the transplants will establish and grow more
quickly if superphosphate is mixed with the soil in the planting holes. Single
superphosphate is preferable to double superphosphate because it contains sulphur,
and should be mixed with the soil at rates which vary according to the size of the
holes, as follows:

Size of planting hole Amount of single,

(Dept x Width) (Superphosphate per hole
45cm x 22.5cm 30g
50cm x 25cm 40g
60cm x 30cm 54g

Fertilizers must be thoroughly mixed with soil from planting holes (see Figure V.
1) on all soils except very rich and hutsite soils (pH 5.7 and other) (see Table V.
4).
Soils which have previously carried grass or unfertilized arable crops require
nitrogen as well as phosphate, hence diammonium phosphate should be used
instead of single or double/triple superphosphate. Do not use NPKS 25:5:5:5 on
its own in the planting holes. The high nitrogen content can be harmful to young
plants. If it is the only nitrogenous fertilizer available, it may be used in small
amounts together with additional phosphate and potash in the quantities shown in
Table V: 2.
Areas known to be deficient in potassium need a potash fertilizer in addition to
the phosphate and inorganic nitrogen where tea follows grass.
In areas where the soils are known from past experience to be deficient in sulphur, gypsum
should be mixed with the soil in planting hole in addition to single superphosphate. The
application rate of the gypsum should be the same as for the single superphosphate. Other
sulphur-containing fertilizers (see Table V. 1) should not be used.

Fertilizer for infills

In order to ensure that infills become established quickly, nitrogen, phosphate and
potash fertilizers must be used in the planting hole in proportion to the size of the
hole. Thus for a hole 60cm diameter by 60cm deep, use 115g diammonium
phosphate and 115g sulphate of potash. Three months after planting NPKS 25:5:5
should be given to each plant to each at the rate of 50g per plant; and thereafter as
applied to the rest of the field.

(h) Fertilizers for young tea

i) General
Young tea is defined, for the purpose of this chapter, as being of any age from the
time of transplanting to the time of pruning at the end of its first cycle of about
three-years’ plucking. During this period of about five years, the plants not only
need fertilizer to supply nutrients to maintain their health, but extra fertilizer to
encourage their
 developing strong root and branch systems which will support vigorous cropping
at maturity. Young tea plants therefore require at least as much fertilizer, for their
size as when in full cropping.
The fertilizer should be a compound or mixture providing N, P, K and S in the
proportions 5:1:1:1, or more concentrated in P and K, as for mature tea. (Section
I).
Weeds and crops growing between the rows of tea plants will deprive the tea of
nutrients, and so lead to reduced rate of growth by the young tea plants. It is
therefore especially important in young tea that the soil be kept clear of weeds and
that other crop plants grown in the tea are provided with fertilizer additional to that
applied to tea.
Any convenient nitrogenous fertilizer should be applied broadcast to the soil
surface, so as to provide nitrogen at the rate of 12kg/ha, immediately before mulch
is first applied to a field. This is to compensate for the temporary loss of nitrogen
from the soil while the mulch breaks down.

TABLE V: 2: Rates of fertilizer application: The application listed under (a), (b)
etc. in each section are alternatives
Planting hole 20cm x 45cm Planting hole 30cm x 60cm
Forest soils with a Single superphosphate 30g a Single superphosphate 60g
pH below 5.7 b Double superphosphate 15g b Double superphosphate 30g
Grassland or a Diammonium phosphate 15g a Di-ammonium phosphate 30g
pH below 5.7 b Sulphate of ammonia 15g b Sulphate of ammonia 30g
Single superphosphate 30g. double superphosphate 30g
Soils in which potassium ia a Sulphate or muriate of potash 15g. a Sulphate or muriate of potash
deficient and all soils into di-ammonium phosphate 15g. 30g di-ammonium phosphate
which tea is being replanted 30g
b Sulphate or muriate of potash 15g. b Sulphate or muriate of potash
sulphate of ammonia 15g, single 30g, sulphate of ammonia 30g,
superphosphate 30g. single superphosphate 60g
c Sulphate or muriate of potash 15g, c Sulphate or muriate of potash
sulphate of ammonia 15g, double 30g
superphosphate 15g double superphosphate 30g
d NPK 25:5:5 12g, sulphate or d NPK 25:5:5 24g, sulphate or
muriate of potash 14g, single muriate of potash 28g, single
superphosphate 22g superphosphate 44g
e NPK 25:5:5 12g, sulphate or e NPK 25:5:5 24g, sulphate or
muriate of potash 14g, double muriate of potash 28g, double
superphosphate 11g superphosphate 22g
anicH Sterameal 60g Sterameal 120g
Organicfertilizer for all soilswith
pH below 5.7

Alternatively, farmyard manure or other available material may be used. The

amount to be used will depend on the analysis of the analysis of the material

Triple superphosphate can be used at the rates quoted for double superphosphate.
(ii) First-year tea
1. Stump plants
Transplanted seedlings and clonal stumps are leafless and have bare roots. They
cannot respond efficiently to fertilizers until they have developed new roots and
shoots. Fertilizers should not be applied to stump plants, therefore, until about six
months after transplanting.
The first application at about six months and subsequent ones at about eight-week
intervals should each provide 2g of nitrogen per plant. Applications should not be
made during periods of drought.
Thus there should be three or four applications in the second half of the first year,
to give a total of 8g nitrogen per plant. In some districts it might be necessary to
reduce the interval between successive applications to as little as four weeks; the
last application can be increased to 3g nitrogen per plant; but no further adjustment
should be made, even if some applications have to be omitted.
Spread the fertilizer round each plant in abroad ring, never less than 10cm wide.
The fertilizer must not be allowed to touch the plant's stem, and the ring should
therefore be extended from 5cm from the plant stem to just beyond the spread of the
shoots. The fertilizer should be dibbled into the soil to a depth of 5cm. If necessary,
move back any mulch so that the fertilizer can be applied, and replace it afterwards.

2. Sleeved plants
Sleeved seedlings and clonal plants have leaf shoots and active roots, and can
respond to fertilizers which are applied six weeks after transplanting. Delay beyond
this time is unnecessary and can reduce the growth potential of the plants, but the
growth of plants of this age be checked by applications of even as little as 12g of
NPK fertilizer.
The plants should therefore be given small but frequent applications. Each
application should provide 1.5g nitrogen per plant. The first application should be
six weeks after planting and subsequent ones at about eight-week intervals during
the remainder of the year, to give a total of about 9g nitrogen per plant. Applications
should not be made during periods of drought. In some district it will be necessary
to reduce the interval between successive applications to four weeks and to increase
the last application to 2g nitrogen per plant, but no further adjustment should be
made even if some applications have to be omitted.
The fertilizer should be dibbled into the soil in a broad ring round each plant, but
not touching the plant's stem, as described above for stump plants.
Some growers might find it more convenient to spray the foliage of these young
plants with proprietary foliar nutrient compounds. In addition, poorly established
plant might respond more rapidly to foliar applications than to ground applications
of the more usual fertilizers. The Foundation will be placed to offer advise to
growers who wish to test this technique.

(iii) Second-year tea

During the second 12-month period after transplanting, both stumps and sleeved
plants should be fertilized in the same way; both will benefit from having several
small applications rather than a single large application.
The total application during the year should supply about 120 kg/ha of nitrogen.
This can be given in three applications of 40 kg/ha of nitrogen or (in areas with two
wet seasons) in four applications of 30 kg/ha of nitrogen. It the plants are seen to be
growing very vigorously, this can be increased to four applications of 40 kg/ha of
nitrogen at about three-month intervals. Do not apply the fertilizer during periods of
drought, and do not have less than eight weeks between two successive applications.

(iv) Tea in its third, fourth and fifth years

In areas which have a single rainy season the fertilizer can be given in a single
application, preferably at the start of the rains (see Section i). In areas with two
distinct rainy seasons it is preferable to give two half-applications, one at the start
of each rain season. Fertilizer should not be supplied during periods of very heavy
rainfall, as some of the nutrients will be lost by surface run-off.
The fertilizer should be broadcast over the soil surface, avoiding the area
immediately around the plant's stems, and should provide a total of about 180 kg/ha
of nitrogen in the third year after planting and about 230 kg/ha of nitrogen on the
fourth and fifth years.
If the plants are seen to be growing very vigorously, the applications can be
increased according to the observed vigour of the tea, as indicated in Table V.3.
Larger applications than those given in the table can be made if the tea plants are
seen to be growing very vigorously. Lager applications can also be made if the plants
are growing in soils which have become impoverished because of erosion, lack of
fertilizer in earlier years, cropping with other species before the tea was planted,
grazing, or a long history of being under uncultivated grass. In both these situations,
the amounts in the table can be increased by about 25 per cent in the second and
subsequent years.

TABLE V.3: Amounts of nitrogen to apply each year to young tea

Seedlings Clonal plants
Year from planting 1 wet season 2 wet seasons 1 wet season 2 wet seasons
1st (stumped) 4 x 2g/plant 4 x 2g/plant 4 x 2g/plant 4 x 2g/plant
(Sleeved) 6 x 1.5g/plant 6 x 1.5g/plant 6 x 1.5g/plant 6 x 1.5g/plant
2nd (all plants) 3 x 40 kg/ha 4 x 30 kg/ha 4 x 40 kg/ha 4 x 40 kg/ha
3rd (all plants) 1 x 180 kg/ha 2 x 90 kg/ha 1 x 200 kg/ha 2 x 100 kg/ha
th
4 (all plants) 1 x 230 kg/ha 2 x 115 kg/ha 1 x 250 kg/ha 2 x 125 kg/ha
th
5 (all plants) 1 x 230 kg/ha 2 x 115 kg/ha 1 x 300 kg/ha 2 x 150 kg/ha

(i) Fertilizers for mature tea

(i) Type of fertilizer
There is much to be said for the adoption of a standard nutrient formula, as long as
it is realised that this is done for convenience. No one formula could be the most
efficient for all types of tea culture, under our range of soils and climates. Following
the initial use of nitrogen and sulphur in our tea, in 1963 the Foundation
recommended the consideration of phosphorus, followed within a years by the
addition of potassium to the list of desirable fertilizer nutrients. Eventually, this led
to the adoption of a single-formula compound fertilizer, 25:5:5:5 referring to the
percentage of N, P2O5, K2O and S respectively. This formula is now considered to
be rather low in potassium for some areas as, depending on the rate of use of
fertilizer, less potassium may be replaced than is removed. Under present economic
conditions, it has been decided to accept this possibility, and to rely on the chemical
analysis of leaf to follow changes in the potassium status of the bush. The use of
supplementary fertilizers is an accepted part of our general fertilizer advice.
The Foundation continues to recommend the use of a fertilizer formula
approximating to 25:5:5:5, as the basis of a mature-tea fertilizer programme.
This formula may be achieved,
(1) by the use of a compound fertilizer
(2) by mixtures of straight fertilizers
(3) by alternating compounds with straight fertilizers. This may be done either
within an annual programme, or in certain cases on a cycle basis (see iv). As an
example, the compound fertilizer 20:10:10 may be used to supply half the nitrogen
requirement, with sulphate of ammonia to supply the balance.
It is emphasized that economic considerations should be taken into account when
making such decisions.

(ii) Rate of use of fertilizer

For higher-yielding tea, growers are invited to test the yield/fertilizer relation under
their own ecological and cultural regimes, and the new "Paired-Plot Technique" is
fully explained in Section m. This would mean in practice, that fertilizer
applications averaging above 200 kg N per hectare per annum should be also tested.
Experiments of a more formal nature have shown clearly that the relation between
crop obtained and level of fertilizer nutrient applied, cannot be written down in a
form that has general advisory applicability. A rule-of-thumb recommendation that
served its purpose in earlier years, by relating the quantity of fertilizer advised to
anticipated yield, is no longer adequate to meet the more exacting needs of the
present.
Advice for lower-yielding tea (not immature, developing bushes) can be based
to some extent on our experience of he response shown over the years by what is
now high-yielding tea. If little or no regular fertilizer application has been made,
level of 90, 150 and 200 kg/ha of N per annum are suggested for the first three
years respectively. The full yield benefit may not be seen within the first few years
of increasing fertilizer doses. Provided the cultural management allows adequate
frame and foliage to develop, and aims to lessen or prevent root damage, the bush
should eventually build up a capacity to convert increased fertilizer nutrients into
increased crop. Once poor tea has shown an improvement, the paired-plot
technique can be considered, in the fourth or late years of such a rehabilitation
programme, to determine if it is economic to exceed the annual dose of 150 kg N.

(iii) Time of application of fertilizers

Insufficient experimental evidence has accumulated to support firm advice on this
point, but the following suggestions can be given. Tea under severe nutritional
stress should receive a curative fertilizer application as soon as practicable. One
provision is that, if nitrogen is the nutrient which is deficient, fertilizer application
should wait until the grower can be sure that rain will follow within a few days.
Phosphatic and potassic fertilizers run little, if any, risk of loss by chemical or
biological means if they remain on the soil surface in dry weather.
 Normal fertilizer applications should avoid prolonged cold or wet seasons, and if
they are made during dry weather they should be delayed until it appears that rain
will fall within a few days.
The first application in a pruning cycle should be the time of tipping, whether the
normal fertilizer or a supplementary fertilizer to remedy mild deficiency is
concerned. It is assumed that all prunings will be left in the field and decomposing
pruning-leaf and soft twig will return nutrients to the soil, making it unnecessary to
add to this before tipping. It is also noted that there is risk of the nitrogenous
fertilizer components reacting with a fresh mulch, possibly resulting in lowered
efficiency of this nutrient. The more highly weathered mulch at tipping time could
be considered to be safer in this respect.
The timing of the last application in a cycle would depend on the anticipated
cropping pattern in the last few months. An interval of less than six months before
pruning may be too short for full benefit of the fertilizer to be shown.
Severe nutrient deficiency can retard recovery from pruning. More than one
nutrient is known to have this effect. If the cause is detected in time, it would be
preferable to make a fertilizer application before pruning, rather than after. The time
interval before pruning should be several months, and if the vigour of the bush is
very poor, pruning could well be delayed until there is evidence of improved
growth.
Once a bush is in reasonably balance nutrition, there is no evidence to show that
heavy application of a fertilizer nutrient can improve recovery from pruning.
It is realised that practical considerations may overrule some of these suggestions.
The first consideration should always be given to planning a fertilizer programme
that allows efficient and even distribution of the fertilizer.

(iv) Split applications

No evidence is available to support a recommendation to split an annual fertilizer
allocation for mature tea. Purely practical considerations may, however, make this
an attractive proposition. Such experimental evidence as does exist, suggests that
the overall effect crop would be small if any.
A programme based on a high-analysis compound fertilizer plus a straight
fertilizer could conveniently be planned so that the fertilizers were allocated to
different seasons. If so, it is advised that the multi-nutrient fertilizer be applied
before the main cropping season. Also if it can be conveniently arranged, the same
fertilizer should be allocated to the last application a cycle.
Splitting the annual fertilizer programme may be adopted in order to lessen the
risk of increasing already excessive crop in certain seasons. If this is done, the
overall efficiency of the fertilizer may be reduced, in terms of quality of crop
produced.

(v) Relations between fertilizer uptake and cultural treatments

Cultivation, the practice of deep hoeing, to control weeds, also destroys a large
proportion of the finer roots of the tea. In itself, and quite apart from any possible
relation to nutrient uptake from the soil, this is considered to be harmful to the bush.
Undoubtedly nutrient uptake is hindered, but it not possible to say that one nutrient
is affected more than another is. Formerly, it was conjectured that phosphorus
uptake was great reduced. In fact, the results of the Foundation’s field experiments
show a greater yield response to phosphatic fertilizer before mechanical weed-
control ceased, than was recorded after. Vigorous disturbance of the top-soil may
be expected to increase the leaching of nitrogen and potassium to lower layers, thus
leaving an impoverished top-soil into which the new roots have to grow.
The Foundation's fertilizer recommendations apply equally to tea growing in
disturbed or undisturbed soil.
Mulch: It is well established, for other crops, that mulch (Section d) can influence
the nutritional status of the crop plant. Reports showed that more than one nutrient
could be affected. Evidence on this point, for tea in Kenya, is beginning to accrue,
and the results show clearly that it is not possible to associate just one nutrient with
the beneficial effects of mulch, which have been recorded in certain experiments.
This is a highly complex line of study, and until the position is clarified, our general
fertilizer recommendations are uninfluenced by considerations of mulch effects,
with two provisos. The possible harmful effect of mulch in young tea, and in mature
yea soon after pruning, is dealt with in Sections h and i.
Recovery from hail damage. In some districts this problem has to be considered,
as a possible factor affecting a fertilizer programme. Experiments in fields, which
have been severely damaged, have now shown that recovery appeared to be as good
in tea in poor nutrition, with respect to various nutrients, as in tea that had received
heavy applications of nutrients.
The Foundation no longer recommends a special application of NPK fertilizer to
follow immediately after severe hail damage, with an assumed purpose of assisting
bush regrowth.
There would also seem to be no basic reason to postpone an already planned
fertilizer application, if this were found to fall due within a few weeks after a
hailstorm. Only if the severity of damage was such that twigs had been destroyed,
would it be prudent to delay the fertilizer until appreciable bud-break had appeared.
Relation to drought effects. Experiments have shown that fertilizer can help to
maintain a higher level of cropping into a drought, until the soil water reserves are
exhausted. Fertilizer nitrogen is beneficial in this respect, but no recommendation
is made to supplement the normal fertilizer programme because the anticipated
additional return of crop would be low.
Similar remarks apply to the recovery of bushes damaged by drought.
Relation to shade. A certain amount of experimental evidence has been obtained
in Kenya, to suggest the potential yield response to fertilizer is reduced if the tea is
interplanted with shade trees.

(vi) Relations between fertilizer use and manufacturing properties

This will be covered under tea manufacturing section. (see page 212)

(vii) The role of nutrients other than NPKS

Apart from zinc and copper, which are dealt with in pages 115 and 118,
respectively, no other nutrients are at present considered to be necessary additives
to our general fertilizer programmes. A brief discussion of the part played by certain
nutrients would seem to be necessary, to put the contents of this present Chapter
into perspective.
1. Calcium. Confusion has often arisen over the part played by calcium in the
nutrition of tea. It is essential to the growth of all plants. Soils which are of too high
a pH, or too alkaline, for tea to grow properly usually do contain high levels of
calcium, but it is not necessarily only the calcium content which raises the pH, or
is solely responsible for the harmful effects on the tea.
Chemical analysis of leaf has shown, in more than one experiment, that the use
of high-calcium fertilizers has not depressed the uptake of other nutrients
appreciably. This is an important point, which has a bearing on our current
recommendations for the use of single superphosphate and gypsum, both
containing calcium, in large quantity for young tea (Sections f and g). Several years
ago, calcium ammonium nitrate was found to be of low efficiency for tea, under
certain conditions. The supposition then was that its calcium content had upset the
balance of mineral nutrition. This was never substantiated by chemical evidence,
and should be considered not proven. A more likely reason for the poor
performance of this fertilizer has been given in Section

2 Magnesium. Many species of woody perennial crops show magnesium

deficiency symptoms in their juvenile stage. If the symptoms (an easily recognised
yellow pattern working in from the leaf margins to near the mid-rib remain on the
lower leaves of young tea, there is reason to believe that overall growth is not
greatly affected.
If symptoms are seen high on free-growing shoots, or on mature leaves in the
plucking table, curative measures are probably worthwhile. For this purpose,
magnesium fertilizers must be used, and the Foundation will advise on request.
It is not likely that levels at which other fertilizer nutrients are used in tea, will
induce magnesium deficiency in reasonably fertile soils. In some other agricultural
systems high levels of potassic fertilizer have occasionally reduced magnesium
deficiency. For tea, the fact that the rate of use of potassium is, by general standards,
not high is no reason to suspect an interaction between potassium and magnesium
under our conditions.

3 Manganese. Although this is an essential nutrient for all crop plants, in very
low concentration, there are cases where its presence in larger concentration may
prove toxic. This has been found in many crops and has occasionally been
suspected in tea, where leaf contents of manganese can reach extremely high
levels. No proof of toxicity has been established, and it is known that tea of the
greatest vigour can apparently maintain this state while still absorbing manganese
in high quantity. This point is mentioned again in the next sub-section, on soil
acidity.

(viii) Soil acidity in relation to fertilizer use

It is known that much of our tea in Kenya is growing in soil of high acidity, and pH
values as low as 3.7 are not uncommon. According to the conventional way of
denoting acidity by the pH scale, the greater the acidity, the lower is the pH number.
All the nitrogenous fertilizer that we are likely to be able to use are acidifying in
their reactions within the soil. The soil itself exerts a buffering effect, and at high
acidities this serves to limit the level to which the pH value will fall. No evidence
has yet been found, to suggest that such high acidity can directly damage tea. This
problem and others dealt with in this section on secondary fertilizer nutrients, has
been studied in several tea-growing areas of the world, without any firm
conclusions being reached.
An important practical consideration is the cost of any soil-amendment treatment
which would be needed to reduce the acidity appreciably, even if the optimum pH
value of a field soil were known. This is not known, even approximately, and this
aspect of the problem is usually rejected in favour of another approach. Under
highly acid soil conditions, the loss of certain nutrients may be aggravated.
Potassium, calcium and magnesium may be washed out more readily, while
phosphorus may be fixed chemically, in forms of low availability to plant roots.
Manganese on the other hand, may come into solution in excessive amounts. If tea
culture has to cope with highly acid soils, general fertilizer programmes will have
to be based on the understanding that specific problems may still arise for several
nutrients. Intensive tea culture will be expected to accelerate the onset of individual
problems.
The mulch resulting from tea prunings, or from the natural leaf-fall, is mildly
acid, with a pH value in the range 5.5 to 6.5. It had formerly been supposed that
such a mulch would check, or even reverse, the fall in soil pH values. Detailed
investigation has shown that this is not so. Even the uppermost, very shallow, layers
of soil under a heavy tea-leaf mulch have very low pH values. Mulch composed of
other materials may not behave in the same way.
The Foundation's fertilizer recommendations are not adjusted to take account of
soil acidity. The special cases where the soil is not sufficiently acid for tea to grow
properly, are dealt with separately. Specific nutritional problems resulting from
high acid soils will be treated individually, and would only influence our general
advice if the extent of the problem warranted this.

(j) Fertilizers for seed bearers

To enable the best use to be made of fertilizers, the fertilizers should be applied to
the soil into which the roots of the seed bearers will grow, and not only to the soil
in which the roots are already established.
The area of application should form a circle round the seed bearer. The radius of
this circle should be increased annually until neighbouring circles meet whereupon
broadcast applications should be started.
Two types of fertilizer applications are suggested, one for potential seed bearers
and the other for fruiting seed bearers.

(i) Fertilizers to potential seed bearers

In the first year after planting, potential seed bearers will be fertilized according to
the kind of planting material used.
1. Seedling stumps
Start applying NPKS 25:5:5:5 fertilizer to the plants six months after planting (or
in the rainy season following the planting season). During the second half of the
first year after planting make three applications each of 6g of fertilizer per plant
(i.e. 1.5g of N per plant) in a broad ring round each plant, no nearer than 10cm from
the stem and extending to 30cm from the stem.
2. Sleeved clonal plants
In the areas with one long rainy season make six applications of NPKS 25:5:5:5
fertilizer to the plants during the first year after planting. Each application should
be 6g of fertilizer per plant as for seedling stumps. These applications should be
made at weeks 6, 14,22, 30, 38 and 46 after planting. In areas with bi-modal pattern
of rainfall (two rainy seasons a year) the applications should be made three times,
at monthly intervals from six weeks after planting, during the wet season.
The fertilizer is applied in a broad ring round each plant; no nearer than 10cm
from the stem extending to 30cm from the stem.
In the second year after planting, fertilizer at the rate of 30g of NPKS 25:5:5:5
per plant is applied four times to each plant. It is suggested that in areas with one
long rainy season the four applications should be in June, September, December
and March. In areas with two rainy seasons it is suggested that there should be two
applications in March-May and two in September-November, but the period
between two applications should not be less than six weeks. Fertilizer is applied in
a broad ring round each plant; no nearer than 10cm from the stem and extending to
40cm from the stem.
In the third and subsequent years, two applications are made per year (one in
April and one in October), each of 180kg of N/ha. These applications should at first
be made separately to each tree in an annular area bounded by two circles round the
tree. The area of this annulus will increase as the plants grow larger; it will be
related to "r" (the mean radius of trees, from the stem to the edge of the shoot
system, as determined from a fair sample of the trees in the barie). The inner
boundary of the annulus will be a distance of r/3 from the stem (inside this circle o
fertilizer will be applied); and the outer boundary will be a distance 4r/3 from the
stem. Hence the area of annulus will be 5.236 (r2).
The amount of nitrogen to be applied within the annulus is found from the
equation A = 90 (r2 where A is in grams and r is in metres.) For example, the amount
of NPKS 25:5:5:5 fertilizer will be 360 (r2) grams per plant on each of the two
occasions each year.

The mean tree foliage radius must be determined before each of the periods of
application.
These data are summarised below:
Distance (in metres) from trees stem
Edge of foliage Inner edge of Outer edge of Amounts (grams) per tree on each
annulus annulus occasion

"r" 25:5:5:5 N
r/3 4r/3
0.50 0.17 0.67 180 45
0.67 0.22 0.90 240 60
0.75 0.25 1.00 270 68
1.00 0.33 1.33 360 90
1.25 0.42 1.67 450 112
1.50 0.50 2.00 540 135
1.75 0.58 2.33 630 158
2.00 0.67 2.67 720 180
 When the outer edges of neighbouring annuli meet, the fertilizer should be spread
broadcast over the whole barie (excluding an area extending to 50cm from the trunk
of each tree) at the rate of 180kg of N/ha twice a year, in April and October.

3. Grafted seed bearers

The spread of the roots of grafted mature plants is related to the spacing of the plants
before grafting. Therefore the fertilizer application to the grafted seed bearer the
first two years after grafting should be related to the spacing of the plants before
grafting rather than the size of the scions. The rate fertilizer in the first two years
after grafting should be the same as that of third year of sleeved clonal plants, i.e.
180kg/ha of N, applied twice a year. This fertilizer should be applied in an annular
area bounded by two circles round the tree. The inner ring should not be nearer than
10cm from the stem and the outer ring should stretch to half-way between the
grafted plant and the bigger distance between the neighbouring plants before
removal, that is if the spacing of plants before grafting was 1.2m x 0.91m, then the
outer ring from the stem should be 0.6m. Where the spacing was 1.5m x 0.75m,
then the distance between the stem of the grafted plant and the outer ring should be
0.75m.
After the second year the area of the annular ring will be related "r" as shown
above.
Once the trees begin to bear fruits, the fertilizer rates should be changed
accordingly, as shown below.

(ii) Fertilizer to fruiting seed bearers

Fruiting seed bearers will need less N, but more P and K, than trees that are not yet
producing fruits. They should be fertilized twice, in April and October. On each
occasion they should be given the following:
N : 125kg/ha in the form of NPKS (or NPK) fertilizer
P2O5 : 60kg/ha in the form of NPKS (or NPK) and single, double or triple
superphosphates.
K2O : 60kg/ha in the form of NPKS (or NPK) and sulphate or muriate of
potash.
An alternative is to apply NPK 20:10:10 fertilizer, based on the same of N as
given above.
These fertilizers should be applied in the same way as described above for seed
bearers before fruiting. These nutrient applications can be summarised thus:
 Distance (in metres) from the Amounts (grams) of nutrients per tree on each
stem occasion
Edge of foliage (r) r/3 4r/3 N P2O5 K2O
1.00 0.33 1.33 60 30 30
1.25 0.42 1.67 100 45 45
1.50 0.50 2.00 140 70 70
1.75 0.58 2.33 190 90 90
2.00 0.67 2.67 250 120 120
2.25 0.75 3.00 320 150 150
2.50 0.83 3.33 390 190 190
2.75 0.92 3.67 470 225 225
Formulae for application rates per tree (62.5r2)g (30r2)g (30r2)g
Broadcasts rates 12.5g/m2 6g/m2 6g/m2

The above amounts of nutrients must be multiplied by the appropriate factors to

convert them to amounts of fertilizer. Thus:

25:5:5:5 NPKS multiply N amount by 4.0

20:10:10 NPK multiply N amount by 5.0
Single superphosphate multiply P2O5 amount by 2.5

Double (triple) superphosphate multiply P2O5 amount by 2.5

Sulphate of potash multiply K2O amount by 2.0
Muriate of potash multiply K20 amount by 1.7

(k) Treatment of hutsites and soils of pH higher than optimum

(i) Tea establishment
Tea thrives best in soils of pH between 5.0 and 5.6. Tea is difficult to establish in
soils of higher pH. Many clones have been found to grown poorly in soils of high
pH. Soil pH can be reduced in a number of ways, if it is necessary to do so, as
follows:

1. Leaching
Soil kept clear of vegetation and exposed to high rainfall will lose nutrients over a
period of time and the pH will fall, but this may take several years if the soil is of
very high pH and contains an abundance of bases. To keep land absolutely clear of
vegetation is expensive, and the soil is likely to be severely eroded.

2. Cropping
If plants with a high base nutrient requirement are grown, the amount of base
nutrients in the soil is reduced. This has been done on hutsites using Cannas, Napier
Grass or Guatemala Grass. In these special circumstances a food crop, even maize,
can be used; the best tea areas on some rich volcanic soils (e.g. Mount Elgon, where
the pH is normally about 6.0) are those which have been used for maize for many
years. Less rich soils can be exhausted by extensive cropping and require fertilizer
before they will grow good tea. Soil tests will establish the soil status.
This method is relatively slow; several years may be necessary. It also requires
careful management as every piece of vegetable growth must be removed from the
site. Any leaves etc. which fall on the site and rot down merely return to the soil
nutrients which were removed by the plant prolong the process. Judicious use of
sulphate of ammonia may hasten the process by promoting growth.

3. Sulphur
Sulphur acidifies soil relatively quickly and experiments have shown that it
improves the rate of growth of tea bushes very considerably.
Sulphur is not soluble in water, so it must be broken up and distributed evenly
over a depth of soil. Sulphur is easily crushed to a sufficient fineness by spreading
the commercial lumpy material on a hard floor and rolling a heavy concrete culvert
section or similar object over it. Do not try to grind sulphur in any type of
mechanical mill - it will catch fire!
For field planting, dig holes 46cm in diameter by 76cm deep at the site of each
bush. A tractor-operated post-hole digger can easily do this where a tractor can
be put on the land. The crushed sulphur must be thoroughly mixed with the soil
from the holes before the soil is returned to the holes. The quantity of sulphur
required depends on the pH, as follows:

pH Sulphur per hole

5.9 to 6.4 115g
6.5 to 6.9 225g
7.0 to 7.4 340g
>7.5 not worthy treating

Sulphur takes time to reduce the pH of the soil, and this must be allowed for when
planting. Stumps planted before the sulphur has reduced the pH sufficiently will
die. The length of time to be allowed between sulphur application and planting
depends on the amount of sulphur; allow at least months for each 115g of sulphur
used. Sleeved plants can be planted sooner after sulphur application in some soils,
but only if experience shows that this is safe in any particular soil.
The soil replaced in the holes will take time to settle down. If there is sufficient
interval between application and planting the soil will have settled. However,
sleeved plants are planted very shortly after application, maintain the soil level
around the plants so that the plants are not growing in depressions after the soil has
settled. Also inspect regularly to ensure that the soil has not settled and left the roots
exposed.

4. Sulphate of ammonia
This chemical acidifies soil quickly. However, experiments have shown that if it is
mixed with soil before planting it reduces the rate of growth of tea, both stumps and
potted plants, and has been known to kill plants. Therefore, do not attempt to
improve hutsites by treatment with sulphate of ammonia prior to planting.

5. Aluminium sulphate
This chemical will acidify soil without adverse effects on tea. It is very soluble in
water, and easily available as it is used for varying water supplies. 450g of
aluminium sulphate has the same effect as 115g of sulphur.
(ii) Treatment of tea established on hutsites
Where tea is growing but not thriving on hutsites, the best treatment is to apply
aluminium sulphate: 450g per square metre placed on the ground every three
months for a year is usually adequate. The chemical should be spread as evenly
as possible. The commercial material is usually in the form of large, very hard
lumps and breaking these is difficult, but they dissolve quickly in soil moisture.
The lumps will have to be spread as evenly as possible. It is sometime possible to
buy the "kibbled" grade of aluminium sulphate; this is preferable as it has been
broken down to small pieces.
Sulphur should not be applied as a surface dressing to sites already planted with
tea.
Sulphate of ammonia is beneficial because it acidifies the soil in addition to
providing nitrogen. However, very large quantities are needed to reduce the pH of
hutsite soils quickly. It is quicker and cheaper to use aluminium sulphate to reduced
the pH and use sulphate of ammonia purely as a nitrogen source.
In most cases where tea has been established using sulphur or aluminium sulphate
as described above no problems arise later. The reduction of pH due to leaching
usually ensures that the tea roots are able to continue growing outside the treated
soil of each planting hole. A further safeguard is to apply nitrogen as sulphate of
ammonia.
Occasionally the tea roots will into grow into untreated soil, and as a result growth
is slowed down and plants may die when they have been in the grown for about a
year. This usually happens where the pH initially has been very high. When the
initial pH is over 7.0, the pH of the untreated soil between planting holes should be
measured 6 months after planting. If it is over 6.5, the whole area should be treated
with aluminium sulphate, 450g per square metre, with applications at three-monthly
intervals until tests show that the pH is below 6.0.

(iii) Nurseries on high pH soils

The nursery should be established in an area with suitable soil pH, hence it is
necessary to have soil pH tests of the various areas on the farm until a suitable
area is identified. Where it is necessary to reduce the pH of the soil of a nursery
where the plants are already growing, aluminium sulphate can be watered on.
Apply at the rate of 30g per square metre at monthly intervals.
If soil of high pH is to be used for a stump nursery, sulphur must be dug in the
soil over the full depth of 75cm. The amount of sulphur depends on the pH; the
quantity required and the time which must elapse before planting are listed in Table
V: 4. The minimum quantity is just adequate for seed nurseries but results will be
better if more sulphur (up to the maximum) is used.
For vegetative propagation, the soil must be mixed with the maximum quantity
of sulphur given in Table V.4 and left for at least the minimum time before cuttings
are planted. However, the best and easiest way is to transport to the nursery soil of
suitable pH from another part of the farm estate.
TABLE V: 4: Treatment of high pH soil for nursery use
Sulphur addition, grammes per cubic metre

Minimum Maximum

Minimum time between Minimum time between

treatment and planting treatment and planting
pH Sulphur (weeks) Sulphur (weeks)

5.0 - - - -
5.1 - - 60 1
5.2 - - 115 2
5.3 - - 170 3
5.4 - - 225 4
5.5 - - 285 5
5.6 - - 340 6
5.7 - - 395 7
5.8 - - 450 8
5.9 60 1 510 9
6.0 115 2 565 10
6.1 170 3 620 11
6.2 225 4 675 12
6.3 285 5 735 13
6.4 340 6 790 14
6.5 395 7 845 15
6.6 450 8 900 16
6.7 510 9 960 17
6.8 565 10 1,015 18
6.9 620 11 1,070 19
7.0 675 12 1,125 20

(l) Symptoms of nutrient deficiency and excess

(i) Abnormalities caused by incorrect availability of a single nutrient
When tea plants become grossly deficient in specific nutrients, their foliage and
stems may be altered in appearance. Some of the effects which nutrient
deficiencies produce are described below.
It is now known that the symptoms which are described appear only when the
plants become quite badly deficient; the tea plant can tolerate quite large
deviations from normal in its nutrient supply for long periods before the first
visible signs of deficiency begin to appear in the foliage.
When crops become deficient in essential nutrients without such deficiency being
recognizable from their external appearance, they are said to be suffering from
"hidden hunger".

Much mature tea in Kenya that was considered to be of normal appearance has
been found to have hidden hunger for one or more of the major nutrients, i.e.
nitrogen, phosphate and potassium.
Producers who identify the symptoms here described with the condition of their
own tea plants should appreciate that their tea will already have passed beyond
the early stage of hidden hunger and will now be suffering from a gross nutritional
disorder which requires immediate remedial action.
Producers whose tea appears normal will still benefit from recourse to the
Foundation's new nutrition advisory service (see Appendix V page 243) because
indications of hidden hunger for specific major nutrients are only revealed by
sequential foliar analysis. In all case where symptoms as described below have
been relieved by the treatments recommended in this Section, subsequent foliar
analysis will enable nutrient supplies to be fully corrected.
Many of the symptoms described are quite common in tea plants that are
recovering from a drought. As the feeding roots begin to grow again, they cannot
explore adequate amounts of soil to absorb all the nutrients needed by the plant.
It is only when they have branched considerably and the absorbing surfaces have
multiplied, that the symptoms fade as the roots absorb adequate nutrients.

Nitrogen deficiency
This first shows as a lighter than normal green colour in the young flush. The
youngest leaves become progressively lighter in colour until they may be quite
yellow.
The mature foliage may remain dark green if for any reason the rate of nitrogen
uptake by the feeding roots fall below the amounts required by the plants or
ceases, the lower mature leaves also become progressively lighter in colour (see
plate Nos. V: i & V: iv).
The axillary buds do not develop, and as a result fewer and fewer new shoots
appear. The crop declines quickly as more severe deficiency develops, until it
reaches a low level of some 400 to 600 kg made tea per hectare, at which level it
may remain indefinitely.
Gross nitrogen deficiency shows up more clearly on unshaded tea than on shaded
tea; at sub-normal levels of nitrogen content an unshaded one which contains the
same amount of nitrogen. Tea, which is grossly deficient in nitrogen, yields less
badly under shade trees than it does in the open, but tea receiving nitrogen yields
better in the open than it does under shade trees. Close examination of individual
bushes in deficient places will reveal this effect clearly; leaves lower in the
maintenance layer, which are receiving less light, are greener than those at the top
of the bush. Where one leaf lies across another and is touching it, the area of the
lower leaf covered by the upper leaf is noticeably greener than the exposed part.
Some bushes may always have extremely yellow or creamy-white upper leaves
no matter what fertilizers are applied. These bushes are genetically unsuited to
life in unshaded conditions and only under deep shade would their leaves become
green.
Sometimes, in whole areas of tea, the foliage of many of the bushes turns paler
for several weeks and then recovers its normal green colour. The cause of this
phenomenon is not known.
Nitrogen deficiency is to some extent seasonal, in that anything which checks the
growth of the feeding roots as they explore the surface layer of the soil will induce
a yellow appearance in the youngest leaves at the top of the bush. This is because
as soon as the growth of the roots is checked, the rate of nitrogen uptake falls. Thus,
for example, the foliage will turn yellow quite early in the dry weather, and will
become progressively more and more yellow as the surface layers of the soil dry
out and the feeding roots die back. Similarly, when the soil is cold, the rate of root
growth is very and the rate of nitrogen uptake falls, even though there may be
adequate nitrogen available for uptake in the soil.
 Another example occurs when the feeding roots become waterlogged; they die
back rapidly and, as no nitrogen is being absorbed, the leaves quickly turn yellow.

Remedy
1. If the yellow colour of the leaves can be ascribed to a temporary
reduction in the rate of nitrogen uptake by the roots such as a
drought or cold weather, no amendments to the normal fertilizer
programme are necessary.
2. If the yellow colour of the leaves is the result of inadequate
applications of nitrogen, apply 150 kg nitrogen per hectare as
sulphate of ammonia.

Phosphate deficiency
Symptoms show on mature leaves as an absence of gloss on the surface. Affected
leaves
appear dull and matt, by comparison with normal leaves, which are very shiny and
appear to have been polished. Note however, that this glossiness washes off in
heavy rain.
Symptoms also show on the frame of the bush as excessive die-back of young and
old woody stems. This effect is usually ascribed to "sun-scorch' (see Plate V : xi),
but is quit distinct from it; in gross phosphate deficiency the branches, particularly
the smallest ones, die back from the ends which have been cut when pruning.
All mature tea plants which have not got an undisturbed layer of mulch formed
by decomposing leaves and pruning on the surface of the soil in which they are
growing, have phosphate deficiency.
The effect of phosphate deficiency is to reduce the capacity of the plant to respond
phosphate uptake by the feeding roots in the surface layers of the soil and mulch
promotes a bigger response to applications of nitrogen.

Remedy
Broadcast an approved phosphatic fertilizer (see pages 109-110) over the surface
of the soil under the bushes at a rate of 60 kg P2O5 per hectare. This treatment is
ineffective unless a no-cultivation system of weed control is used and there is an
undisturbed mulch of pruning and leaf-fall on the soil.
Where tea is to be planted in an area where phosphate is known to be deficient,
incorporate phosphate in the planting-hole (see page 124).

Potassium deficiency
In some areas, the nutrient status of the soil is such that the plants suffer from
potassium deficiency from the day they are planted unless corrective measures are
taken. Such plants do not branch freely and then stems remain thin and weak; they
have difficulty in producing starch reserves and recovery from pruning can be
very slow; the spread of the frame is often restricted.
The plants must be handled very carefully and it is advisable to bring them into
bearing by pegging so that there is no loss of the starch reserves and nutrients that
they have accumulated with difficulty. After plants have been tipped in, the first
few rounds of plucking should be very light. (See Plates V: i, V: v, V: vi, V: vii,
V: viii, V: ix, V: x).
Plants that are suffering from potassium deficiency yet which are plucked hard
before they are ready will lose starch reserves, will develop weak frames and may
ultimately become completely moribund, neither growing nor dying.
The onset of severe potassium deficiency in mature tea is first indicated by
progressive defoliation of the maintenance layer. Large quantities of fallen mature
leaves are seen under the bushes. If the branches of an affected bush are shaken one
of two mature leaves usually fall off whilst still green and fresh. Leaves remaining
on the bushes are often severely affected by Brown Blight, Colletotrichum
coffeanum (Plate V: xvi).
As the condition develops, more and more of the mature leaves are lost until it is
possible to look down through the maintenance layer and see the soil surface
below the bush. At this stage the crop can fall to about 400 kg made tea per
hectare.
Meanwhile the new leaves become progressively smaller and smaller, and
eventually each shoot contains only six to ten small leaves with no leaves below
them. The bush becomes banjhi and remains so for most of the time, producing a
flush only once or twice a year. The crop falls to as low as 200 kg made tea per
hectare, after which the practice in the past has been to abandon the tea.

Remedy for mature tea

Immediate application of sulphate or muriate of potash should be made as soon as
the first signs of gross deficiency appear according to the scale in Table V.5.

TABLE V: 5: Potash fertilizer applications to cure deficiency symptoms

Symptom Kg sulphate or muriate of
potash per hectare
Growth ceases at the sides of the bushes 100
Side branches thin, bark white 150
Mature leaves defoliate. Irregular recovery from 200
prune
Young leaves progressively reduced in size 300
Normal plucking ceases 400*

*Carry out a cut-back prune before applying the fertilizer

The frame of the bush exhibits characteristic features, as follows:-
(a) The bark is silvery-white, not brown as it is in normal tea. The growth tends
to be stronger in the centre than at the edges of the plants. The practice of
"centering" bushes with pruning knives to try to induce more vigorous
growth at the sides of the bush is ineffective with plants that are receiving
inadequate potassium.
(b) Profuse branching of the shoots takes place and a dense mat of thin branches
forms just below the plucking table.
(c) Lateral shoots are slow in forming at the sides of the bushes that gradually
assume a cylindrical or columnar appearance, with straight sides, and the
bushes do not meet in the rows.
(d) Recovery from pruning is very irregular and slow.
Remedy for young tea
If NPK or NPKS fertilizer is applied to young tea as recommended by the TRFK
potassium deficiency may be corrected to some extent. However, if NPK fertilizer
is not applied during bringing tea into bearing and the potassium deficiency is
noticed on young tea, it is recommended that the deficiency be corrected by
applying K20 at the rate of 30 kg per hectare in the form of either muriate or
sulphate of potash.

Zinc deficiency
Zinc is one of the limited of elements that are essential to the growth of plants,
and deficiency of it can cause serious retardation of growth. The importance of
zinc in agriculture was recognised over forty years ago, and deficiency problems
have since been reported in many crops. It was not until 1960 that zinc deficiency
was recognised in tea. Since then, the deficiency has been confirmed in tea in
many parts of the world including Kenya.
The findings from controlled experiments and from commercial zinc applications
to tea plantations have to-date presented a rather uniform picture of agronomic
aspects of the problem. Recommendations set out in this section are based largely
on observations made in Kenya, supplemented by data from the original
investigations in Sri Lanka where appropriate. As and when further information
becomes available, changes may be made in our advice.

Symptoms
Method of diagnosis
Visual symptoms
Zinc deficiency in a number of tree and bush crops, has been shown to give rise
to highly characteristic patterns of malformation of young leaves and shoots. Tea
shows the same general development of these symptoms, which are not readily
confused with those caused by other nutritional imbalances, or by non-nutritional
factors. For many crops and for most nutrients, appearance of recognisable
symptoms may mean the nutritional disorder has reached an advanced stage, with
the implication that crop growth has been severely inhibited. In zinc deficient tea,
observation of the occurrence of symptoms, and of the pattern for response to zinc
treatment, has made the diagnosis by recognition of visual symptoms to be
regarded as a reliable method for agricultural purposes. It is feasible for he
agriculturist to recognise zinc-deficient shoots before the deficient has reached a
severe stage (See Plate V: xii and Figures V: 1, V: 2 & V: 3).

Chemical analysis
During the original investigations that led to the recognition of the zinc deficiency
syndrome, it was found that chemical analysis of leaf gave a results which were
conflicting or even misleading. The Foundation does not make use of leaf analysis
for zinc for diagnosing zinc deficiency.

The zinc deficiency syndrome

Under conditions of zinc deficiency in tea, there is a failure of the youngest tissues
to develop normally. This is shown as three main patterns of malformation which
are commonly seen at the tip of a dormant shoot. If such a shoot should recover
from the deficiency, without any agricultural application of zinc having been made,
foliage of normal size, shape, and positioning on the shoot, will develop above the
permanently damaged leaves. If an application of zinc stimulates deficient shoots
into making growth, those leaves already severely distorted will show little, if any,
improvement.

Little-leaf and rosetted shoot

These two malformations occur together. The leaves are very small, often less than
one-fifth of the normal length, and narrower in relation to their length than normal.
Several are crowded together at the tip of a shoot, and the usual spiral arrangement
round the stem may give way to a two-sided distribution. All the leaves arise from
the same stem, but the internodes are greatly shortened, to as little as one or two
millimetres in length (see Figure V: 1).
These leaves are usually pale in colour, and may also show the sickle
conformation (see Figure V: 2). This little-leaf symptom appears to be the
commonest of three groups, and one least likely to show a transition to normal
growth on that shoot. In a bush in plucking surrounding healthy shoots may
eventually overshadow and cover the retarded shoots, which retain their leaves
through the remainder of the pruning cycle.

Sickle-leaf
The uppermost one or two leaves on a dormant shoot, may show the characteristic
unequal development of the two halves of the leaf-blade, which gives rise to the
sickle-leaf' symptom. The length of the mid-rib may not be too greatly reduced but
the sickle distortion is usually observed on leaves that are markedly reduced in size,
and it can be combined with the little-leaf symptom (see above).
One half of the leaf-blade remains narrow, while the other half develops to a
greater extent, especially towards the base. The mid-rib is forced to curve, which
leads to some resemblance to the agricultural implement, the sickle. Note: the
curvature is sideways; not upwards (see Figure V: 2).
The leaf margins, particularly that on the less developed half of the leaf- blade,
may show a marked waviness (see below). If so, the overall configuration of the
leaf is one of smooth, even curves. It is important to appreciate this, as insect or
fungus damage can cause a leaf to develop unevenly. In such cases the point of
damage is usually readily detectable, and the resulting distortion is usually
irregular.
A chlorotic, greenish yellow, mottling may be present towards the leaf tip, and
between the smaller veins. This is usually only observed in warmer areas.
Similarly, the degree of curvature may be greater in warmer areas.

Wavy-edged and up-folded leaf

This group of symptoms may be associated with the less severely developed little-
leaves, and with sickle-leaf also.
The length of the mid-rib may only be little less than normal, although the leaf-
blade itself is narrow in relation to the length. Both halves of the blade fold upwards
along the axis of the mid-rib, until the margins almost meet. The margins are deeply
waved (see Figure V: 3).
Note: this distortion is basically a folding, and must not be confused with an upward
rolling of the leaf margins.
General features of the zinc-deficiency syndrome
All four symptoms can be observed on one bush, and it has not been possible to
correlate any one of them with severity of the deficiency. Climate, clone and jat
may exert some influence on the development of one symptom in preference to
others, but the effect is small.
A noteworthy feature is the absence of dead tissue, even in the most severely
stunted leaves of shoots. This serves as a useful distinction from other causes of
malformation.
The transition from healthy leaves to obviously zinc-deficiency leaves on a
shoot is quite sharp. Usually no more than one or two leaves show intermediate
development of symptoms. Similarly, restoration of normal zinc supply by natural
means, usually results in an equally sharp transition to healthy growth.

Remedy
See pages 114-118

Copper deficiency
Tea plants deficient in copper have slightly darker foliage than normal, but it is
most difficult to detect the symptoms in the field. A surer sign of copper
deficiency is the length of fermentation time; if the fermenting leaf takes longer
than normal to change colour, copper deficiency is to be suspected.
Severe copper deficiency may inhibit fermentation; leaf severely deficient in
copper does not develop a bright orange colour during fermentation and changes
colour very slowly thought dark green to dark brown.

Remedy
Foliar applications of copper sulphate, at the rate of 5 kg copper sulphate crystals
per hectare dissolved in 280 litres of water, have in some cases relieved symptoms
of copper deficiency. It takes about 12 days from the time of application for the
fermentation to improve. The full benefit lasts for about three months after which
another spraying round will be necessary. Copper sulphate applied in too strong a
solution burns the foliage.
Copper sulphate is of no benefit when applied to fermenting leaf in the factory; this
practice is valueless and results in tea with a copper content above the minimum
levels specified by international food and drug regulations.

Magnesium deficiency
Magnesium deficiency always shows first on the lower leaves which are bright
yellow with a conspicuous inverted dark green "V" down the midrib, sometimes
extending along individuals veins.(see plate V: xiii).
In most cases in Kenya, this symptom has appeared during extended periods of
dry weather where the symptom may also appear on the first mature leaves.
However, the symptom will disappear after the onset of rains. Occasionally plants
are seen, particularly in China tea, which are apparently chronically deficient in
magnesium; they exhibit the symptoms although other plants around them seem
normal. If the deficiency symptoms persist after the rains, remedial application
of magnesium as magnesium oxide at 50 kg MgO per hectare should be applied.
Occasional plants are seen, particularly in China tea, which are apparently
chronically deficient in magnesium; they exhibit the symptoms although other
plants around them seem normal

Manganese excess
When tea is grown in very acid soil, large amounts of manganese are frequently
found to be dissolved in the soil water, and the tea roots absorb these. The
manganese is deposited in the mature leaves of the maintenance layer and
accumulates in very large amounts.
Affected plants appear normal. Their mature leaves become brittle and when
crushed in the hands crack easily with a rustling noise. The surface of the leaves
may develop a cracked appearance.

Remedy
Allow a natural mulch to form at the soil surface. Apply animal manure during the
prune year soon after tipping, if available. The rate of application should be 1 to 5
tons/ha.

Calcium excess
The young shoots and leaves are affected. The stems become stunted, and the
leaves remain small, turn bright yellow and curl backwards. The edges and tips of
the leaves turn black. The leaves become distorted and cracked. Soon after this
the young stems begin to defoliate. The mature leaves of the maintenance layer
may present a normal appearance, but in severe cases the bush defoliates
completely and eventually dies. Some bushes may appear stunted in growth with
the bark covered by moss and in addition they may start flowering and eventually
seeding.
These symptoms appear on hutsites and also sometimes on soils of pH of Calcium
Ammonium Nitrate (CAN), and they may appear on more acid soils if CAN is
applied.

Remedy
If the soil pH is above 5.8, treat as a hutsite (see page 141). If the soil pH is
5.8 or lower, apply 100 kg sulphate of potash per hectare and nitrogen as NPK
25:5:5:5.

Sulphur deficiency
The sulphur deficiency disease known as "tea yellows" occurs occasionally in the
various tea growing districts.
At first the leaves become yellow between the veins, which remain green. The
leaves of new growth become smaller and internodal distance becomes shorter.
Leaves become more yellow, scorch, and then fall off. New shoots are stunted
and ultimately the stems die back from the tip.
Remedy
Apply a fertilizer with a high sulphur content. Normal nitrogen applications for one
year should be as sulphate of ammonia; if phosphate and potassium are also applied
these should be given as single superphosphate and sulphate of potash respectively.
NPK 25:5:5 with 5 per cent sulphur will not provide sufficient sulphur to cure a
gross deficiency. After the gross deficient has been cured the NPKS fertilizer will
maintain sulphur supplies and prevent any recurrence of deficiency symptoms.
Where tea is planted into soil of pH above 5.8, treat as a hutsite (see page 141),
applying sulphur or aluminium sulphate as recommended.
When planting into soil of lower pH which is known to be deficient in sulphur,
use sulphate of potash and single superphosphate in the quantities recommended
on page 128.

Abnormalities caused by incorrect availability or imbalance of more than one

nutrient
High nitrogen, low potassium
When nitrogen fertilizers are applied to tea plants that are deficient in potassium,
the plants are unable to use the nitrogen quickly. Consequently it accumulates in
the leaves, and as a result the maintenance layer begins to turn a dark green colour.
The young leaves of the flush then turn dark green. Where the maintenance layer
has been reduced defoliation as result of severe lack of potassium, quite small
applications of nitrogenous fertilizers will turn all the small leaves that remain on
the bush a dark green.
This dark green colour has always in the past been thought to be the effect of
lack of potassium alone, but we now know it to result from applications of
nitrogenous fertilizers to tea bushes already low in potassium.

Remedy
Apply 4 bags of sulphate or muriate of potash that is equivalent to 120 kg
K2O per hectare.

Low nitrogen, low potassium

Tea plants severely deficient in nitrogen and potassium have small leaves that
are yellow in colour.

Remedy
Apply 80 kg N as NPKS 25:5:5:5 per hectare, and 120 kg K2O as sulphate
or muriate of potash per hectare (4 bags of the actual fertilizer).

Low nitrogen, high potassium

Tea plants in this condition are similar in appearance to those described under
"Nitrogen deficiency".
There is evidence that in some parts of Kenya, continued heavy applications of
muriate of potash unbalanced with nitrogen and phosphate bring about reductions
in crop.

Remedy
Apply 80 kg N as NPKS 25:5:5:5 per hectare.
High calcium, low potassium
Severe symptoms of potassium deficiency appear (see page 145). This condition
arise after applying nitrogen as CAN without potassium for two or three years,
or if lime is applied.

Remedy
As described for potassium deficiency (see pages 145-146). The quantities of
potash fertilizer may need to be increased, or applications repeated, to offset the
adverse effect of the high concentration of calcium in the soil.

Plasmolysis
In young tea, locally concentration of fertilizer in the soil water cause defoliation.
In mature tea, leaves start to scorch from the tips. Sometimes the leaf margins lose
colour first. The scorch travels progressively back to the stems and then fall off.
Usually the younger leaves are affected first. Following defoliation the stem tips
scorch. The scorch travels progressively down the stems until they are completely
dead. In most soils large quantities of fertilizer are needed to produce such an effect
on mature tea, so this trouble is only likely to occur in very exceptional
circumstances. In nurseries and young tea, however, much smaller quantities of
fertilizer can have serious effects. Careful control of quantities of nitrogen in
planting-holes will produce this effect.

Remedy
If the fertilizer can be washed out of soil before the plants die they may recover.
Heavy rain can help and extra watering of nurseries may be effective.

(m) The use of the "paired-plot technique" for evaluating yield response of
tea to fertilizer
(i) Introduction
A very simple approach is described, by which the grower can test some of the
relations between fertilizer use and the response of his own tea. This technique
in no way obviates the need for formal scientific investigations, and is not
suitable for studying all nutritional problems of tea. It may, however, overcome
one of the major drawbacks of formal experimentation, which is that the results
from one experiment are dependent upon the conditions influencing the bush in
that site and, a point which is too often overlooked, at that time. Tea compares
unfavourably with many crops, in that most fertilizer experiments are very long
term, if the full scientific results of treatments are to be evaluated. The
administrative problems and expense of recording the pluckings from such
formal experiments are considerable if reliable results are to be obtained, and the
Foundation's facilities are not adequate to cover all Kenya.
Simple, on-the-spot, experimentation can give a grower quicker answers under
his own conditions, provided simple treatment comparisons are made, and
provided it is realised that the answer from any one comparison will be specific in
its applicability. The dynamic nature of the relation between bush vigour, and
therefore potential cropping capacity, and fertilizer use has already been
emphasised (Section a). This could be brought home to the grower very clearly in
his own experiments, and the ever-changing influence of economic factors could
be evaluated at the same time.

(ii) Examples of the questions which paired-plot comparisons could examine

A few examples are given, to show the type of question that could usefully be
tackled by the individual grower.
1. If present annual fertilizer applications are over 150 kg/ha of N, the economics
of this practice should be tested. One plot in each pair would continue with the
level of N as at present used, while the other plot would receive N at a rate at leaf
either 33% above, or 33 % below the normal (200 or 100 kgN/ha respectively).
The choice will depend on the grower's estimate of the probable value of his
current fertilizer practice.

Normally, the levels of other nutrients would also change in such a comparison if
a compound fertilizer is used to supply the nitrogen. The Foundation will advise
if a grower wishes to compensate for his, and will suggest how leaf analysis can
provide complementary service.
 Plate V : I: Nitrogen deficient tea. Large yellow leaves, few large shoots.

Plate V ii
Potassium, deficient tea.
Small dark leaves, profuse
branching

Plate V : iii
Defoliation resulting from fertilizer
becoming locally concentrated on the
soil surface by rain, after application
to young tea
 Plate V : iv
Nitrogen deficiency

Plate V : v
Potassium deficiency.
Thin maintenance layer
Mat of fallen leaves under the bush.

Plate V : vi
Potassium deficiency. Uneven
Recovery after prune.
 Plate V : vii
Potassium deficiency. Strong central growth
poor side branches

Plate V viii
Potassium
deficiency.
Defoliation,
small
upturned
leaves

Plate V : ix
Potassium and nitrogen deficiency.
Yellow, debilitated leaves, defoliation
White stems
 Plate V : x
Potassium deficiency.
White bark

Plate V : xi
Phosphate deficiency.
Mature leaves
Dull and brittle

Plate V : xii
Zinc deficiency. Multiple
axillary shoots, wavy edge
of mature leaf.
 Plate v : xiii
Magnesium deficiency. Dark,
Inverted V along midrib of mature leaf.

Plate v xiv
Helopeltis damage on young shoot.

Plate v : xv
Brown blight on mature foliage
 Figure V .1: Zinc deficiency of tea: the little-
leaf symptom, on shoots with greatly
shortened internodes; compared with a normal
shoot from the same bush.

Figure V .2: Zinc deficiency of tea.

A single branch showing a central
little-leaf shoot, and also the sickle-
leaf symptom.

Figure V . 3: Zinc deficiency

of tea. A severely up-folded
and wavy-edged leaf
2. If little or no fertilizer is used, a grower may wish to be assured of the value of
an increased application of nutrients. More than one nutrient may be deficient, and
the increased use of fertilizer should take this into account.
Further, it may well take a considerable time for debilitated bushes to develop
to the stage where they can show an appreciab
le yield response to increased fertilizer. If the Foundation is given details of
the grower's agricultural problem before the experiment
is started, paired-plot comparisons can be suggested to cover the above conditions.
3. There may be a wish to effect immediate economics, by using N only, as
opposed to the more usual NPKS compound fertilizer. Supplemented by leaf
analysis, this could be a straightforward comparison for paired-plots.
4. The effects of increments of a single nutrient could similarly be studied, for
example potassic fertilizer added to the soil, or zinc-compounds sprayed onto the
foliage.

(iii) Advice from the Foundation

This will be given in as much detail as possible, although officers may not be able
to inspect all proposed sites. Before starting an experiment, growers are advised to
contact the Foundation, and this is even more important if more than two plots are
planned per experiment. The success of such a simple approach as outlined,
depends on very simple questions being put to the test, and an attempt to extract
too much information from a pair of plots may result in muddle.
The Foundation itself can build up a picture of fertilizer/yield relations, if
sufficient paired-plot comparisons are laid down by growers and if the results
are made available to us for examination. Our general advice to all growers
could be strengthened accordingly.

(iv) Practical considerations in the selection of paired plots

The term "paired" is to be interpreted broadly. More than two plots can be chosen
for comparison within one experiment, with more than two treatments under test.
It is strongly recommended that growers consult the Foundation before attempting
to lay down more than two plots in one experiment. However, a repetition of a
two-plot comparison on different soils, slopes, jats, or ages from pruning for
example, is a straightforward matter and will add to the value of the results.
A plot, in this context, can be of any size which is convenient for the grower to
manage, but at the same time giving areas of tea which are as representative as
possible of the whole unit. Too small plots, selected in particularly convenient
situations may be anything but representative of the remaining tea. There is no
need for the plots to be of the same size, but the area of each must be accurately
calculated.
The underlying philosophy of this ultra-simple approach to experimentation, is
that trends in yield would be assumed to be due to the experimental treatments. It
is therefore obvious that the plots should be as similar as possible before the
experiment starts. Factors which may influence the response to experimental
treatments are: soil type, local climate, age of tea, jat, spacing, pruning style and
age from pruning, plucking rounds and standard of plucking, shade trees or
windbreaks and topography.
 Many of these difficulties could be overcome by marking out plots within one
field. Before the experimental treatments are started yields of the separate plots
would be required for at least six months, covering the main cropping season, and
preferably for a full year. During this pre-treatment period, the plots would be
managed similarity in all respects. Greater precision could be expected, if several
plots were marked for this preliminary comparison, eventually selecting the most
similar ones for the experiment.
If separate fields are to be used, there will be more difficulty in meeting the
requirements similarly. However, there could be the advantages of easier
management, and the fact that yield records may be available for considerable
period, permitting an immediate start to the experiment.
Whatever selection is made, once the experimental treatments have been applied,
the plots must be managed as similarly as possible in all other respects. The
treatments themselves should be applied on the same day. Plucking should fall on
the same day, or at least follow the same length of round. If small plots are marked
out, and are plucked on the same day, the order of plucking must be changed at
each round, to avoid unfairly biasing the results.

(v) Leaf analysis

It is anticipated that chemical leaf analysis will be useful, or essential, for the
fullest interpretation of some of the more obvious paired-plot scheme. A
comparison can be made between the leaf-nutrient status of the tea in each plot,
both before the treatment starts, and at intervals thereafter. If the plots have been
selected and managed according to the requirements set out above, there will be
reason to assume the relative differences in leaf-analysis trends are due largely
to the differential treatment itself. This use of leaf analysis differs from that
which was adopted for the original Leaf-Analysis Advisory Service. These, large
and unexplained variations in leaf-nutrient content throughout the season, have
limited the value of this technique as a general advisory tool. In the new
proposals, the effect of seasonal variations will be of much less importance, as
we are concerned with relative rather than absolute values.
Our most recent research has shown that the uppermost mature leaf in the
plucking table is a more sensitive indicator of fertilizer-induced nutrient trends,
than any of the younger leaves. Further, the precision of the Foundation's
analytical service, for the major nutrients, has been improved in recent years to
the point where it is feasible to comment on smaller leaf-nutrient differences than
previously. Both these advance are likely to be valuable in helping the grower to
assess the results of his experiment at the earliest opportunity; which is a most
important aspect of the whole scheme.

(v) Leaf sampling

The uppermost mature leaf is hard, dark and almost or quite full size, and in these
respects is comparable to the lower maintenance foliage. It is the uppermost such
leaf on a twig which bears, or which has obviously borne, one or more growing
shoots. Do not sample banjhi shoots, or the free-growing shoots on the edge of the
plucking table.
Sample at least 100 bushes, taking one leaf from each, in each of the plots.
These bushes must be uniformly scattered over the whole area, but avoid; the
 few rows that adjoin roads, paths, or large vacant patches. If bush vigour is
uneven within a plot, take a separate sample from the weaker areas: this may
give valuable information.
Each plot must be sampled on the same day. Choose a season when the tea is
cropping freely, but avoiding abnormal rush crops. After fertilizer, manure, or
mulch has been applied, wait for several weeks.
Put the leaves into a clean paper bag and seal with adhesive tape: do not use
staples or pins. Do not use polythene or cloth bags. Preferably dry the leaf as far
as far as possible, but do not crush it, and post the bags in a firm package to:

Director,
The Research Foundation of Kenya,
P.O. Box 820,
KERICHO.

Each bag should have the plot description and site written on it, so that it is
readily identifiable on its own. If a grower has started an experiment on his own
initiative, a covering letter should be sent giving details. A sample of the sheet
which gives detail and which should accompany each sample is shown in page
165.
Should a grower consult the Foundation before starting an experiment, special
arrangements may be made for analysing samples, as far as our facilities
permit, and if we consider that the scheme could provide information of value
to all growers.

(ii) Soil analysis

Soil analysis should really play a part in the interpretation of yield trends, and
the Foundation does provide this service. Foundation will advise growers who
wish to have soil analysed. The information could be valuable for future
reference, and should certainly be obtained. Our interpretation of soil analysis
data will necessarily be limited to begin with, but could become more useful as
the volume of data accumulates, together with yield records from the
experiments.

(viii) Soil sampling

See page 5 (Chapter I Section b)

(ix) Service charges

Due to the fact that we cannot predict the number of samples we receive from
tea growers each year, it is impossible for us to estimate on how much money it
will cost to carry the analyses each year. At present we charge nominal fees per
sample to cover the costs of chemicals used in the analyses and the actual charge
can be obtained from the foundation before or after sending the samples

(n) Recording and calculating fertilizer use

(i) Estate records
The Foundation staff occasionally find it impossible to advise on the value of past
fertilizer application, because this is referred to in growers' records as "kg
fertilizer". "NPK", "N", "three bags" and similar vague descriptions. Records
should contain enough detail for the nutrient additions to be known, long after the
grower has forgotten which fertilizer he used.
For example:-
600 kg/ha of compound 25:5:5:5 NPKS or
150 kg/ha of N, as 25:5:5:5 NPKS
Make sure that it is clear whether weight recorded refers to the fertilizer as a
whole, or to one of the nutrients. the two examples above make this distinction.
Also, record the exact date of application, and whether the quantity is applied
per hectare or to the whole of a plot: neither "750 kg/ha of sulphate of ammonia in
1972", or "750 kg of sulphate of ammonia on 26th June 1972: is of true value.
(ii) Examples of common calculations
1. How much triple superphosphate, with a quoted P2O5 content of 46%, is
required to supply 46 kg of P2O5 :
100 x weight of nutrient required = weight of fertilizer
---------------------------------------
% of nutrient
thus, 100x46/46 = 100 kg of triple superphosphate
The general form of the calculation can be used for similar conversions for other
fertilizers.

2. How much sulphate of ammonia, quoted at 20% N, would be required to give

the same weight of N as 400 kg of a 25:5:5:5 fertilizer:
400x25/20 =500 kg of sulphate of ammonia

3. To make a mixture with an N: P2O5: K2O ratio of 25:5:5:5, from straight

fertilizers, and to apply at 150 kg/ha of N, using sulphate of ammonia (20% N),
single superphosphate (20% P2O5) and muriate of potash (50% K2O).
Calculate the quantity of sulphate of ammonia as in Example 1:-
= 150 x 100 kg/ha of fertilizer
20
= 750 kg/ha of sulphate of ammonia
For the single superphosphate, the formula is
150 x 100 x 5 kg/ha of fertilizer
20 25
= 150 kg/ha of single superphosphate
Similarly, for the muriate of potash, the formula is
150 x 100 x 5 kg/ha of fertilizer
50 25
= 60 kg/ha of 50% muriate of potash
(The ratio , 5 is governed by the proportions of N to P2O5
25
and to K2O the compound fertilizer)
A total of 960 kg/ha of mixed fertilizer.
4. Concentration of solutions
For all practical purposes, a 2% solution of fertilizer, for example,
means:-
2 kg of fertilizer in 100 litres of water or
2 kg of fertilizer in 22 gallons of water or
2 lb. of fertilizer in 10 gallons of water

(o) Elements essential for plant growth

(Chemical symbols in brackets)

(i) Major nutrients (macro-nutrients)

Carbon (C)
Hydrogen (H)
Oxygen (O)
A sub-group usually referred to as mineral nutrients comprises:-
Nitrogen (N)
Phosphorus (P)
Potassium (K)
Calcium (Ca)
Magnesium (Mg)
Sulphur (S)

(ii) Trace elements (micro-nutrients)

Manganese (Mn)
Zinc (Zn)
Copper (Cu)
Iron (Fe)
Boron (B)
Molybdenum (Mo)
Chlorine (Cl)

Note: Other elements have been reported to be essential for, or to confer benefits
to, the growth of certain plant species. The above list covers those accepted as
essential for all plants.
THE TEA RESEARCH FOUNDATION OF KENYA
Leaf and soil sampling sheet
To be completed for each sampled field or area
Name and address of Estate or Farm
Field/Plot number. ........................... .......................
Date of Planting ............................. .......................
Date of sampling ............................. .......................
Seedling/clonal If clonal which? ............. .......................
Last pruned: Month: .........Year....... To be pruned next..........(year)
Last THREE applications of fertilizer (Year and month):
Date of application 1 .............. 2................ 3...............
Type of fertilizer 1............... 2................ 3...............
Quantity kgN/ha 1............... 2................ 3...............
Past three years' yields
......... kg mt/ha 19...........kg mt/ha 2000..........kg mt/ha 2001.
Weeding: herbicide or jembe? ………........ Prunings left on the field ?
………........
Has mulch or organic manure, etc. been applied Type/quantity .............
Weather conditions in 6 months before sampling (tick the applicable one):
Rainfall -about normal / above normal / below normal
Temperature -about normal / about normal / below normal
General weather comments .................................................
Hail damage in the last 6 months? Yes/No: If yes, how severe? ............
..........................................................................
Area represented by sample: Ha..... or if small, number of bushes: .......
Slope of land: level / moderate / steep (tick the applicable one):
Analysis required: pH only / complete soil nutrients / leaf nutrients / any
additional nutrient e.g. trace nutrients:..................................
Give any other relevant information that may be useful...................
..........................................................................
Date............................ Signed ..................................
TABLE V:6 AMOUNTS IN GRAMS OF FERTILIZER TO BE APPLIED PER PLANT FOR DIFFERENT PLANT

166 TEA GROWERS HANDBOOK

DENSITY PER hectare/acre OR spacing in feet)

Rectangular planting, No of 6730/ha or 8611/ha or 3485/acre 10766/ha or 4356/acre 13448/ha or 5445/acre 4x2
plant or spacing in feet 2722/acre 4x4 5x21/2 4x21/2 or 5x2
Fertilizer rate kgN/ha 100 150 100 150 100 150 100 150
Amount of the actual fertilizer in grams (g)
NPKS 25:5:5:5 or ASN 26% 60g 90g 45g 70g 40g 55g 30g 45g
NPKS 22:6:12:5 70g 100g 50g 80g 45g 65g 35g 50g
NPK 20:10:10 or S/A 21% 75g 110g 60g 90g 45g 70g 40g 55g
Rectangular planting, No of 2989/ha or 4306/ha or 1742/acre 5383/ha or 2178/acre 8975/ha or 3630/acre 4x3
plants or spacing in feet 1210/acre 6x6 5x5 5x4
NPKS 25:5:5:5 or ASN 26% 135g 200g 90g 135g 75g 110g 45g 65g
NPKS 22:6:12:5 152g 230g 105g 160g 85g 125g 50g 75g
NPK 20:10:10 or S/A 21% 165g 250g 115g 175g 95g 140g 55g 85g
Triangular planting, No of 6139/ha or 7768/ha or 3144/acre 9676/ha or 3916/acre 13896/ha or 5624/acre 4x2
plants or spacing in feet 2484/acre 41/2x41/2 4x4 4x3
TABLE V:7 APPROXIMATE NUTRIENT CONTENTS IN TERMS OF BAGS OF FERTILIZER (Kg N, P2O5, K2O and MgO)
Fertilizers Number of bags of fertilizer (50 kg each)
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20
S/A (KgN) 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 150 160 200
NPK 20:10:10 (KgN) 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 150 160 200
NPKS 22:6:12:5 (kgN) 11 22 33 44 55 66 88 110 132 165 176 220
NPKS 25:5:5:5 (KgN) 25 50 75 100 125 150 200 250
SSP single super (Kg P2O5) 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100

Fertilizers and Nutrition

TSP Triple super (Kg P2O5) 25 46 70 92
KCl Muriate of potash (Kg K2O) 30 60 90 120 120
MgSO4.7H2O Epsom salt (Kg 15 30 45 60 75
MgO)
MgSO4.H2O Kieserite (Kg 15 20 45 60
MgO)

167
168 TEA GROWERS HANDBOOK

TABLE V:8 FERTILIZER MEASUREMENTS USING KIMBO TINS FOR

PLANT DENSITY ABOUT 8611/HA OR 1.22m by 0.91m (3485/acre or 5x21/2
feet spacing)
Fertilizer type, actual weight Size of the kimbo tin and weight of fertilizer
1
and rate applied 2kg tin 1kg tin /2kg tin
S/A 21% 2700g 1350g 700g
No of bushes at 150 kgN/ha 30 15 7
NPK 20:10:10 2500g 1250g 650g
No of bushes at 150 kgN/ha 30 15 7
NPKS 25:5:5:5S 2400g 1200g 600g
No of bushes at 150 kgN/ha 35 17 8
NPKS 22:6:12:5 2400g 1200g 600g
No of bushes at 150 kgN/ha 30 15 7
Urea 46% 2000g 1000g 500g
No of bushes at 150 kgN/ha 53 26 13
SSP 18% P2O5 2600g 1300g 650g
No of bushes at 50 kgP2O5/ha 80 40 20
TSP 46% 2800g 1400g 700g
No of bushes at 50 kg P2O5/ha 220 110 55
DAP 18%N, 46% P2O5 2500g 1250g 600g
No of bushes at 50 kg P2O5/ha 200 100 50
Muriate of potash(KCl) 60% K2O 3100g 1500g 750g
No of bushes at 100 kg K2O/ha 160 80 40
Fertilizers and Nutrition 169
 CHAPTER VI

DISEASES, PESTS, OTHER

ABNORMALITIES, AND WEED
CONTROL
(a) Diseases
(i) Armillaria root rot of tea
Causal agent
The causal agent of Armillaria root rot of tea is the fungus Armillaria spp.

Distribution
The causal agent has worldwide distribution. It occurs in roots of most forest trees as
an epiphyte though it sometimes causes root rot in some of them.

Infection and spread in tea

The primary infection seems to be invariably traceable to woody debris of stumps
and roots left in the soil during the initial forest clearing or tree felling. The fungus
spreads and infects tea mainly by contact of tea roots with infested root debris and/or
rhizomorphs. Secondary infection occurs when roots of disease free tea come onto
contact with those of already infected ones or with rhizomorphs borne on roots of
already infected tea plants. Thus, over time the spread of the fungus manifests itself
in the disease occurring as radial patches of diseased plants in a tea field.

Symptoms
Infected tea bushes show gradual reduction in growth, making them shorter than the
surrounding healthy ones. They also exhibit yellowing, premature flowering,
defoliation and eventually die. At the collar region longitudinal cracking of the stem
can be observed. If the bark is lifted off the wood at the collar area a white mycelial
growth of the fungus is found overlying the wood.

Prevention
Trees should be ring-barked before they are felled to prepare the land for planting
tea. The ring-barked trees should not be felled until they are completely dead and the
starch reserves in their roots are exhausted. If trees have to be felled when still green,
their stumps and roots should be removed from the soil as much as possible. The
period between ring barking and felling varies with tree species but ranges from 18-
24 months.
Control
During primary land preparation, remove the tree roots and pieces of wood as much as
possible. It is recommended that all dead and moribund tea bushes are uprooted and debris
of their roots completely dug out and destroyed preferably by burning. This should be done
as soon as the infected bushes are observed. Look for old tree roots in the soil and if found
also remove and destroy. The space can be infilled immediately or at a convenient time but
ensure that the hole is free from any Armillaria bearing plant material or the fungus.
No effective and safe chemical method for managing the disease has been found.

(ii) Hypoxylon wood rot of tea

Causal agent
Wood rot disease of tea is caused by the fungus Hypoxylon serpens (Pers. ex Fr.).

Distribution
The disease causes considerable damage to tea in India and Sri Lanka and has also been
observed to be serious in some tea growing areas of Kenya. H. serpens also causes wood rot
in several dicotyledonous forest trees.

Infection and spread in tea

The causal agent of the disease is transmitted by wind as ascospores and possibly as conidia.
The fungus enters its host plant through wounds caused by pruning, sun-scorch, and hail
damage.

Symptoms
Decline of the bush occurs due to sectorial rotting and death of the primary branches. This
may result in the ultimate death of the whole bush. The rotten wood bears superficial
fructifications (stromata) of the fungus that appear as irregular dark-grey to black raised
patches of various sizes. These fructifications bear ascospores of the fungus in asci contained
in perithecia. The dead branches are very light in weight.

Control measures
1. Try to prevent sun-scorch by shading exposed branches with prunings immediately after
pruning.
2. Once the disease is diagnosed the dead and dying branches must be selectively pruned
off right down to the healthy wood. This may involve heavy pruning but if it is not done
the disease may progress and kill the bush.
3. Pruning cuts should be made sloping so as not to hold rainwater and thereby heal quickly.
4. After pruning, the large cuts should be painted over with a wound dressing fungicide
such as copper oxychloride 50% WP in raw linseed oil.
5. Down pruning of tea should be avoided as much as possible in fields with the disease
but if it has to be done, wound dressing should be done as a mandatory requirement.
(iii) Collar and branch canker
Causal agent
Collar and branch canker of tea is caused by the fungus Phomopsis theae Petch.

Distribution
Phomopsis theae has a worldwide distribution. The disease it causes has been
reported in all tea growing areas of Kenya.

Spread of the fungus

Inoculum of the fungus that consists of its spores (alpha conidia) can be disseminated
from one plant to another by wind.

Symptoms
Canker lesions develop on the stem at the collar region or on the branches. Upper
edges of the lesions are usually heavily callused. Leaves on branches girdled by the
lesions turn yellow and ultimately the branches die. Where the lesions girdle the main
stem the whole plant usually dies.

Predisposing factors
The susceptibility of tea to infection by P. theae is thought to be influenced by the
moisture availability to plants and water holding capacity of the soil. Formation of
cankers on infected tea plants progresses more rapidly when plants are subjected to
moisture deficiency stress thus drought seems to be a major factor which influences
onset of the disease.

Prevention
Infection of tea by P. theae can be avoided by minimising injuries on the bark of tea
and by mulching to avoid stress due to soil moisture deficit.
Clones of tea differ in susceptibility to the disease.

Control
Damage to tea due to the disease can be checked by pruning off badly affected
branches of infected plants at least 10 cm below the lesions. The pruned off branches
should be destroyed by burning and the pruned bushes treated with a protectant
fungicide such as the dithiocarbamates or copper oxychloride.

(iv) Leaf spots of tea (brown blight and grey blight)

These diseases are common on tea with their lesions occurring on old tea leaves that
are about to fall but their outbreaks cause severe damage only in the nursery.

Brown blight
The disease is caused by the fungus Colletotrichum camelliae. The fungus infects
the leaves causing brown lesions that start at the margins and spread inwards. Many
such lesions may coalesce thereby killing the whole leaf. The edges of the lesions
are clearly defined and marked with concentric rings. The lesions initially appear
yellow to chocolate brown but gradually brown to grey from the centre outward.
Minute black scattered dots (fructifications of the fungus) appear on both sides of the
lesions.

Grey blight
The disease is caused by the fungus Pestalotia theae. The fungus infects mature
leaves of tea which then form brown to grey round to oval lesions marked with
concentric zonation. Black fructifications somewhat bigger than those of brown
blight are produced in concentric rings on the upper surface of the lesions.

Control
Control of the diseases is only necessary if it affects plants in the nursery. The
predisposing factors, mainly too much shade and over watering, should be identified
and corrected. This should be accompanied with application of fungicides such as
Dithiocarbamates or Benlate at 20 g in 20 litres of water.

(v) Damping off

Causal agent
The damping off disease is caused by the fungus Pythium spp. The fungus attacks
the main stems of young plants near the soil surface and causes this to rot. The leaves
of the affected plants may turn yellow and the plant wilts but usually the disease
manifests itself as the crumbling over of the plant at the collar region.
Pythium spp is a soil borne fungus that may occur in nursery soils especially where
the soil remains unduly wet for long periods.

Control
Where the disease is common the cuttings should be soaked in water containing
Ridomil (metalaxyl) at a concentration of 2 g per litre. If the disease is noted after
planting the cuttings young plants can be sprayed thoroughly with the fungicide at
the same concentration.

(vi) Cylindrocarpon root rot

Causal agent
The disease is caused by the soil-borne fungus Cylindrocarpon tenue. The fungus
infects the root system causing rotting of the root tissues. The surface of infected
roots typically appear pink in colour. When the root of the plant is affected the plant
wilts gradually and ultimately dies.
This is a rare disease of tea and is of minor importance but where it is observed the
affected plants should be uprooted and destroyed.

(vii) Crown gall

Causal agent
Crown gall disease is caused by the bacterium Agrobacterium tumefasciens. The
bacterium enters roots of plants through wounds created by physical injuries. In the
infected tissue the bacterium induces excessive cell division (hyperplasia) and
enlargement (hypertrophy). These lead to abnormal growth and formation of
galls/tumours at the collar region of the plant. Plants with such tumours generally
appear unthrifty and unable to withstand other stresses and may ultimately die.

Prevention
The disease is best prevented by avoiding physical injuries to the roots.

Control
The only method of controlling the disease is destruction of infected plants.

TEA PESTS AND THEIR CONTROL

A number of pests exist in our tea environment. The most important pests that cause
economic loss to tea are included here. Appropriate control measures are also given.
The approach adopted in most cases is pest management.

(i) Tea mites

Description:
Mites are minute pests, clearly seen only through a lens. They differ from insects
fundamentally in having four pairs of legs in the adult stage. They live on tender
plant tissues by sucking the cell sap. Mites are the most serious pests of tea in Kenya.

(a) Red crevice mite or Scarlet mite. (Brevipalpus phoenicis GEIJSKES).

Distribution
The red crevice mite occurs in all the growing districts of Kenya. Serious attacks
occur during dry periods in certain tea growing districts especially in East of the Rift
Valley (Kirinyaga, Muranga and Meru.

Status
This pest is a sporadic that increases during drought periods. Its outbreak is serious
on tea that is not correctly fertilized. In some cases overdose during fertilizer
application also encourages mite attack, so adequate fertilizer are essential.

Symptoms of attack
Brown corky symptoms develop on the underside of the leaves, especially near the
petiole along the main veins, and later the leaves dry up and fall prematurely (Plate
VI.1). Occasionally bushes may be heavily infested. The pest is 0.3 mm long and is
bright red in colour. The eggs are also bright red, and can be seen in crevices on the
stem.
Control
While using Knapsack sprayer apply omite, 57% EC at 3ml/litre of water, or cybolt
at rate of 3ml/litre of water. Allow a minimum interval of 14 days between spraying
and plucking for manufacture.

(b) Red spider mite (Oligonychus coffeae Nietner)

Distribution
The red spider mite occurs in low numbers in most tea growing areas of Kenya.

Symptoms of attack
The upper surface of the mature leaves darken and turn brown and become scorched
(Plate VI 2). Young leaves may also be attacked during drought. Severe attacks may
lead to some defoliation. The mites, which are about 0.5 mm long, can be seen on
the upper surface of the leaves; the front part of their bodies is red and hind part is
purple. White cast skins of the immature stages can also be seen together with the
small reddish eggs which are alongside the leaf veins.
The pest is found throughout Kenya especially on unshaded tea, also attacking a
wide range of plants including coffee, castor and grevillea. Its natural enemies
include ladybird beetles and green lacewing larvae.

Status
Very few serious outbreaks have been reported attributed to these mites.

Control
Omite 57% EC at 3ml/litre of water, Cybolt at the rate 3ml/litre of water.
Use enough water to wet the bushes thoroughly and allow a minimum interval of
two weeks between spraying and plucking for manufacture.

(c) Yellow Tea Mite (Hemitarsonemus latus)

Distribution
The yellow tea mite occurs in low numbers in most tea growing areas of Kenya.

Status
Nurseries may be badly affected, especially if densely shaded. This pest attacks a
wide range of plants, including coffee and cotton.

Symptoms of attack
The young leaves are curled and may be distorted. Brown corky symptoms develop
between the main veins on the underside of the leaf and two brown lines parallel to
the midrib may develop. The adults are 1.5 mm long and are yellow. The eggs, which
are laid singly on the underside of the leaf, are covered with whitish tubercles.

Control
Spray the upper leaves with 2.7g of dicofol 18.5% wettable powder in a litre of water,
or Omite 57% E.C. at 3ml/litre of water. Repeat after one week if the first spray has
not cleared the attack. Allow a minimum interval of one week between spraying and
plucking for manufacture.

(d) Purple mites (Calacarus carinatus Green)

Distribution
The purple mite occurs in all the tea growing areas of Kenya.

Status
The pest was first noticed in Kenya in l977 in Sotik and later found in all the tea
districts. The purple mite population has been kept low by the improvement of the
nutritional status of the tea bush.

Symptoms of attack
The attacked leaves turn purple or bronze in colour and numerous skin casts can be
seen scattered over the surface (Plate VI:3). Both surfaces of the leaves are attacked
but is more prevalent on the upper surface. Older leaves are preferred but in heavy
attacks young leaves are equally infested. Defoliation may occur where the attack is
serious especially on young tea. It has been observed that bushes receiving no or
inadequate fertilizer are more susceptible to the purple mites.

Control
Same as for red crevice mite.

(e) Bud Mite (Brevipalpus carlifornicus)

Status
The occurrence of bud mite has been very rare.

Symptoms of attack
Newly unfolding leaves are curled and dissected to give a coarse fern like
appearance. They are hardened and appear to be unfit for manufacture. The damage
is caused by very small mites which attack the apical buds; they cannot be seen by
the naked eye.

Control
Spray dicofol l8.5% wp at 2.7g in one litre of water; or spray with Omite 57% EC at
3ml/litre of water. No quick benefit will be seen as damage occurs at a very early
stage of leaf formation and distorted leaves therefore continue to uncurl after the
death of the mites. Leave at least one week between spraying and plucking.

(ii) Citrus Aphid –(Toxoptera aurantii)

Aphids are minute insects, dark brown to almost black in colour and attack young
tea resulting in stunted growth.

Distribution
The citrus aphid occurs in all the tea growing districts of Kenya.

Status
It is found on mature tea, but nurseries are more often attacked.

Symptoms of attack
Brown aphids measuring up to 3 mm long are found in large numbers on the
youngest shoots and leaves. Affected leaves are curled backwards (Plate VI:4).

Control
Spray the affected parts of the plants with Karate 1.75 EC at 4 ml per litre of water,
or spray with fenitrothion 50% EC at 2 ml per litre of water. Allow a minimum
interval of one week between spraying and plucking.

(iii) Scales insects, Soft green scale-Cocus sp. Soft brown scale, Fried egg scales-
Aspidiotus sp.

Distribution
The soft scales occur sporadically in all the tea growing districts of Kenya. Fried egg
scales (plate VI:5) are prevalent in Tigania, Nyambene and some parts of Kericho.

Status
Certain clones of tea are preferred by scales.

Symptoms of attack
Found along the midribs of the upper and lower surfaces of the leaves (Plate VI:5),
especially in newly planted tea. The leaves sometimes turn black with sooty moulds
and ants may be active on affected leaves.

Control
Pruning removes most of the affected leaves and allows parasitic wasps to attack the
remaining scales.
Spray with Karate at 4 ml per litre of water and mix with 25 ml summer white oil
(Murfoil EC). Examine after two weeks and if necessary re-spray. Allow a
minimum interval of one week between spraying and plucking. Ants that may
spread attack can be controlled by spraying with Dursban 48% EC at l.5 ml per
litre of water around the base of affected bushes.

(iv) Moths and Butterflies

Damage is caused by larvae, called caterpillars, with their biting-chewing mouth
parts. Caterpillars usually have 3 pairs of short, joined thoracic legs at the first three
segments behind the head and usually 5 pairs of fleshy prolegs at the abdominal
segments of the body. Caterpillars of the family loopers (Geometridae) have only 2
pairs of prolegs (abdominal legs) beside the 3 pairs of thoracic legs.

Control
Spray the foliage with malathion 50% EC at the rate of 2 ml/litre of water or Karate
at the rate of 4ml per litre of water. Allow at least one week between spraying and
plucking.

(v) Common Cutworm (Agrotis segetum)

A common pest of young tea in all tea growing areas. The grey brownish
caterpillars, which are up to 4.5 mm in length, can cause considerable damage in
nurseries and newly planted fields by eating the bark of stems at ground level. This
damage is later followed by extensive callusing and swelling around the collar. By
day the pests hide in the soil near their hosts. At night they appear on the soil surface
to feed.

Control
Cutworms can be controlled effectively by use of baiting material as indicated below;
the bait may be bought or prepared. The following formula is recommended for
cutworm bait preparation:
Bait enough for 1 ha.
Dursban 48% EC (Gladiator)- 100ml
Wheat bran -50 kg
Sucrose 250gms
Mix the insecticide well with the bran before molasses or sugar. Then add
water and mix thoroughly. Broadcast the bait in the affected area.

N.B. If molasses is not available, sugar at the same rate may be used. A ready bait
may be purchased e.g. Volaton 0.75% (a bait containing 7.5 gm phoxin per kg).
Follow the instructions on the label.

(vi) Faggot worm (Clania destructor)

The larvae construct cases diverse in shape and size in which they live. The cases are
made of bits of twigs placed parallel to each other along the length of the cases.

Nature of damage
The mouth of the case is usually surrounded by a protective mantle (Figure VI:1)
with an aperture in the middle through which the larva protrudes its head and feeds
on the leaves and bark of tea bushes.

Figure VI :1
Faggot worm (Clania destructor)
Status
The pest has been found in some tea growing areas such as Murang'a. It is however
considered as a minor pest.
Control
It can best and efficiently be accomplished by hand collection
The cases of faggot worm can easily be detected on bushes and their complete
removal as soon as they appear will eradicate the pest. This is a new pest and no
chemical control measures have been tested.

(vii) Leaf Eating Caterpillars (various)

Control
Spray the foliage with Karate at the rate of 3 ml per litre of water or Fenitrothion
50% EC at the rate of 2 ml/litre of water. Allow at least one week between spraying
and plucking.

(viii) Beetles
Cockchafer larvae (Cockchafer larva) (Schizonycha spp).

Symptoms of attack
Found generally on immature tea. The leaves of young bushes wilt; on inspection,
the surface of the root is seen to be damaged, especially just below the soil surface.
This damage is frequently followed by extensive callus growth and swelling around
and below the collar (Plate VI:6). Cockchafer grub damage is often confused with
injury caused by chemical fertilizers coming into contact with the collar of the plants.

Control
Spray the soil around the bushes with Dursban (Gladiator) at the rate of 1.0 ml/litres
of water. Spraying in the planting holes before planting has also been found to be
beneficial. When nurseries are affected by this pest, it is advisable to treat the soil of
new nurseries which are to be established in the vicinity before the seeds are planted.
Treat in the same way as above, subsequently incorporating the endosulfan with the
top 10 cm of soil.

(ix) Tea Weevils

(a) Tea Root Weevil (Aperitmetus brunneous)
Tea root weevil (Plate VI: 7) belongs to the familly Curculionidae and attacks tea.
The pest girdles the stem of the plants just above ground level, making the plant to
wilt and die. The larvae feed on tap roots, gnawing along the channel of the root
causing wilting, stunting and finally death of the plant.

(b) Nematocerus Weevil (Nematocerus sulcatus)

The adult weevil feed on the leaves making characteristic notch- like damage to the
leave margin.
In severe attacks the there can be almost complete defoliation. The larvae live in the
soil and eat the roots, the underground stem and germinating seeds.

(c) Systates Weevil (Systates spp)

It causes damage on the leaves creating fjord-like indentations where the adult
weevils have eaten away the lamina.

Figure VI:2
An Adult weevil and damaged leaf
Symptoms
The adult weevils feed on the leaves making characteristic notch-like damage to the
margin (Figure VI:2). In severe attacks there can be almost complete defoliation.

(d) Kangaita / Kimari Weevil (Entypotrachelus meyeri)

The adult weevil feed on the leaves making characteristic notch- like damage to the
leave margin (Plate VI:8)
In severe attacks the there can be almost complete defoliation. The larvae live in
the soil.

General Control
Spray the soil in the affected areas with Gladiator at the rate of 10 ml/litre of water
or the foliage at l.5 ml/litre of water or with Karate 1.75% EC at the rate of 4 ml/litre
of water.
Hand picking has been found to be effective where the population of weevils is not
high.

(x) Nettle grubs (Stinging caterpillars) (Parasa vivida)

Stinging caterpillar is a pest of coffee in Kenya. Occasionally, it attacks tea.
They have tuffs of hairs or series of spines which are poisonous and painful, and their
presence makes it difficult to work in an infested area. The pain persists for several
days. Workers are reluctant to pluck infested tea. This pest occurs in some parts of
Murang'a, Embu and Meru (South Imenti) tuft.

Symptoms
The full grown larva are pale green in colour 45 cm long (Plate VI 9). They are found
in underside of leaves.
Control
Spray the affected bushes with Karate 1.75 % EC at the rate 4 ml/litre of water. Allow
at least one week between spraying and plucking.

(xi) Tobacco Cricket (Brachytrypes membranaceus)

Young tea plants are cut off a few centimetres from the ground. Very little of the
plant is eaten but any plant which is cut will die. These tobacco crickets (Plate VI
10) have assumed economic importance in some parts of Kenya (Nandi District) and
has been necessary to develop proper control measures.

Control
Spray the soil around the bushes with Dursban (Gladiator) 48% EC at 10 ml/litre of
water once every month from planting time for at least 3 months time. This will
protect the plants from damage by the tobacco cricket. Alternatively, bait the tobacco
cricket using wheat bran bait prepared as follows;

Dursban 48% EC (Gladiator)- 10ml

Wheat bran 500 gms
Sucrose -25 gms
Place the bait inside the mole cricket tunnel

(xii) Thrips
Distribution
The tea thrips have been found to occur in all tea growing areas of Kenya. The
attack is serious during the dry season.

(a) Yellow Tea Thrips (Scirtothrips kenyensis Mound)

Yellow tea thrips (Figure VI:3) occur in most tea growing areas of Kenya. Thrips
cause serious damage to tea during dry period. With the onset of rains the populations
reduce drastically.

Figure VI :3
An Adult Scirtothrips Kenyensis
Symptoms of attack
The young leaves are stunned and cupped, and margins of affected leaves are cracked
and brown, changing to purple (Plate VI:11). A pair of brown lines is often seen on
the leaf blade, one on each side of and parallel to the main vein; similar lines may be
caused by yellow tea mite (see page 175).

Control
The intensity of the attacks can be reduced by introducing finer plucking for a few
rounds so that immature shoots are removed. The insects are mostly found within the
folded terminal buds and if these are plucked as soon as they appear above the
plucking table the Scirtothrips population will be reduced.
In severe attacks spray the foliage with malathion 50% EC at the rate of 2.4 ml per
litre of water. Apply twice, at an interval of ten days, or spray with Karate 1.75% EC
at the rate of 4 ml per litre of water or Fenitrothion 50% EC at 2 ml per litre of water,
allowing at least one week between spraying and plucking.

(b) Black Thrips –(Heliothrips haemorrboidalis)

Symptoms of attack
Silver patches covered with black spots appear on the underside of mature leaves
(Plate VI:12) In severe infestation both sides of the leaf are attacked and immature
leaves may be damaged. The insect is dark brown or black, l.5 mm long, with whitish
legs, antennae and wings.(Figure VI:4). Eggs are laid on the leaves.

Figure VI: 4
An Adult Heliothrips haemorrhoidalis
Control
Attacks often die away naturally in wet weather. In Meru district of Kenya where
severe infestations of black thrips are prevalent, excellent control is reported from a
single application of Fenitrothion. Spray the foliage with Fenitrothion 50% EC at the
rate of 2 ml per litre of water. Or spray with Karate 1.75% EC at the rte of 4 ml per
litre of water. Allow a minimum of one week between spraying and plucking.
Thrips become noticeable again about three months after spraying, but if
satisfactory rains occur they may not build up in sufficient numbers to justify a
further spray for several months.
(xiii) Helopeltis – (Helopeltis schoutedeni) (Reuter)
Mosquito bug belongs to a group of insects in the order Hemiptera commonly known as bugs. They
feed on young tender shoots causing serious damage to tea.

Symptoms of attack
Dark brown spots, up to 4 mm diameter, appear on the youngest leaves and shoots (Plate VI :13).
These spots exude moisture from a central puncture when fresh. As the growing tissue expand, the
spots turn black and produce leaf and stem distortions. If the infestation is severe, green shoots are
attacked; this can lead later to branch canker.
The pest is a sucking insect up to l.25 cm long and is red in colour with black wings.

Control
Spray the foliage with Karate 1.75% EC at the rate of 4 ml/litre of water. Allow at least one week
between spraying and plucking.

(xiv) Ants
Gramatogaster dohrni
They do not damage tea directly but are a nuisance to workers. Some species construct nests on tea
bushes using the leaves and ends up defoliating the tea.

Control
To control the ants, destroy the nest and spray the nest and affected bushes with Karate 1.75% EC
at the rate of 3 ml/litre of water.

(xv) Termites
Microtermes natalensis - Live wood termites
Pseudocanthotermes militaris
Termites are generally known as "white ants" because of their general resemblance in form and
habits to the true ants, but these insects belongs to another order. Termites are highly organised
social insects, living in colonies. They attack both living and dead wood.
Termites occur most frequently on recently established plantings. Plants wilt and die; the stem
beneath the soil surface is ring-barked or the entire root system may be destroyed. Older plants
may be stripped of leaves. Earthen tubes are generally present on the main stem and sometimes
also on branches (Plate VI :14).
Pre-treatment attention: Dead wood and snags, and hollowed-out branches should be removed
and the cut surface covered with protective paint (copper in raw linseed oil).

Control
Termites attack young plants through the soil. To control them effectively the soil around the plants
should be sprayed with Dursban 48% EC at the rate of 10 ml per litre of water. Where possible
destruction of termite nests and removal of the queen should be carried out. For scavenging termites,
in addition to spraying, the mounds should be located and after removing the top treat with Dursban
at the rate of l0 ml/litre of water.
Note: All chemical rates have been given in small quantities per litre of water because in most cases
a few bushes are affected by disease or pest.
 vi:1 vi.2

vi.3
vi.4

vi.5
vi.6

Plate vi.1. Red crevice mite Brevipalpus

phoenicis damage.
Plate vi.2. Red Spider mite (Oligonychus
coffeae) damage.
Plate vi.3. Purple mite (Calacarus
carinatus) damage.
Palte vi.4 Citrus aphid (Toxoptera aurantii)
damage.
Plate vi.5 Fried egg scales (Aspidiotus spp.
) damage.
vi.7 Plate vi.6 Inset. Chaffer Grub (Schizonycha
sp.) and damage.
Plate vi.7. Inset. Tea root weevil
(Aperitmetus brunneus) and damage.
 Vi:9
Vi:8

vi:10 Vi:11

Vi:13

Vi:12
Plate vi.8. Kangaita weevil (Entypotrachelus
meyeri ) damage.
Plate vi.9. Stinging caterpillars (Parasa vivida)
Plate vi.10. Tobacco cricket (Brachytrypes
membranaceus)
Palte vi.11 Yellow tea thrips (Scirtothrips
Kenyensis) damage.
Plate vi.12.Black tea thrips (Heliothrips
haemorrboidalis).
Plate vi.13. Mosquito bug (Helopetis
Vi:14 schoutedeni) damage.
Plate vii.14. Termite damage on tea.
WEED CONTROL
(a) Weed control in young tea
The large area of soil exposed to full sunlight together with the fragility of young plants
makes the control of weeds in young tea more difficult than in mature tea. Complete weed
control is particularly desirable in young tea as the check of growth by diversion of water
and nutrients to weeds can delay appreciably the time to start harvesting the crop. As the
conditions are favourable for weed growth weed control in young tea is an essential
mandatory operation compared to that in mature tea. Removing weeds by implements of any
type (cheel hoe, jembe, fork jembe etc) inevitably results in heavy damage to roots and loss
of both tea plants and nurse crops, so the use of any implement should be discouraged.
A circle around each young tea plant of at least 40 cm diameter must be kept completely
clear of weeds. The only safe way to do this is for weeds within this area to be pulled out
individually by hand. As weeds are pulled out, they should be put into a sack and carried off
the field. If left in the field some will strike roots and grow again.
The ground outside the circle around each plant should be covered with a nurse crop such
as oats. This crop, when cut and laid down, will act as mulch and also reduce weed growth
but some weeds will inevitably appear. These can be removed by hand along with oats too
close to the tea plants or it may be convenient to control them with paraquat (gramoxone), at
the rate of 310 ml of the product in 124 litres of water per hectare. Paraquat will check the
growth of oats but will not kill them unless applied very frequently in heavy doses.
Herbicide damage to tea plants can be prevented by shielding the plants when spraying.
This can be done successfully in a number of ways. A piece of polythene sheet can be held
around each plant by one man while another man is spraying the weeds. A four-gallon (20
litre) tin (debe) cut into halves or a cone made from any stiff material, which is easily dropped
to cover individual plants, can be used by one man who does the spraying as well. The cones,
if made from material of sufficient gauge and rigidity, have proved to be simple and effective.
When spraying any herbicide, it is important to minimise drift to the young plants which
are not protected. A flood jet at reduced pressure gives a coarser spray which is less easily
carried by wind. Alternatively, a Dribble-bar attached to a pressure sprayer produces coarse
drops and has been used successfully. Always avoid spraying under very windy conditions.
It is essential to repeat weeding rounds, whatever method of control is employed, after a
short interval so that weeds which have regrown are removed before they have a chance to
seed or grow extensive root systems. The interval of rounds will vary; it may be as short as
one week or as long as eight weeks and will depend on soil conditions, weed flora and
climatic conditions. This must remain flexible and local management will need to exercise
judgement continuously on this point. An inadequate number of weeding rounds at long
intervals, whatever method is employed, is a complete waste of money.
A persistent herbicide sprayed over fields of young tea will prevent seedlings of many
weeds from growing. Simazine is the only herbicide that can be considered in this respect,
but it must be used with caution as young tea plants have on occasions been damaged by
simazine. Dalapon must not be used on tea under two years old. Where perennial weeds such
as sedges, couch or Kikuyu grass are the problem, glyphosate (roundup) can be used
effectively. The other herbicides which can be considered for young tea under two years old
are fluozifop-butyl (fusilade), oxyfluorfen (goal 2E), kamata, and basta. Again in all cases
precautions should be taken to protect the young plants when spraying herbicides.

(b) Weed control in mature tea

Weed control must be planned as a complete programme. Only by making use of all
suitable methods and using these at the correct time will a continuous reduction in weeds
be obtained at a cost which will fall as time goes on.
It is now established in many areas that there is considerable benefit from an annual
application of a persistent herbicide. This largely prevents growth of weeds from seed.
However, there is no herbicide at present available which will control all weed species. Also,
regrowth from larger roots or other soil borne propagules is not easily controlled. The use of
a persistent herbicide, therefore, will not give complete absence of weeds until the next
application. Weeds will reappear and these must be dealt with in other ways. If this regrowth
of weeds is not kept under control, the weed species which are unaffected by the persistent
herbicide will take advantage of the lack of competition and cover the ground.
Weeds which appear after the application of a persistent herbicide must be killed when
they are small. This can be done in either of two ways; by hand weeding or by killing them
with a contact or translocated herbicide. Presently, the persistent herbicides are less used in
tea as new and more effective translocated herbicides come on the market.
When control measures are due, the choice of method will depend upon the conditions
prevailing at the time. The interval between the occasions of clearing will vary widely and
will depend upon size of tea plants, soil, weed population and weather conditions. Soil
disturbance during weeding should be kept to a minimum as soil brought up from deeper
horizons brings up fresh supply of weed seeds. Tea roots will be damaged, reducing the
nutrient uptake of the bushes and making points where Armillaria or any other soil borne
pathogens can enter.
The key to effective control is to deal with the weeds before they seed.

Perennial grasses
The effect of deep-rooted perennial grasses, such as Digitaria scalarum (couch or lumbugu),
is very severe on crops. They have such an adverse effect on the growth of tea plants that
only satisfactory control is complete eradication. They must be treated as a problem largely
independent of the normal control of weeds. If the softer annual weeds are kept to a
minimum, patches of couch are more easily seen and dealt with.
Removal of perennial weeds by hand is not satisfactory. It is limited, as small pieces of
roots not removed will grow. Chemical treatments are generally very effective and a number
of herbicides are available for this purpose.
(c) Translocated herbicides
1. Dalapon (Dowpon)
For a long time, dalapon was the only herbicide of greatest value for perennial weed control
in tea and is readily available in several proprietary forms.

Rate
The normal application rate of dalapon is 5½kg per hectare in 250 litres of water. The
chemical is largely taken up by the leaves of the plants so that it should be sprayed only on
to growing weeds. It is most effective when the weeds are growing vigorously; slashing of
the weeds to promote regrowth before spraying is often worthwhile.
As the herbicide is taken up relatively slowly by the plant, dry weather is required
otherwise rain will wash the dalapon away before it has time to be completely absorbed.
Preferably, there should be 48 hours without rain after application. If the foliage is damp, the
application rate should be increased to 8½kg per hectare.
Any regrowth six to eight weeks after application should be treated again. Severe
infestations of couch may need several treatments for complete eradication.
Dalapon should be kept away from tea leaves as far as possible since it will scorch them.
Applied to couch on the ground at the rates recommended, dalapon will not affect mature
tea. Local over-dosing must be avoided as this will affect tea severely. Dalapon does not
persist in the soil for more than six to eight weeks.

2. Glyphosate (Roundup)
Glyphosate, a translocated herbicide which is more effective than dalapon, is now widely
used for weed control in tea.

Rates
Glyphosate kills a wide variety of annual and perennial grasses and broad-leaf plants. It is
rapidly translocated from aerial parts to underground roots, rhizomes or stolons of perennial
weeds. Leaf symptoms appear within 7 to 14 days after spraying and complete desiccation
usually occurs within 30 days. Visible effects are a gradual wilting and yellowing of the
plants which advances to complete browning and deterioration of plant tissues.
The recommended rate of glyphosate in controlling weeds in tea is 2-4 litres of product
per hectare. The water volume should be between 200 and 600 litres per hectare. The
optimum environmental conditions for glyphosate are high relative humidity, temperature
and light intensity, at the time of application; no rainfall within 6 hours, low temperature plus
high relative humidity and light intensity, after spraying, for long-lasting weed control.
Vegetative development at application time is very important to get optimum translocation
to the underground parts of plants. Hence, a good coverage of leaves is essential for
realisation of full efficacy of the chemical. Slashing before application without allowing
regrowth decreases glyphosate performance because the area of spray reception is reduced.
Cultivation prior to spray will also reduce glyphosate activity since some of underground
propagules will not have aerial parts. Tillage will also prevent adequate translocation by
breaking the underground vegetative system. Glyphosate should be kept away from growing
tea shoots. Other formulations of glyphosate marketed as Kamata and Touchdown as well
as Basta ( Ammonium-DL-homoalanin-4-yl (Methyl) phosphinate) are useable as substitutes
for round-up. Touchdown, a plyphoste based herbicide can be used as a substitute to round
up.
3. Fluazifop-butyl (Fusilade)
Another highly active, selective herbicide for control of grass weeds, except sedges, in broad-
leaved crops including tea is fluazifop-butyl. This herbicide is most affective as a post-weed
emergence application normally in 100 - 800 litres of water per hectare. It is essential to
obtain good cover of weeds and the spray volume should be selected accordingly to achieve
this.

Rate
The recommended rate for annual grasses is 1 to 3 litres of the product per hectare, according
to when the rhizomes have been fragmented by cultivation apply 2 to 4 litres of the product
per hectare and for established perennial grasses apply 4 to 6 litres per hectare. Fluazifop-
butyl can be applied at any time provided that most weeds have emerged and present
sufficient leaf surface for good uptake of the herbicide.
Fluazifop-butyl is quickly absorbed through the leaf surface and translocated to growing
points in the plant. First symptoms are often not evident until a week after application
although growth usually ceases within 48 hours. Nodes and growing points become necrotic;
young leaves show chlorosis followed by necrosis; there is a general loss of vigour and often
pigment changes that are normally associated with senescence appear. Death is usually
complete after 3 to 5 weeks.
Fluazifop-butyl remains active in the soil, up to 4 months after the application of high rates.
This product has so far proved chemically and biologically compatible with a number of
established herbicides although field data are, at present, limited.
As in the case of other herbicides, precautions should be taken to protect tea bushes when
applying fluazifop-butyl.

(d) Persistent herbicides

Only two persistent herbicides are recommended for use in tea. These are simazine and
diuron.

1. Simazine (Gesatop, Primatols)

Simazine controls most broad-leaved weeds and some grasses. It acts on very small seedlings
by uptake from the ground only. It has no effect at all on larger plants. It does not affect
mature tea, even at large over-dose rates. Simazine requires rain to wash it into the soil after
application, preferably at 10 mm within 48 hours. Without rain, simazine is lost very quickly.

Rate
The normal application rate of simazine is 4.4 kg of the product per hectare.

2. Diuron (Reglone)
Diuron controls more species of weeds than simazine. It acts on very small seedlings but
does also have limited effect on larger plants. Preferably rain should follow application but
this is not as vital as with simazine. If Diuron comes in contact with tea leaves it causes them
to lose colour and scorch. No noticeable visual effects have been seen on tea from ground
applications at the recommended rates. Heavy over-dosing will affect tea severely.
Karmex, another form of diuron is applied at the rate of 2.75 kg of the product per hectare.
3. Oxyfluorfen (Goal 2E)
A persistent herbicide, oxyfluorfen, is also useable for weed control in tea. It controls a very
wide variety of weeds. Oxyfluorfen is usually applied pre- or post - emergence of weeds. It
kills by contact of the emerging weeds with the thin layer of the herbicide on the soil surface.
Foliar or root uptake is negligible.

Rate
The herbicide is applied at rates ranging from 0.28 to 2.25 kg of product per hectare.
Before applying the herbicide, the soil must be clean weeded and clear of excessive trash
and organic matter. The herbicide is more effective if sprayed on moist soil. After application
of the herbicide, the soil must not be disturbed or cultivated; doing so greatly reduces or
eliminates the herbicidal activity of oxyfluorfen. If weed patches emerge after treatment, a
post-emergence application of oxyfluorfen at rates ranging from 0.16 to 0.28 kg of
product/ha along with paraquat at the normal rate may be carried out. Oxyfluorfen has very
desirable synergistic effects with many other herbicides such as paraquat and dalapon.
Persistent herbicides must be applied evenly. In order to ensure this throughout a field each
container of spray solution must be applied to the same number of bushes (see Table VI.1).
The amount of water needed to distribute a persistent herbicide depends on the equipment
used; 280-560 litres per hectare are usual.
As these persistent herbicides generally have no useful effect on standing weeds, field must
be cleaned by hand before application. Alternatively, a contact herbicide such as paraquat
can be added to the spray mixture.

Contact herbicides
Two chemicals of this type are now recommended: Paraquat and diquat.

1. Paraquat (Gramoxone)
Paraquat is absorbed by all green parts of a growing plant. When light reaches the green
parts they are scorched. Paraquat is not absorbed by bark and is completely inactivated
when it reaches the soil; so uptake by roots does not occur. It is absorbed by the plants
very quickly so it can be used effectively in wet weather unless the rain is extremely heavy.
As the rate of action by paraquat depends on light, effects show more quickly in bright
sunlight. The ultimate effect is the same whatever the light intensity. If the chemical falls
on tea leaves they will burn in the same way as on other green parts of the plant. If a large
proportion of the leaves of a bush are scorched in this way, its growth will be severely
retarded.
Rate
Paraquat is normally dissolved in water at a dilution of 1 part in 400 parts of water, i.e. 310
ml of paraquat to 124 litres of water per hectare. The effect of paraquat is enhanced by the
addition of a wetting agent, e.g. Agral 90, NAS or Teepol, in order of preference. The normal
rate of wetting agent is 1 part in 4000 parts of water, i.e. 31 ml to 124 litres of water. Paraquat
(Gramoxone W) includes a wetting agent so there is no need to add a wetting agent when
using this material.

TABLE VI.1: Number of bushes sprayed by 9.1 litres of solution at the rate of 280 litres per
hectare
 Planting Square, rectangular or Triangular planting
distance(cm) contour planting
Bushes/ Bushes/9.1 litres Bushes/ Bushes/ 9.1
hectare mixture hectare litres mixture
121.9 x 61.0 13,448 437
106.7 x 76.2 12,299 400 10,142 330
91.4 x 91.4 11,970 389 13,822 449
106.7 x 82.8 11,184 363
100.0 x 100.0 10,000 325 11,626 378
121.9 x 76.2 10,766 350
106.7 x 91.4 10,254 333
121.9 x 91.4 8,975 292 12,044 391
106.7 x 106.7 8,784 285
152.4 x 61.0 10,757 350
152.4 x 76.2 8,611 280
121.9 x 121.9 6,730 219 7,771 253
137.2 x 137.2 5,312 173 6,134 199
152.4 x 121.9 5,383 175
152.4 x 152.4 4,306 140 4,972 162
182.9 x 182.9 2,989 97 3,452 112

2. Diquat (Reglone)
Diquat is very similar to paraquat but may be a useful alternative if there are broad-leaved
weed species which are not affected by paraquat. It is sold as Reglone which contains 20%
of the active chemical and is used at the same rates as paraquat.
When using these chemicals, they should only be applied to growing weeds. Do not
broadcast on tea leaves. Likewise do not allow the chemicals to get in contact with the lower
branches of the bushes. Since these chemicals kill growing points, they will also kill the
dormant buds on the branches which might result in poor recovery from subsequent pruning.
Leakage from spraying equipment must be repaired immediately. Either of these chemicals
can be added to the water solution of a persistent herbicide at the rates already quoted.
When using chemicals for killing regrowth weeds, occasional plants will be found which
are not affected. These are best removed by hand; if they are not too many the person doing
the spraying can remove them as he passes.

(e) Hand-weeding
The essence of this operation is the removal of young weeds before they seed. Should this
not be possible, the next weeding ought to be done whilst those seedlings which have
germinated since the last weeding are still young. Weeds which have been removed must
have soil shaken off their roots, particularly in wet weather. In no circumstances should
weeds be buried in the soil. Where weed growth is limited, it is sufficient to rake the
vegetation into a bund. Where weed growth is heavy, it is better to carry the material out of
the field.
Conversion of manual weed control to weed control with herbicides
Where it is decided to introduce herbicides into a weed control regime which has hitherto
been completely manual, results will not be satisfactory unless this introduction is carefully
programmed to include manual operations.
Where the weed infestation is very dense, the first operation should be to cut the weeds
down as close to the ground as possible. If this causes a lot of vegetation to fall on the ground
this vegetation should be carried off the field.
Follow cutting-down as soon as possible (within a day or two) with a spray of paraquat.
When the effect of the paraquat reaches its maximum and before any weeds which are
unaffected can seed, clean the weeds manually using a cheel hoe. This should take place
between one and two weeks after the paraquat application. If there is a large amount of
vegetation removed, it is best to carry off the field.
This cleaning must be followed by the application of a persistent herbicide, simazine,
diuron or oxyfluorfen. If the application can be made immediately before weed seedlings
appear, the persistent herbicide may be applied on its own. If weed seedlings have appeared
before the spraying is done, combine paraquat with the persistent herbicide.
The persistent herbicide will now prevent growth of seedlings of soft annual weeds.
Resistant rhizomatous and woody plants will continue to grow. These must be removed
before they are able to become strongly established or seed. Couch, if present, can only be
dealt with by the use of dalapon or glyphosate. The absence of soft weeds at this stage makes
it easy to see and treat it. Other species can be removed by hand or using a contact herbicide.
If a contact herbicide is used, large and tap-rooted plants should be pulled out of the ground
and laid down before spraying. Whether manual or chemical treatments is used, ensure that
weeds are dealt with before they seed.
Where initial weed density is not very high, the early stages of this programme can be
omitted. In this case start with the application of the persistent herbicide at the time of
pruning only.
If a large number of fields have to be brought into a new system, it is better to start on a
limited number, and do these properly, than to attempt a large number and fail, because it is
impossible to carry out the next stage quickly enough. It is inevitable that when changing to
an improved system of weed control, cost will rise initially. However, as the standard of
cleanliness of the field improves, costs should fall to well below the level prior to the
introduction of herbicide.
Weeds resistant to paraquat
When paraquat has been sprayed on a field regularly, weeds which are comparatively
unharmed by paraquat may begin to be noticeable.
These weeds may be resistant to paraquat for one or more of the following reasons:-
1. They have a waxy surface
2. They have hairy surface
3. They have thin stems
4. They regenerate from the roots or base of the stem
In this group are weeds such as Borreria spp, Polygonum spp, etc. To counter these
paraquat resistant weeds, the following actions may be tried:-
1. Use diquat in the same concentration as paraquat
2. Increase the concentration of wetting agent when using Gramoxone W, add
Agrol 90, NAS or Teepol at the rate of 31 ml to 124 litres of water.
3. Remove resistant weeds by hand and carry them away from the field.
 4. Cheel (not in young tea) and restart the paraquat spraying soon after germination.
Make sure that paraquat spraying interval is not extended until the weeds have grown too
large.
Spot spraying
The herbicides, which are taken up by leaves must be sprayed on leaves only so that the
process is one of spot-spraying the weed where it exists. This makes it difficult to control
the application rate. It is important to remember that the application rates quoted for these
herbicides apply only to the area actually sprayed and not the whole field.
When spot-spraying is being carried out it is very easy for the operator to give an
unnecessary large amount of spray solution to individual weeds or patches of weeds. Apart
from being wasteful this local over-dosing of herbicides can damage tea bushes. Use of
the finest spray jet reduces the risk of over-dosing, but the operation needs careful
supervision to avoid herbicide drift to tea bushes. Where the weeds are small, up to 5 cm
tall, spraying until the foliage is thoroughly wet and no more, should give sufficient
herbicide to kill the weeds without great risk of damage to tea. If the weeds are larger, it is
better to cut them down and allow regeneration before spraying.

(f) General precautions when using pesticides

Pesticides can be very dangerous if basic precautions are neglected
These are:-
1. Read the label on the container carefully and follow the instructions.
2. Protective clothing such as goggles, gloves, apron, and boots should be used when
handling and spraying pesticides.
3. The sprayer should wear a label with the name of the pesticide being used so that in
case of accident where the victim is unconscious one would know the chemical
being handled. This will facilitate proper treatment.
4. Smoking or eating should be avoided while handling pesticides.
5. Soap, water and a towel should be kept when mixing and using pesticides.
6. Avoid windy conditions and subsequent spray drifts where possible. Stand up-wind
so that spray drifts or splashes blow away.
7. Maintain application equipment in good condition so that leakage are minimised.
Do not blow clogged nozzles with mouth but clean them with water.
8. After spraying, the contaminated clothing should be removed at once.
9. Wash contaminated clothes and body after work.
10. The remaining chemicals must be marked properly, kept in original containers, and
locked in a secure store.
11. Empty containers must be destroyed away from water sources.

In case of an accident
If a pesticide is ingested accidentally, vomiting should be induced at once if not already
occurring and the patient be sent to the nearest hospital immediately. Vomiting can be
induced by drinking a concentrated mixture of common salt in warm water. In case of skin
contact with pesticides wash off with soap and water immediately and in case of eye contact,
flush out with water for at least 15 minutes then consult a doctor at once.

(g) Herbicide damage

(i) 2,4-D
Mature leaves curl backwards and may twist into a spiral. Young leaves and buds twist
into spirals. There is normally no change of colour of the leaves except some lightening of
the petiole. Young leaves may fall off in cases of extremely concentrated application
levels.
Remedy
None. Unless the application level is extremely high, the bushes will return to
normal in several weeks as this chemical is not persistent.

(ii) Glyphosate
In several cases, young leaves become needle-like and curl when they get into contact with
glyphosate. Even the new leaves which subsequently develop on the directly contacted
shoots display these symptoms which can be visible up to three months after the contact.
Each needle-like leaf persists for a short period and then drops off.
Remedy
None. The bushes recover after some time.

(iii) Dalapon
Chlorosis of interveinal areas of the leaves is followed by browning and scorching. In
severe cases these symptoms spread fully over the leaves which then fall off; also the stem
tips may die back.
Remedy
None. Bushes will recover unless they are completely defoliated as dalapon is not
persistent. Heavy rain may speed recovery by washing excess dalapon away.

(iv) Paraquat
Bright brown scorched patches appear where the chemical has made contact with a leaf.
The affected leaves will fall off if heavily scorched by a large amount of the chemical.

 Remedy
 None. Since no harm is done to the rest of the bush, it will recover by putting out new
shoots and leaves as if it had been pruned. No harm is done apart from a check to growth,
but starch reserves will be reduced so that repeated defoliation will cause a progressive
weakening of the bush.

(v) Diuron
Orange-yellow chlorotic patches appear in the interveinal areas of the leaves turning brown
and scorching. Leaves fall off if a large area is scorched. Younger leaves fall off first
leaving bare stems above the maintenance layer. In extreme cases, the stems die back,
maintenance leaves fall off and the plant dies.
Remedy
None. The bushes will recover if the chemical is not present in a large quantity to
kill them. Recovery will be slow as diuron is persistent in the soil.

(vi) Fluazifop-butyl and oxyfluorfen

Information on the damage of tea bushes caused by these two herbicides is limited. However,
under the recommended rates no visible symptoms have been reported.

(h) Formulations
Pesticides are not sold in pure form. They are mixed with various other materials to make
them convenient and easy for the grower to use. These mixtures are called formulations.

Dusts
These are dry powders containing 10% or less of actual pesticide. They are ready for use and
should be applied using a special dust pump or shaken from a small sack. DO NOT MIX
THEM WITH WATER. Herbicides are not formulated as dusts because of their hazardous
nature.

Wettable Powders (WP)

WP are also dry powders but they contain high concentrations of pesticides (up to 85%).
They should be mixed with water and sprayed on the crop. DO NOT APPLY THEM DRY
AND UNDILUTED AS IF THEY WERE DUSTS. They require continual agitation.

Emulsifiable Concentrates (EC)

EC are liquids which mix with water to form a white milky emulsion. They usually contain
from 25% to 80% active ingredient. They are normally sprayed mixed with water.

Ultra-low-volume (ULV)
ULV formulations are usually solutions of pesticides in a non volatile (non-evaporative)
oil. They do not mix with water and should be applied undiluted. THEY MUST BE
APPLIED USING SPECIAL SPRAY MACHINES WHICH PRODUCE A MIST OF
SMALL DROPS. If applied with ordinary pumps they will burn the plant.

Miscible Liquids (ML)

These are liquid formulations containing a fixed percentage of the active ingredient of the
pesticide which when mixed with water will be completely miscible.
Baits (B)
The active ingredient is mixed with a pest food or attractant.

Fumigants (F)
These are volatile chemicals which liquefy when stored under pressure or inert under
hermetic conditions and are used in confined spaces or in the soil. When applied they form
a gas which will destroy the pest organism.

(i) Chemical toxicity

The toxicity of a pesticide is its ability to cause immediate and severe injury to man and is
expressed as the LD50. The LD50 is the lethal dose required, on average, to kill 50% of the
test batches of animals, when the pesticide is given by mouth (orally).
This is expressed as the amount in milligrams of active ingredient of the nearly pure
pesticide per kilogram of the body weight of the animal (usually the male rat).
 Dermal Toxicity Tests is performed to determine how toxic a compound might be when it
comes in contact with the skin. This includes sensitive areas such as the eyes as well as the
skin.
The lower the LD50, the higher the toxicity and the lesser the safety of the pesticide and
hence, the greater the hazard to human beings.
The following table gives an idea of the toxicity and safety of a pesticide if the oral LD50
and dermal LD50 to rate is known.

ORAL LD50
Value(mg/kg) Toxicity Safety
Less than 50 Extremely high Extremely low
50 - 200 Very high Very low
200 - 500 Slightly toxic Slightly low
500 - 1000 Low High
Greater than 1000 Very low Very high

DERMAL LD50
Value(mg/kg) Toxicity Safety
Less than 200 Very toxic Extremely low
200 - 1000 Slightly toxic Slightly low
1000 - 200 Low High
Over 2000 Very low Very high
The safe handling and use of pesticides require that you know how toxic the pesticide is
(i.e. the LD50), how the product should be handled and what safety measures should be taken
so that the operators and other people concerned in the exercise are not exposed to it.

(k) Safety period

Many pesticides leave a residue in or on the crop which may be harmful to man. A safety
period is always specified for each chemical. This is the minimum period that should elapse
between spraying and plucking. It should be strictly observed.

(i) To calibrate a sprayer

(1) Mark out an area of the crop 10 m by 10 m (=1/100 ha).
(2) Fill sprayer with water
(3) Spray the marked area
(4) Refill the sprayer, noting how many litres of water are needed to restore the original level.
(5) Multiply the amount needed to refill (=the amount sprayed) by 100.
(6) Mix the recommended rate of EC or WP with the calculated volume of water and begin
to spray.

(j)Recommended Pesticides
Pesticide Dilution rate Pest/disease/weeds Safety period
(i)Insecticides
/Acaricides
1.Karate 1.75% EC) 4 ml per litre of water Aphids, mites, Helopeltis, thrips At least 7 days
between
spraying
and plucking
for
manufacture.
2. Dursban 48% EC 10 ml/litre of water Thrips, beetles, termites, scales, At least 14 days
cutworm
3. Malathion (Killpest) 2.4 ml/litre of water Thrips, Helopeltis, scale insects, At least 7 days
50% EC Caterpillars
4. Dicofol (Kelthane) 2.7 gm/litre of water Red spider mite, yellow tea At least 7 days
mite, purple mite (all stages
except eggs).
5. Tedion (Tetradifon) 2gm/10 litres of water Purple mite, red spider, mite At least 14 days
eggs
6. Carbaryl 85% WP 2.4 g/litre of water Soft scales, caterpillars At least 7 days
7. Volaton 0.75% Ready bait – bait Cutworms, crickets Not applied on
broadcasted plants
8. Fenitrothion 50% 2 ml/litre of water Aphids, grasshoppers, thrips, At least 7 days
Helopeltis, scales, beetles,
cutworms
9. Decis 1ml/5 litres of water. Aphids, grasshoppers, thrips, At least 7 days
Helopeltis scale, cutworm
10.Permethrin, 1 ml/litre of water Helopeltis, thips At least 7 days
Cymbush,Ripcord
11. Omite 3 ml/l of water Red crevice mites, Red spider 14
mites, purple mites
12. Murphoil 20 ml/l Scale insects 7
13. Gladiator 10 ml/l Termites, Tobaco crickets 14
(ii) Fungicides
12. Dithane M45 4-6 g/litre of water Grey blight, stem canker At least 7 days
14. Copper, 5-7 g/litre of water Grey blight, brown blight, stem At least 7 days
Benomyl 3-5 g/litre of water canker, Hypoxylong wood rot.
(Benlate)
15. Ridomil 5-10g/l of water Damping off N/A nurseries
(ii) Herbicides
16. Roundup 12-25 ml/litre of water Grasses, sedges and broad Not sprayed on
(Glyphosate) leaves weeds crop plants
17 Touchdown 12-25ml/l of water “ “ “ “ “
(Sulphate)
18. Gramoxone 4-6 ml/litre of water Annual grasses and broad Not sprayed on
(Paraquat) leaved weeds crop plants
19. Diquat (Reglone) 7.6 ml/litre of water Annual grasses and broad Not sprayed on
leaved weeds leaved weeds
crop
20. Dalapon (Dow 10-15 g/litre of water Perennial and Annual grasses Discard first
pon) harvest
 21. Diuron (Karrmx) 2-3 g/litre of water Annual grasses and broad Discard the first
leaved weeds harvest
22. Simazine 5-7 litre of water Annual grasses and broad Discard the first
(Gesatop) leaved weeds harvest
23. Mamba 12-25 ml/l Grasses, sedges and broad Not sprayed on
(glyphosate) leaves weeds crops
24. Kalach 12-25 ml/l Grasses, sedges and broad Not sprayed on
leaves weeds crops
25. Wipeout 25 ml/l Grasses, sedges and broad Not sprayed on
leaves weeds crops
Note: In most cases spot spraying is done on a few bushes in a field. Therefore dilution
rate is preferred to rates/hectare.

(l) Lightning damage

When lightning strikes a field of tea, the lightning heats the soil and may even set fire to a
few bushes at the point. Within a roughly circular area surrounding this point, the leaves of
the tea bushes may wilt and turn brown and in the next few days, all these bushes will die.
Any number ranging from about 10 to over 100 may be affected in this way depending on
the severity of the lightening strike.
Around the perimeter of the affected area, there may be several bushes slightly affected;
the leaves of such bushes may turn yellow but they recover quickly. There may also be some
lines radiating out up to 50 metres or more from the central point of the strike, in which the
leaves of the bushes also turn yellow; these bushes usually recover.
If there are shade tree in the planted area, one of them may be at the centre of the strike;
this tree may be killed, or split open, or even set on fire, but sometimes a shade tree at the
centre of a strike appears to be completely unaffected and continues to grow normally even
though a large number of tea bushes are killed around it.
Within the area affected grasses and weeds which are growing in the tea usually get
killed if the soil water boils. But sometimes the tea bushes may be killed and the
surface-rooting grasses and weeds continue to grow.
Tea bushes which have been killed by lightning should be dug out and as much as possible
their root systems should be removed, as soon as possible, so that they do not become centres
of infection for Armillaria root disease.
It is said that when tea bushes have been killed by lightning, the ground in which they are
growing becomes "sterile" and tea will no longer grow in it. There is no evidence that this is
true, at least, in Kenya. Several cases are known in which bushes killed by lightning have
been removed and the place replanted, and the new bushes are growing normally. It is
thought that the belief may have arisen in places where the upper layers of the soil had
become so depleted of potash that the amount remaining was inadequate for young plants,
out in without fertilizer, to survive.
 Chapter VII

BLACK TEA MANUFACTURING

TECHNOLOGY AND FUEL WOOD
(a) Black tea manufacture
(i) Introduction
The process of tea manufacture, converting plucked green tea leaves into the final
saleable consumable product, is a vital step in the production of black tea. Good
manufacturing practice can produce the best tea from the available good leaf, and hence
realise the best market price. It is important to note, however, that the quality of tea
produced depends on the leaf that is plucked, the type of tea bush, how the leaf is handled,
the time of the day or of the year from prune, the standard of plucking, fertiliser rates and
types.
In the estate sector of the tea industry in Kenya, the whole process of tea production,
from planting to marketing, is in the hands of a single company, and thus the various stages
can be integrated. This is much more difficult in the case of the small holder sector where
a large number of individual farmers are responsible for all stages from planting to
plucking, and then the giant smallholder organisation (KTDA) collects, transports and
manufactures this (necessarily) very mixed leaf. This dichotomy must be borne in mind
whenever considering tea manufacture in Kenya.
The type of tea produced in Kenya must also be considered. It is mostly plain to medium
flavoury tea. This does not indicate that it is tasteless; the term “plain to medium flavoury”
merely indicates that it does not have large amounts of the delicate “flavour” components
found in certain other teas from some other parts of the world at various times of the year.
It instead has the much sought after qualities of strength, brightness, colour and briskness
and in some cases distinct flavour. For this reason, most of the tea produced in Kenya is
by “unorthodox manufacture”. This involves considerably greater maceration of the leaf
than afforded by the “orthodox” methods, which is acceptable, as there is less need to try
to maintain or produce the very delicate flavours associated with some other teas.
Finally, it must be repeated that high quality cannot be created in the factory. The original
leaf determines the maximum quality of tea that can be produced. Poor leaf cannot be made
into good tea, even by the best of factories. Similarly a badly organised factory may
produce poor tea from the best quality leaf.

(ii). Black tea manufacture - the biochemical background

The leaves of a tea plant contain a group of chemical compounds called catechins. The
leaves also contain an enzyme (biological catalyst) called polyphenol oxidase. In healthy
leaves, these components are physically separated and therefore do not interact. When the
tea leaf is processed, the maceration of the leaf disrupts its structure extensively. This
causes the catechins and the enzyme to mix, and if oxygen is present (from the air) then a
series of biochemical reactions commonly referred to as fermentation, take place.
These fermentation reactions lead to the production of mainly two new groups of
compounds, the theaflavins and the thearubigins. The “brightness” and “briskness” of a
tea liquor are thought to be due to theaflavins, and its “strength” (body) and “colour” due
to thearubigins. These two groups of compounds give the characteristic taste of plain black
tea. There are four major theaflavins in black tea with astringencies in the order theaflavin-
3, 3’digallate > theaflavin-3-gallate = theaflavin-3’-gallate > theaflavin. The most
astringent tea is produced when there is high level of total theaflavins and the correct
theaflavin/thearubigins ratio, and/or high levels of the more astringent theaflavins.
Fresh tea leaves also contain protein complexes and free amino acids. The protein
complexes breakdown into simple amino acids that are further oxidised via
decarboxylation and deamination reaction to aldehydes during fermentation. The
aldehydes can remain as final products in the black tea or are further reduced to alcohols
or oxidised to carboxylic acids. The aldehydes, alcohols and carboxylic acids form part of
the volatile flavour components (VFC) of tea. There are unsaturated fatty acids in the fresh
tea shoots. Upon maceration, the fatty acids break down to aliphatic aldehydes through
lipoxygenase-catalysed oxidation. The aldehydes are either reduced to primary aliphatic
alcohols or oxidised to carboxylic acids to form part of the VFC. Most of the compounds
imparting green grassy odour to black tea (Group I VFC) are products of fatty acids
degradation.
There are terpene glycosides in fresh tea shoots, which are hydrolysed to terpene
alcohols during withering and fermentation. Carotenoid compounds in green leaf break
down during fermentation and firing to form volatile terpenoid compounds. Most of the
terpene alcohols and terpenoid compounds impart pleasant aromatic flavour to black tea
and form part of what is referred to as the Group II VFC. Some of these chemicals are
retained during the drying of tea. Drying terminates all chemical reactions and removes
moisture so that the tea can be stored in a stable form, which can be made available to the
market.
The chemical reactions mentioned above are sensitive to a whole range of factors, some
of which can be controlled in the factory or in the field. Several of these factors are
discussed below.

iii) Factors influencing chemical quality characteristics of black tea

The amount of catechins
Generally, the more the amount of catechins present, the more theaflavins and thearubigins
will be produced. The youngest shoots of the bush (two and a bud) contain the most
catechins, the amount decreasing as the shoot part gets older. That is why the best tea is
made from the youngest shoots. The amount of catechins varies with, for example, the time
of day, the time of year, the prevailing and previous weather conditions, and the clones.
There are six major catechins present in the green tea leaf. These are (+) catechin, (-)
epicatechin, (-) epigallocatechin (+) gallocatechin, (-) epicatechin gallate and (-)
epigallocatechin gallate.

The ratio of individual catechins

The proportions of each of the six major catechins in the leaf have important effects on the
relative amounts of theaflavins and thearubigins produced and, hence on the quality of the
made tea. Of vital importance is the composition of the individual catechins leading to
formation of high amounts of gallated theaflavins. The same factors i.e. time/season and
clonal variety which affect the amount of catechins can also affect the ratio of gallated to
non-gallated theaflavins. These two factors are not under the control of the factory.
However, the tea grower can influence these factors by using proven clones, practising the
recommended husbandry practices and maintenance of good plucking standards. The
growing conditions in Kenya are such that the leaf tends to have a reasonable balance of
catechins all year round.

Aroma precursors
The production of aromatic black tea is more dependent on the amounts of precursors
present for the relevant VFC. Generally, the total amount of VFC affects the aroma of
black tea less than the ratio of the Group II VFC (sum of those volatiles imparting nice,
flowery and fruity smell) to Group I VFC (sum of volatiles imparting green grassy aroma).
This ratio is referred to as Flavour Index (FI). The amount of Group II VFC is affected by
the amounts of terpene glycosides, amino acids, carotenes and enzymes involved in
converting these precursors to the VFC. Also, some of the VFC from the precursors exist
in fresh leaf as primary products and their levels also affect the sum of Group II VFC. The
production of the Group I VFC is dependent on the amounts of unsaturated fatty acids and
amino acids in the tea leaves, and the activities of the enzymes responsible for their
degradation. Generally, the tea growing environment, agronomic and processing
procedures, will affect the aroma of black tea.

Fermentation temperature
It has been shown that high fermentation temperatures (i.e. 25C or over) produce black
teas which have less theaflavins, more thearubigins and lower flavour index, and usually
of a lower quality. It is therefore commercially advantageous to control fermentation
temperature by installing cooling equipment. Since temperatures within tea growing areas
of Kenya are usually not very high, use of water cooled, humidified air would suffice
during hot seasons.

Fermentation duration
Several methods have been proposed to follow the progress of fermentation so as to stop
it at the optimum duration. Rapid methods have been developed for the estimation of
theaflavins in fermenting “dhool”, and it has been suggested that these can be used to
determine when to terminate fermentation. It has been found that these techniques are not
particularly useful in Kenya, due to the nature of the Kenyan leaf and Kenyan fermentation
techniques.
Experiments at the Foundation have shown that sensory evaluation of tea at the dryer
mouth is the most appropriate method of assessing optimum fermentation time, and indeed,
this method enables the factory manager to make tea suitable for the intended market. The
varied growing conditions and fermentation practices generate a very broad peak of
optimum fermentation time, especially when “dhool” is fermented at low temperatures,
and there is considerable leeway on how long the “dhool” can be fermented. As a general
rule, shorter fermentation durations produce brisker, brighter and more aromatic black teas,
while longer fermentation time produces thicker and more coloury black teas. However, if
fermentation duration is too long, the black teas become muddy in taste, whereas if
fermentation duration is too short, then greenish black teas are produced.
Aeration during fermentation
Supply of oxygen from the atmosphere is essential for successful fermentation.
Consequently, if leaf is fermented other than in very shallow layers, air must be forced
through. This air should be cool and humid. This helps in keeping the temperature down
and in preventing drying of the fermented leaf, which otherwise would inhibit the chemical
processes that occur during fermentation.

Firing
This is the stage that halts most of the chemical processes of tea manufacture, and gives a
stable, storable product. During the initial stages of drying, the chemical reactions of
fermentation continue. They only stop once enough water has been removed or sufficiently
high temperature has been attained to inactivate polyphenol oxidase and, thus, prevent
further reactions. Prior to this point, there are some changes in the levels of the theaflavins
and thearubigins, then finally a stable product is formed at 3.6% moisture. Very fast
moisture loss during firing or incorrect temperature settings of the dryer can lead to case
hardening, producing black tea which are wet inside the tea particles. Such teas deteriorate
(lose quality) very fast upon storage. Because these reactions occur in the initial stage of
drying, it is important at this stage to have the correct temperatures and airflow, and to
minimise unwanted chemical changes. Excessive temperatures towards the end of firing
produce “burnt” product. Even firing can only be maintained if inlet and outlet
temperatures and leaf loading are kept constant.

(iv) Tea manufacturing stages

A plan of a “typical” Kenyan tea factory is shown in Figure VII.1. that gives an idea of
actual factory layout. In most cases the withering section is placed as floor(s) of its own
on top of the processing section, or is put up as a separate building. This is because
withering requires large space to accommodate leaf in withering troughs. In more modern
factories, part of the withering section having troughs instead of leaf holding tanks for
achievement of chemical wither. In such factories at peak crop, withering is either done
using the holding tanks only or through a two-stage process. This has been explained more
fully under withering.

1. Leaf collection
The manufacturing process starts the moment tea leaves are plucked. The plucked leaves
start to wither and at this point inadequate handling and transport will result in bruising of
the leaf, heat development, initiation of uncontrolled fermentation leading to reduced
quality. Care should be taken when transporting green leaf to avoid heat accumulation
and bruising. The use of suspended gunny sacks carrying about 10 kg of green leaf usually
allows enough ventilation to avoid heat accumulation during transport from field to
factory, provided the leaf does not over stay in the field or in the transport vessel. Where
transportation to the factory can be done within an hour, leaf can be transported in any
other convenient containers.The standard of plucking also affects the quality of made tea.
A finer plucking, i.e. “two and a bud” standard will produce a higher quality tea that will
fetch better price. It is important to have a constant supply of leaf with consistent plucking
standard so that the factory does not have to keep changing the manufacturing conditions.
The estate sector is able to control the flow of leaf into a factory very effectively.
However, in the smallholder sector leaf supply is erratic and this causes problems in
maintaining consistent standards of manufacture. If the in coming leaf is “two leaves and
a bud”, there is generally more leeway in manufacture. Withering times, fermentation
times and drying times will not need to be so precise as in the manufacture of the coarser
leaf.

2. Withering
This is an aspect of tea manufacture that is very expensive in terms of space, time, energy
and labour utilisation. Unfortunately it is also one of the least understood processes in
black tea processing. Withering is presumed to occur after the freshly plucked shoots are
placed in the withering trough and air is blown through them for 14 - 18 hours. During this
process, the most noticeable change is moisture loss which is accompanied by cell wall
permeability changes which make subsequent maceration easy. This process of moisture
loss and cell wall permeability changes is called physical wither.
However, less obvious is the chemical wither. This starts immediately the leaf is
detached from the bush and chemical reactions involved in senescence start. The chemical
wither reactions include the changes in the activity and nature of polyphenol oxidase (the
enzyme responsible for turning green tea leaf to brown-black) hydrolysis of terpenoid
glycosides to release terpenes, breakdown of proteins to amino acids, hydrolysis of lipids
to free fatty acids, and breakdown of carotenes to simple terpenes. Although these changes
mainly benefit black tea aroma, they also affect plain black tea quality parameters.
Chemical withering is mandatory for production of high quality black teas. However, it is
very difficult to control chemical wither duration in a commercial factory processing
situation. Optimal chemical wither varies from 6 to 20 hours. Shorter chemical wither
times produce green and harsh black teas, while longer withering durations result in dull
black teas with low sensory evaluation.
In Kenya, plain teas are produced during the peak crop periods, while flavoury black
teas are produced mainly from clonal leaf from some areas of the country during the slow
growth (low crop) seasons. Plain teas were presumed to benefit only from physical
withering. However, it is now known that both plain and flavoury black teas are affected
by physical wither. Hard physical withers (high moisture loss i.e. below 72% moisture
content) enhance the quality of the production of flavoury teas. However, for plain teas,
hard physical wither reduces the levels of some plain tea quality parameters i.e. theaflavins,
brightness and thearubigins. Thus, plain black teas benefit from controlled physical wither,
the quality actually deteriorates when too much moisture is lost from the leaf.
Physical wither enhances factory throughput. The softly withered leaf is bulky and this
slows down rotorvane output, and dryers may not cope with excess moisture in the leaf.
Consequently, withered leaf should have only up to 72% moisture content if the dryers are
to give optimum throughput.
During periods of increased tea production, many factories usually face constraints in
processing especially in the withering section. Studies have shown that the two-stage
withering technique where chemical and physical withers are done at distinct stages make
black teas with similar quality as black teas made through the conventional one-stage
withering technique where physical and chemical withers are done concurrently. However,
in a two-stage wither, chemical wither must be done before physical wither and during the
process, black tea quality can be enhanced by using cold air to achieve physical wither.
This knowledge has led to development of tanks which occupy less space but hold more
leaf and use less electricity, as suitable vessels for chemical wither. Where tanks are not
installed, factories can alternate over-loaded withering troughs with normal loads.
Upon achieving chemical wither, the normal-loaded troughs can be subjected to forced
physical wither using high speed (velocity) air current. After physical wither has been
achieved the leaf is removed for maceration, while the leaf in the over-loaded troughs is
sub-divided into those emptied troughs, then subjected to forced physical wither. This
process allows the factory to hold up to 35% more leaf in the factory than it could under
traditional trough withering system.
The constraint in withering space is more acute during the peak crop seasons when the
black teas produced are generally plain. Such teas can be manufactured without quality
loss if chemical withering time is reduced to as short as six hours. The reduction of
chemical withering time will permit factories to start processing early and, thus, create
extra processing time. Additionally, the same enables the factory to use one withering
trough more than once in a day, thus enabling the factory to hold more leaf.
Since leaf processed during peak crop periods produces plain black tea, and because for
such teas softer withers make superior teas, factories which can cope with soft withers
without suffering reduction in throughput at the rotorvanes or dryers as a result of some
engineering modifications, can use tank wither only. In such manufacturing processes, all
moisture is removed during drying. Due to the increased surface areas of macerated leaf,
energy may be more efficiently utilised as moisture losses through evaporation are
achieved faster. Economic survey has shown that it is more cost effective to install some
withering tanks in factories than to build new factories or expand old factories with
traditional withering techniques.

3. Leaf maceration
Almost all tea produced in Kenya is by unorthodox maceration, usually using one
rotorvane and three Crush, Tear and Curl (CTC) machines in series or one rotorvane and
a Lawrie Tea Processor (LTP). This is most suitable because the teas produced are mostly
plain teas, and it is not necessary to preserve all delicate flavour components.
Teas made by unorthodox maceration are generally much smaller in particle size than
those made by traditional (orthodox) maceration, and they give brighter, brisker and more
coloured infusions. This is also of advantage to the tea market which has moved towards
tea bags and “quick brew teas” over the last twenty years. It seems probable that more and
more teas from Kenya will be processed using unorthodox techniques, with only a small
percentage of specialist tea utilising orthodox methods of maceration.
The object of the maceration step is to mix up the catechins and the enzyme in the tea
leaf tissues, and to allow free access of oxygen. This allows fermentation to proceed,
producing theaflavins and thearubigins respectively. In delicate flavoury teas, other
chemical reactions may be of equal importance, but this is not thought to be the case in
Kenya plain teas. Thus it follows that rapid, severe maceration will cause maximum leaf
disruption and lead to a finished product that has the characteristics desired of Kenya tea.
The first step in maceration is usually the use of a rotorvane. It consists of a cylinder
containing a rotating central shaft. Spiral vanes on the shaft propel the leaf along the
cylinder, and distortion and twisting of the tea leaf tissues occur by the rubbing and
shearing action of the leaf against projections coming out of the cylinder casing. This
whole process is designed to disrupt the cellular structure of the leaf.
After rotorvane maceration, leaf usually passes through a series of CTC machines. These
machines consist of two rollers rotating at different speeds in opposite directions. Because
the surface of the rollers is serrated, their rotation in opposite direction produces more leaf
cellular disruption by crushing and stretching and cutting it into small particles.
The LTP is an alternative to CTC, and may be used in conjunction with a rotorvane. It
is based on the principle of a hammer mill, with the rotating hammers disintegrating the
leaf very quickly. In some factories this is considered sufficient for fermentation, but in
others an extra cut with a CTC, usually in the middle of fermentation, is thought to be of
advantage.
The net result of these maceration processes is to produce small particles of leaf and stalk
that have had their internal structure broken down to allow air to easily reach the internal
structure of the leaf, leading to even fermentation. The macerated leaf is known as “dhool”.

4 Fermentation
This is the stage of manufacture where the major chemical (rather than physical) changes
occur. In essence, fermentation requires allowing oxygen to permeate the macerated leaf
so that the endogenous catechins can be converted through enzyme-catalysed reactions to
theaflavins and thearubigins. Some of the aroma compounds are also formed during
fermentation.
Originally, the procedure was for leaf to be left in thin layers on slabs, so that air would
penetrate naturally. However, oxygen requirement of leaf macerated by unorthodox means
is much higher than at processed by orthodox means. This led to the use of air forced
through the fermenting dhool to increase the oxygen level available for fermentation. The
air also helps cool the dhool, as the chemical reactions of fermentation generate heat.
The commonest fermentation system in Kenya utilises George-Wiliamsons (G.W.)
trolleys. These have a perforated metal base with a plenum chamber underneath. After
loading with “dhool”, the G.W. trolley is then attached to a duct with humidified air forced
through its plenum chambers and hence through dhool, thus aerating the fermenting leaf.
Because the air is humidified, the fermenting dhool does not dry out. It is possible that
humidification could be dispensed with at the later stages of fermentation, causing a slight
loss of moisture from the dhool, and reducing the load on the dryer. At these later stages
there are less chemical reactions generating heat and oxygen demand is lower.
The second effect of humidification is that of temperature control. Use of the correct
temperatures for fermentation is very important. The reason for this lies in the nature of
the biochemical reactions producing theaflavins and thearubigins. Increasing the
temperature does not produce the same result in a shorter time. Higher temperatures favour
the production of thearubigins, thus producing a strong, coloured tea that can easily turn
out flat and muddy. Lower fermentation temperature on the other hand, favour the
production of theaflavins, higher flavour index and brighter coloured teas. Thus
temperature control can change the type of tea produced. It is envisaged that, in the future
when these reactions are better understood, it may be possible to change the temperature
regime of fermentation to produce exactly the sort of tea that is required by the market.
The fermentation of dhool in deep fermenting beds can easily lead to the formation of
“balls” of dhool, which in turn lead to an uneven fermentation. This has resulted in many
factories using a mid-fermentation ball break, although doubt has been expressed at its
usefulness. While there is often no detectable difference between teas that have or have
not received such a ball break, it is still a useful precaution for those times when processing
conditions are not ideal.
A more recent development is the use of continuous fermentation machines. There are a
host of different designs, but at the moment there are three basic types:-

The Moving Belt Fermenter.

Dhool is fed onto the first of a series (usually 3 or 4) of variable speed moving belts, usually
with humidified air blowing through. Transfer from one belt or from one part of the belt
to the next can be accompanied by ball-breaking, and fermentation time controlled by the
speed of the belt.

Trough fermenter. [Linsay Fermenter]

The dhool is fed into a trough and moved along by longitudinal or transverse rotating
screws or vanes. The turning of the dhool allows aeration and also prevents ball formation.

Fixed Bed Fermenters.

The dhool is fed into a trough that has a perforated base plate through which air is blown.
The dhool is then mechanically dragged along the length of the trough.

5 Drying
This is the process that stops fermentation and produces a stable product of low moisture
content that can be shipped and endure storage. Changes do occur in black tea after drying,
but they are small and have negligible effect on tea quality if drying is done well. In
essence, the process of drying tea consists of exposing the tea to a flow of hot air.
Traditionally (in a conventional dryer) the system is designed such that the driest tea is
exposed to the air first, and wettest tea (straight from fermentation) last. This is usually
achieved by having the tea pass on a belt through the same stream of air 4 to 6 times, with
the wettest tea farthest away from the air inlet. This allows the maximum utilisation of the
air, but recycling is not possible because of moisture pickup.
A recent development in drying technology is the advent of the fluid bed dryers. In this
form of drying the tea enters a horizontal tunnel, the base of which is a perforated plate.
Hot air is blown vertically through this plate, and the “dhool” forms a “fluid bed” i.e. it is
suspended in the fluidising hot air. This not only gives rapid, even drying, but a
combination of the air pressure and decline in leaf density forces the drying tea along the
tunnel, thus removing the need for a moving tray. There are various advantages to this
system. Moving parts are few leading to easier maintenance. The exhaust air from the end
of the tunnel can re-cycled at the beginning of the tunnel, thus saving on fuel.
Considerable fibre can be extracted during drying using a cyclone. Finally, the tea
produced has a greater bulk density; therefore more mass can be packed in a standard
container. As shipping costs depend on volume, not weight, shipping costs are reduced.
Fluid bed dryers are slowly replacing conventional dryers in the Kenyan tea factories.
The source of fuel for dryers is a problem. Due to recent increases in the price of oil,
wood is favoured by the estate sector. This is much more difficult to achieve in the
smallholder sector as most factories in this sector have problems obtaining sufficient wood
fuel. Consequently oil-fired boilers are mostly used, resulting in increased production
costs.
Based on current estimates, about 10% of the production cost of tea is the cost of fuel
wood. If this is replaced by oil, this figure can rise to 35%. The latter also results in a loss
of valuable foreign exchange. It is possible that in the future, a considerable proportion of
the energy required in tea production could be supplied by solar energy collectors built
into factories. This would release land currently used for fuel wood for more productive
purposes, and reduce the expenditure on oil imports.

6. Sorting
After drying, the fibre is removed from the tea before it is graded by size. This process is
known as sorting. The main grades, which are also called primary grades and comprise
between 85-95% of the tea are fibre free, are sold at much higher prices than the fibrous
off grades. The grade distribution as ratio of primary to secondary grades, which affects
the total income of the factory is heavily influenced by the original plucking standard, with
coarser plucking leading to more secondary grades. The size distribution can also be
manipulated by adjustments of CTC settings so that the factory maximises on the grades
it sells best.
7. Shipping
Most tea is transported from the producing country to the consuming country which may
be thousands of kilometres apart by road and sea. This means that the packaging must be
designed to maintain the quality of the tea during transportation of about 3 months and
beyond. The two major factors to be considered in designing the packaging material are
the prevention of moisture uptake (to prevent mould growth and tea going off) and the
prevention of taints.
Traditionally, this has been achieved by the use of wooden tea chests lined with
aluminium foil. There are however, moves in various parts of the world to replace these
chests. Not only are chests expensive and non-reusable containers, but they consume large
amounts of wood in their production. This is a great disadvantage economically and a
major environmental problem.
The replacement for the tea-chest is a polyethylene or aluminium foil lined, multi-wall
paper sack. The sack is an effective barrier to moisture and taint, and lends itself to
palletisation for transport in containers. The sack also costs less than half the price of a tea
chest. It is also possible that sacks can be used with slip-sheets, thus allowing more tea to
be shipped per container. Use of this system could result in a considerable saving in
packaging costs, especially if tea is containerised at the factory.
b) Chemistry of tea quality
(i) Scientific analyses of made tea
As in other food and beverage industries, attempts are being made to develop scientific
methods of analyses to determine the “quality” of tea. The idea is to discover objective,
reproducible tests to support (but not replace) the more subjective estimates of the tea
taster.
There is much international collaboration and discussion on this matter, and it is possible
that, in the future, scientific analyses will be incorporated into some form of a Minimum
Standards Agreement. However, much more work needs to be done before any
international agreement is likely.

(ii) Details of reactions involving catechins during fermentation.

The six major catechins in fresh tea leaves can be divided into two groups. The simple
catechins are catechin ( C ), epicatechin (EC), and epicatechin gallate (ECG). The
gallocatechins are gallocatechin (GC), epigallocatechin (EGC), and epigallocatechin
gallate (EGCG).
The reaction of a simple catechin and a gallocatechin, catalysed by the enzyme
polyphenol oxidase (ppo) , leads to the production of a theaflavin. The four major
theaflavins in tea, along with their precursors, are given below:-
O2,ppo
EC + EGC Theaflvain
EC + EGCg O2,ppo Theaflavin-3-gallate
ECG + EGC O2,ppo Theaflavin-3’-gallate
ECG + EGCg O2,ppo Theaflavin-3,3’-digallate

The theaflavin products of some of the other possible combinations of catechins have
been detected in tea, but only in very small amounts.
The chemical nature of the other major taste components in plain black tea, thearubigins,
have not yet been elucidated. Thus the precursors and route of formation remain largely
unknown.

(iii) Details of aroma formation during black tea manufacture

Black tea contains appreciable aroma compounds and over 600 such compounds have been
identified. Biogenetic pathways for the formation of many of these compounds have not
been fully established. Some of the aroma compounds are primary products in the tea leaf
while others are secondary products formed during black tea processing via enzymatic,
redox or pyrolytic reactions.

1. Primary products
Some aroma compounds existing in the fresh tea leaf have been identified in the aroma
complex of black teas. These compounds are mainly alcohols and include Z-2-penten-1-
ol, n-hexanol, Z-3-hexenol, E-2-hexenol, linalool plus its oxides, nerol, geraniol, benzyl
alcohol, 2-phenyl ethanol, and nerolidol. The quantities of these compounds change during
black tea processing. The levels of some of these alcohols increase during processing
possibly due to various enzymatic reactions while levels of some alcohols reduce possibly
due to volatilisation leading to losses or glycosidation rendering the alcohols non-volatile.

2. Secondary products
Many aroma compounds are formed during tea processing. These compounds are derived
from carotenes, amino acids, lipids and terpene glycosides. Some of these aroma
compounds are also formed naturally in the tea leaf i.e. are also primary products.
 Carotene levels in the tea leaf decrease during withering, fermentation and firing with
resultant production of various aroma compounds e.g. ßeta-ionone, alpha-ionone, 3-
hydroxy- ßeta-Ionone, Epoxy- ßeta-Ionone etc. Such terpenoid aroma compounds
produced form part of the Group II volatile flavour components and impart sweet flowery
aroma to black tea. The formation of this group of compounds occur via enzymatic
reactions during withering and fermentation or pyrolytic reactions during firing.
Proteins are hydrolysed to simple amino acids during withering. These amino acids are
oxidised by quinones formed from catechins to form aldehydes. In this process valine,
leucine, isoleucine, phenylalanine are converted to 2-methyl propanal, 2-methylbutanal,
pentanal and phenyl acetaldehyde respectively. The aldehydes can remain as final aroma
product, but some are reduced to alcohols while others are oxidised to carboxylic acids
respectively.
Tea leaves contain free lipids and fatty acids. The lipids hydrolyse to free saturated or
unsaturated fatty acids during black tea processing especially during withering. The
unsaturated fatty acids break down to aliphatic aldehydes through a process catalysed by
lipoxygenase enzyme. Thus linolenic acid forms Z-3-hexanal most of which isomerises to
E-2-hexanal which is the major Group I VFC. Some formed aldehydes are further reduced
to alcohols while little amount is oxidised to carboxylic acids. Most of the Group I VFC
are products of lipid degradation during black tea processing.
Terpene glycosides also hydrolyse to simple volatile terpenes during black tea
processing. For example, linalool glycoside releases linalool. The released terpenes form
part of the Group II VFC.
(c) Impact of agronomic and cultural practices on black tea quality
Within the tea industry debates continue whether agronomic and cultural practices have
impact on black tea quality.
Plucking is one agronomic practice known to have a contribution towards tea quality.
Indeed, coarse plucking standard produces inferior quality tea. A plucking standard of two
leaves and a bud compromises both quality and yields. However, in practice it is
impractical to pluck exclusively two leaves and a bud. Thus for production of high quality
black tea a plucking policy should be developed which not only ensures plucking mostly
two leaves and a bud but also minimizes breaking back. Such a policy can be accomplished
by plucking at short intervals of less than 10 days depending on the shoot growth. Indeed,
such policy also results in yield increase.
However, if short plucking intervals like this may not be practical due to shortage of
pluckers, selective plucking of two leaves and a bud accompanied by breaking back should
be practised. Plucking by shears or motorised machines even if at short plucking intervals
also lead to lowering of black tea quality. This may additionally affect the tea bush health
in the long run. Thus, hand plucking leads to better tea quality and healthier bushes.
The environment also affects tea quality. Generally factors which tend to enhance tea
productivity e.g. good growing weather conditions tend to reduce tea quality. Indeed, the
black teas made during peak crop seasons are generally plain and of low quality even if
manufacturing conditions are optimised. Teas which are grown at lower altitudes and
hence warmer conditions tend to make inferior black teas compared to high grown teas. In
Kenya however, such altitude effects tend to be minimal as teas are grown between 1500
- 2700 m above mean sea level. Shade environment which reduces tea growth rates and
lowers yields tends to improve tea quality.
Although fertiliser application, especially nitrogenous fertiliser, is mandatory for
increased productivity of black tea per given unit land area, excessive use of nitrogen
lowers the quality of the produced black tea. Thus fertiliser regimes must also take quality
implications into consideration. Nitrogen should therefore be applied at rates which
compromise both yields and quality. Black tea quality improves as the tea nears next
pruning time. Since pruning is a necessary agronomic practice that keeps the bushes at
manageable heights, it is important that considerable mixing of leaf from different fields
in different periods from previous prune is done to ensure consistent black tea quality.
The quality of produced black tea is also dependent on the genetic make up of the leaf
material. In most cases farmers tend to look for high yielding cultivars without seeking to
know their quality characteristics. It is important that farmers seek both high yielding and
high quality planting materials. Such materials should however, be proven in areas of
intended growth as different cultivars react differently to varying environmental
conditions.
The effects of factory operations and procedures on quality of black tea are discussed in
sections dealing with the particular processing stages and techniques.
d) Fuel wood
The use of fuel wood for energy purposes is a very old and important practice. Energy is
an essential and scarce commodity and features strongly in modern economy. So long as
fuel wood and charcoal can provide energy in Kenya, wood will continue to be an
invaluable commodity. Kenya does not have the major traditional sources of energy, i.e.
petroleum, oil, natural gas, coal and uranium. Furthermore, Kenya being basically an
agricultural country has the comfort that while oil, natural gas, coal and uranium become
depleted, wood fuel is a renewable resource and in theory can be available indefinitely. If
enough land to plant fuel wood is available and the fuel wood is managed well, the much
needed energy will be available in perpetuity.
However, in Kenya the production of wood fuel is in direct competition with production
of food and other uses of agricultural land. To keep its price down, the wood fuel should
be produced within reasonable distances because it is a bulky commodity and hence its
price is sensitive to distances.
The tea industry in Kenya has been affected by prevailing world energy crisis because
of the high oil prices. As a result, in some factories the oil fired dryers have been converted
to wood fuel dryers. For that reason, it has become necessary to establish wood fuel
plantations with tree species which grow fast and produce high yields of wood fuel
(firewood) with high calorific values.
In rural areas smallholders require wood fuel for cooking and heating. Due to the small
sizes of the small-holdings, the smallholders require fuel wood species which can be grown
in tea fields, along the hedges, boundaries or road sides without adversely affecting the tea
plants and other crops.
The TRFK has not experimented with fuel wood. Therefore the information given in this
handbook is from the literature and communications from the personnel in the tea estates
in Kericho and forestry officers. For further details on any aspect of growing wood fuel
species, readers are referred to forest officers or rural afforestation officers near their farms.

(i) Fuel wood species

Eucalyptus (gum trees) species have been found to be the most productive in fuel wood
plantations. In Kenya there are two species of Eucalyptus, E. saligna and E. grandis
preferred by large estate tea producers . The two species are preferred because they coppice
easily and are fast growers. To a lesser extent black wattle (Acacia mearnsii) is grown in
fuel wood plantations. In addition to providing wood fuel, the black wattle produces bark
which is sold for tannin extraction.
In small-holdings Eucalyptus (various species) are also grown, but being both heavy
water feeders and very tall, Eucalyptus trees affect other crops grown around them. Other
fuel wood species also grown are black wattle, Cypress and Grevillea. The Grevillea
species may be grown in the tea fields so long as the trees are planted widely apart and the
branches lopped regularly.

(ii) Production
The calorific value of fuel wood is important in considering which species to grow.
Generally, the denser the timber the higher the calorific value. However, the rate of growth
is also important because a species may have less dense timber but the rate of growth may
be so high that the resulting volume has higher calorific value than timber from dense but
slow growing species.
For drying tea using wood fuel, it has been found that in Kenya every 3.3 to 4 ha of tea
require 1 ha of fuel wood.

(iii) Field management

The first cycle of eucalyptus takes 8 - 10 years. Once the trees are felled the stumps will
coppice, each stump producing many shoots which should be thinned to 2 or 3 per stump
after 6 to 8 months. In the second and subsequent cycles the trees will grow faster than in
the first cycle, therefore these cycles should take about 6 or 7 years when the stems are 14
cm or more in diameter. The production of wood in plantations is 40-120 m3/ha/year. A
few trees will fail to coppice at each cycle and it is suggested that at every cycle there
should be infilling of the trees which fail to coppice.
The black wattle trees are harvested after 7 - 10 years and do not coppice. Felling is done
either by axe, bow-saw or power saw. There is a tendency for the stump height to rise when
an axe is used in felling trees and therefore a bow-saw or power saw is preferred. When
Eucalyptus are felled by bow-saw or power saw they coppice better than when felled by
an axe.
After felling eucalyptus and black wattle, the logs are cut to convenient lengths, say 1 m
or 2 m long, and left to dry for some time to reduce the transport cost. At the time of use
the moisture content of the fuel wood should be below 20%.

(iv) Air-drying of fuel wood

The calorific value of fuel wood is affected by the moisture content. The amount of water
in the wood not only reduces the heat value of a fuel by so much inert material but that
some more energy is lost evaporating the water from the wood before it can burn.
Therefore the fuel wood should be air-dried before use. On the other hand completely dry
wood would burn extremely quickly making control of heater temperature difficult.
Splitting thick logs of wood hastens the air-drying of the wood.

(v) Establishment
1. Eucalyptus
The seeds are planted in germination beds first and when the seedlings have 4-6 leaves
they are transplanted to either boxes with soil which is 10 cm deep and at spacing of 5 x 5
cm square or into polythene sleeves of various sizes, e.g. 10 cm long and 6.25 cm diameter
(10 cm lay-flat). Where the seedlings are transplanted into boxes, frequent root pruning is
necessary to prevent the roots from growing into the soil below the boxes. The root pruning
is accomplished by moving the boxes frequently or by passing a wire below the boxes. The
sleeves with seedlings should also be moved once in a while to root prune as in boxes.
The seedlings are transplanted to the field when they are about 20 cm tall. The roots of
the seedlings in boxes are side pruned so that each seedling’s roots are covered by a soil
cube 5 cm x 5 cm x 10 cm. Where the seedlings are in sleeves, the polythene must be
removed at planting. Fertiliser is applied in planting holes at the rate of 30 g of triple super
phosphate in each hole.
The site to be planted should be cleared prior to planting. The transplanting is done at
the onset of the long rains. The young Eucalyptus are intolerant of competition with weeds
and therefore should be kept weed free, especially immediately round the plants until the
canopy covers the ground. The normal spacing is 2.5 m x 2.5 m square.

2 Black wattle
The land is prepared before the rains, making sure that all the couch and Kikuyu grasses
are removed. The black wattle is easily established by direct seeding although seedlings
may be raised in the nursery and later transplanted to the field. The seed should be treated
before use to ensure rapid germination and an even stand. The seed is treated by immersing
it in boiling water and then leaving the seed to cool and soak in the water for 24 hours.
After this the seed is dried in the shade and planted directly. The treated seed should not
be kept for planting in the following planting season.
Planting is done during the period of heavy rain. Sowing is carried out in lines and the
seed is covered with about 2.5 cm of soil. The seedlings are thinned later to give a spacing
of about 2.5 m x 2.5 m square. Plantations may be established in pure stands or under sown
in cereals such as wheat and maize.
After felling the trees, re-establishment may be done by either re-planting or the brush
is piled in rows and burned, burning being done in the cool of the evening to ensure that
too fierce a burn does not take place. Later when the seed germinates and the seedlings are
growing vigorously they are thinned to the required spacing leaving only the most vigorous
seedlings.
Young plantations must be kept free from couch and excessive weed growth. Clearing a
strip of 45 cm in breadth on either side of the line of growing wattle will normally suffice,
but all other wattle regrowth should be removed.

(vi) Protection of the plantations

Both Eucalyptus and black wattle plantations should be protected from fire. For this
purpose, adequate external firebreaks should be maintained at all times. As a further
precaution, plantations are split into blocks interspersed by wide roads. Some of the roads
may be planted with grass which is used for grazing.
Sometimes the young plants of Eucalyptus are attacked by termites. Where an attack by
termites occurs, the termites can be controlled by application of Diazinon, Furadan and
other insecticides
 Appendix I
AGENTS FOR CHEMICALS
Fertilizers Herbicides
Sulphate of Ammonia, Phosphate,
Potash NPKS 25:5:5s, NPK 20:10:10 Brand Name Agents
UREA, Lime, DAP fertilizer etc. Gramoxone Twiga Chemicals
Agents P.O. Box 30172
MEA Ltd. NAIROBI.
P.O. Box 1018
KFA
NAKURU.
P.O. Box 35
NAKURI.
MEA Ltd.
P.O. Box 1914 MEA Ltd.
KITALE. P.O. Box 1018
NAKURU.
KTDA Pakson Enterprise
P.O. Box 30213 P.O. Box 174
NAIROBI. KERICHO.

HOMA Lime Co. Ltd. Round up Twiga Chemicals

P.O. Box 1 P.O. Box 30172
KORU. NAIROBI.

Orbit Chemical Industries Ltd. MEA Ltd.

P.O. Box 48870 P.O. Box 1018
NAIROBI. NAKURU.
Pakson Enterprise
Pakson Enterprise P.O. Box 174
P.O. Box 174 KERICHO.
KERICHO.
Touch Down Tealand Chemists
Kipsigis Farmer Store P.O. Box 222
P.O. Box 1219 KERICHO
KERICHO.
Pakson Enterprises
P.O. Box 174
KERICHO.

Marshalls 250 EC MEA Ltd.

Gladiator P.O. Box 1018
Vapolia NAKURU.
Termidor 25 EC
Twiga Chemicals
Rogo
P.O. Box 30172
Thiodan
NAIROBI.
Pakson Enterprise
P.O. Box 174
KERICHO.
Kipsigis Farmers Store
P.O. Box 1219
KERICHO.

Herbicides Manufacturer Distributor

Touchdown Zeneca Agrochemicals Twiga Chemicals

UK Industries Ltd.
P.O. Box 30172
NAIROBI.
 Erases(Mamba) Dow Elanco Ltd., UK Twiga Chemicals
Industries Ltd.
P.O. Box 30172
NAIROBI.
Kalach Calliope S.A Orion East Africa Ltd.
P.O. Box 8422,
NAIROBI.
Wipeout Almandine Corporations, SA Alpha Lima Ltd.
P.O. Box 20529
NAIROBI.
Gramoxone Seneca Syngenta
Touch Down Seneca Syngenta
Round-up 360SL Monsanto Bayer E.A. Ltd.
Sebcor 480SL Bayer E.A. Ltd. Bayer E.A. Ltd.

Insecticides Manufacturer Distributor

Karate Zeneca Agrochemicals, UK Twiga Chemicals Industries Ltd.
P.O. Box 30172
NAIROBI.
Omite Uniroyal Chemicals, USA Twiga Chemicals Industries Ltd.
P.O. Box 30172
NAIROBI.
Murphy Chemicals Ltd.
P.O. Box 20495
NAIROBI.
Murphoil Bazehem Ltd., Israel FarmChem Ltd.
P.O. Box 18407
NAIROBI.
Gladiator DowElanco Ltd., UK DowElanco Export, SA
P.O. Box 4947
NAIROBI.

Insecticides Distributor
Thiodan Twiga Chemicals
P.O. Box 30172
NAIROBI.
Kilpest Crop Protection Chemicals
Sevin KFA
Volation KFA
Fenitrothion “
Ambush “
Rogor “
Roxion “
Insecticides Manufacturer Distributor

Marshalls 250EC FMC Farmchem

Gladiator BASF BASF
Confidor 200SL Buyer EA Bayer EA Ltd.
Termidor 25EC Aventis Aventis
*Fenitrothion
Fenithion (Lebaycid) Bayer EA Bayer EA
 Karate (Ambush) Seneca Syngenta
Bulldock EC Bayer Bayer EA Ltd.
Sevin Aventis Aventis

Fungicides Distributor

Benlate Hoechst
Ripcord 5% EC Afro producers & Distributors
Carbonate Crop Protection Chemicals
Dithane M45 KFA

Fungicides Manufacturer Distributor

Kocide 101 Griffin Corporation, Twiga Chemicals

Kocide DF USA Industries Ltd.
Kocide 2000 P.O. Box 30172
Copper Oxychloride NAIROBI.

Ridomil Novartis, Switzerland Novartis East Africa Ltd.

P.O. Box 30393
NAIROBI.

Fungicides Manufacturer Distributor

Benlate Dupont Farmchem

*Ripcord
Dithane M45 Aventis/Murphy - do -
Antracol Bayer E.A. Bayer EA Ltd.
Bavistin BASF BASF
Kocide Seneca Syngenta
ADDRESSES OF AGENTS FOR AGRO-CHEMICALS
Kenya Farmers Association
P.O. Box 35
NAKURU. BayerBayer EA. Ltd.
P.O. Box 30321
Orbit Chemicals Industries Ltd. Code 00100
P.O. Box 48870 NAIROBI
NAIROBI. Tel. 02 860667-74

SDS Biotech Europe Co-op. Syngenta (EA) Ltd

P.O. Box 56325 P.O. Box 30393
NAIROBI. NAIROBI

Rentokil Ltd. Farmchem (Dupont Products)

P.O. Box 44360 P.O. Box 18407
NAIROBI. NAIROBI.

Homaline Company Ltd. Murphy Chemicals (EA) Ltd.

P.O. Box 1 (Distributor)
KORU. P.O. Box 20495
NAIROBI.
Crop Protection Chemicals Ltd.
P.O. Box 47480 Aventis Crop Science
NAIROBI. P.O. Box 30438
NAIROBI.
Reg. Davidson & Company
P.O. Box 41895 BASF
NAIROBI.
P.O. Box 30466
Aventis Pasteur SA (EA) NAIROBI.
P.O. Box 30104
NAIROBI. Twiga Chemicals
P.O. Box 30172
Twiga Chemical Industries Ltd. NAIROBI.
P.O. Box 30172
NAIROBI.
 Appendix II

CONVERSION TABLES
Table A: Metric units
Length 10 millimetres (mm) = 1 centimetre (cm)
100 cm = 1 metre (m)
100 m = 1 hectometre (hm)
1,000 m = 1 kilometre (km)

Area 100 square millimetres (mm2) = 1 square centimetre (cm2)

10,000 cm2 = 1 square metre (m2)
10,000 m2 = 1 hectare (ha)

Volume 1,000 cubic millimetres (mm3) = 1 millilitre (ml)

= 1 cubic centimetre (cc)
1,000 ml = 1 litre (1)
1,000 cc = 1 litre

Weight 1,000 milligrams (mg) = 1 gram (g)

1,000 g = 1 kilogram (kg)
100 kg = 1 quintal (q)
1,000 kg or 10q = 1 tonne (t)

Table B: English/metric equipment

Length 1 inch (in) = 2.540 cm 1 cm = 0.394 in
= 25.40 mm 1m = 39.37 in
1 foot (ft) = 0.305 m = 3.281 ft
= 304.80 cm = 1.094 yd
1 yard (yd) = 0.914m 1 km = 0.621 miles
= 914.40 cm
1 mile = 1.609 km

Area 1 square inch (in2) = 6.452 cm2 1 cm2 = 0.155 in2

1 square foot (ft2) = 0.093 m2 1 m2 = 1.196 yd2
1 square yard (yd2) = 0.836 m2
1 acre = 0.405 ha 1 ha = 2.471 acres

Volume 1 fluid ounce (fl oz) = 6.452 cm2 1 cm2 = 0.155 in2
1 pint (pt) = 568.25 ml = 1.759 pt
1 gallon (gal) = 4.546 litres = 0.220 gal
1 cubic inch (in2) = 16.39 cc 1 ml = 0.061 in3
1 cubic foot (ft3) = 0.028 m 3
1m 3
= 35.31 ft3
= 28.32 litres 1 litre = 61.02 in3
Weight 1 ounce (oz) = 28.35 1 kg = 35.27 0z
1 pound (lb) = 453.59 g = 2.205 lb
 = 0.454 kg

1 hundredweight
(cwt) = 50.80 kg l ton = 2,204.6 lb
1 ton = 1,016.0 kg = 0.984 ton
= 1,016 t

Others 1 oz/yd2 = 33.91 g/m2 1 kg/m2 = 1.843 lb/yd2

1 oz/yd3 = 37.08 g/m 3
1 kg/m3 = 1.686 lb/yd3
1 oz/gal = 6.236 g/litre 1 g/litre = 0.160 0z/gal
1 lb/in2 = 0.070 kg/ml
1 horse power (h.p) = 0.746 kilowatt (kw) 1 kw = 1.340 h.p
1 B. T. U. = 251.88 gram-calories (gcal)

Temperature
0 0 0 0
F C F C
32.0 0 125.6 52
35.6 2 125.6 54
39.2 4 129.2 56
42.8 6 132.8 58
46.4 8 136.4 60
50.0 10 140.0 63
53.6 12 143.6 64
57.2 14 147.2 66
60.8 16 150.8 68
64.4 18 154.4 70
68.0 20 158.0 72
71.6 22 161.6 74
75.2 24 165.2 76
78.8 26 168.8 78
82.4 28 172.4 80
86.0 30 179.6 82
89.6 32 183.2 84
93.2 34 186.8 86
96.8 36 190.4 88
100.4 38 194.0 90
104.0 40 197.6 92
107.6 42 201.2 94
111.2 44 204.8 96
114.8 46 208.4 98
118.4 48 212.0 100
122.0 50
The formula for conversion from Celsius (Centigrade) to Fahrenheit is:
0
Cx9
0
F = ------- + 32
5
Similarly, the formula for conversion from Fahrenheit to Celsius is:
0
C = (0 F - 32) x 5
9

Table C: Double conversion Tables for Weights and Measures

The central figures represent either of the two columns beside them. Example 1 metre 1.094
yds, 1 yard = 0.914 metres

Centimetres Inches Metres Yards

2.540 1 0.394 0.914 1 1.094
5.080 2 0.787 1.829 2 2.187
7.620 3 1.181 2.743 3 3.281
10.160 4 1.575 3.658 4 4.374
12.700 5 1.969 4.572 5 5.468
15.240 6 2.362 5.486 6 6.562
17.780 7 2.756 6.401 7 7.655
20.320 8 3.150 7.315 8 8.749
22.860 9 3.543 8.230 9 9.843
25.400 10 3.937 9.144 10 10.936
50.800 20 8.874 18.288 20 21.872
76.200 30 11.811 27.432 30 32.808
101.600 40 15.748 36.576 40 43.745
127.000 50 19.685 45.720 50 54.681
152.400 60 23.622 54.863 60 65.617
177.800 70 27.559 64.007 70 76.553
203.200 80 31.496 73.151 80 87.489
228.600 90 35.433 82.296 90 98.425
254.000 100 39.370 91.439 100 109.361
Square Square Hectares Acres
metres yards 0.405
0.836 1 1.196 0.809 1 2.471
1.672 2 2.392 1.214 2 4.942
2.508 3 3.588 1.619 3 7.413
3.345 4 4.784 2.023 4 9.884
4.181 5 5.980 2.023 5 12.335
5.017 6 7.176 2.428 6 14.826
5.853 7 8.372 2.833 7 17.298
6.682 8 9.568 3.237 8 19.769
7.525 9 10.764 3.642 9 22.240
8.361 10 11.960 4.047 10 24.711
16.723 20 23.920 8.094 20 49.422
25.084 30 35.880 12.140 30 74.132
33.445 40 47.840 16.187 40 98.843
41.806 50 59.799 20.234 50 123.554
50.168 60 71.759 24.281 60 148.265
58.529 70 83.719 28.328 70 172.976
66.890 80 95.679 32.374 80 197.686
75.251 90 107.639 36.421 90 222.397
83.613 100 119.599 40.468 100 247.108

Litres Gallons U.S, Gallons Imperial

Gallons
4.546 1 0.220 1.200 1 0.833
9.092 2 0.440 2.401 2 1.666
13.638 3 0.660 3.601 3 2.499
18.184 4 0.880 4.802 4 3.322
22.730 5 1.100 6.002 5 4.165
27.276 6 1.320 7.203 6 4.998
31.822 7 1.540 8.403 7 5.831
36.368 8 1.760 9.603 8 6.664
40.914 9 1.980 10.804 9 7.497
45.460 10 2.200 12.004 10 8.330
90.919 20 4.399 24.009 20 16.661
136.379 30 6.599 36.013 30 24.991
181.838 40 8.799 48.017 40 33.321
227.298 50 10.999 60.022 50 41.652
272.758 60 13.198 72.026 60 49.982
318.217 70 15.398 84.030 70 58.312
363.677 80 17.598 96.034 80 66.642
409.136 90 19.797 108.039 90 74.973
454.596 100 21.997 120.043 100 83.303

Grams Ounces Kilograms Pounds

28.35 1 0.035 0.454 1 2.205
56.70 2 0.071 0.907 2 4.409
85.05 3 0.106 1.361 3 6.614
113.40 4 0.141 1.814 4 8.818
141.75 5 0.176 2.268 5 11.023
170.10 6 0.212 2.722 6 13.228
198.45 7 0.247 3.175 7 15.432
226.80 8 0.282 3.629 8 17.637
255.15 9 0.317 4.082 9 19.842
283.50 10 0.353 4.536 10 22.046
566.99 20 0.705 9.072 20 44.092
850.48 30 1.058 13.608 30 66.139
1133.98 40 1.411 18.144 40 88.185
1417.47 50 1.764 22.680 50 110.231
1700.97 60 2.116 27.215 60 132.277
1984.47 70 2.469 31.751 70 154.323
2267.96 80 2.822 36.287 80 176.370
2551.46 90 3.175 40.823 90 198.416
2834.95 100 3.527 45.359 100 220.462

Tonnes Tons Millilitres per Fluid ounces

100 litres per 100
gallons
1.016 1 0.984 6.236 1 0.160
2.032 2 1.968 12.472 2 0.321
3.048 3 2.953 18.709 3 0.481
4.064 4 3.937 24.945 4 0.641
5.080 5 4.921 31.181 5 0.802
6.096 6 5.905 37.417 6 0.962
7.112 7 6.889 43.653 7 1.122
8.128 8 7.874 49.890 8 1.283
9.144 9 8.858 56.126 90 1.443
10.161 10 9.842 62.362 10 1.604
20.321 20 19.684 124.724 20 3.207
30.482 30 29.526 187.086 30 4.811
40.642 40 39.368 249.448 40 6.414
50.803 50 49.211 311.810 50 8.018
60.963 60 59.053 374.172 60 9.621
71.124 70 68.894 436.534 70 11.225
81.284 80 78.737 498.896 80 12.828
91.444 90 88.579 561.258 90 14.432
101.605 100 98.421 623.620 100 16.035

Litres per Gallons Grams per Ounces per

hectare per acre 100 litres 100 gallons
11.233 1 0.089 6.236 1 0.160
 22.467 2 0.178 12.472 2 0.321
33.700 3 0.267 18.709 3 0.481
44.933 4 0.356 24.945 4 0.641
56.167 5 0.445 31.181 5 0.802
67.400 6 0.534 37.417 6 0.962
78.633 7 0.623 43.653 7 1.122
89.867 8 0.712 49.890 8 1.283
101.100 9 0.801 56.126 9 1.443
112.333 10 0.890 62.362 10 1.604
224.667 20 1.780 124.724 20 3.217
337.000 30 2.671 187.086 30 4.811
449.334 40 3.561 249.448 40 6.414
561.667 50 4.451 311.810 50 8.018
674.000 60 5.341 374.172 60 9.621
786.334 70 6.231 436.534 70 11.225
898.667 80 7.122 498.896 80 12.828
1011.001 90 8.012 561.258 90 14.432
1123.334 100 8.902 623.620 100 16.035

Kilograms per Pounds per

hectare acre
11.121 1 0.892
2.242 2 1.784
3.363 3 2.677
4.483 4 3.569
5.604 5 4.461
6.725 6 5.353
7.846 7 6.245
8.967 8 7.137
10.088 9 8.030
11.209 10 8.922
22.414 20 17.844
33.626 30 26.765
44.834 40 35.687
56.043 50 44.609
67.251 60 53.531
78.460 70 62.453
89.668 80 71.374
100.877 90 80.296
112.085 100 89.128

Table D.......: Plant spacing and population

Triangular planting
Spacing (ft) No. of plants Spacing (cm) No. of plants
per acre per hectare
 4x2 5,624 121.9 x 61.0 13,896
3x3 5,589 91.4 x 91.4 13,810
3¼ x 3¼ 4,762 100.0 x 100.0 11,767
4 x 2½ 4,586 121.9 x 76.2 11,331
3½ x 3½ 4,106 106.7 x 106.7 10,146
4x3 3,916 121.9 x 91.4 9,676
4x4 3,144 121.9 x 121.9 7,768
4½ x 4½ 2,484 137.2 x 137.2 6,139
5x5 2,012 152.4 x 152.4 4,972
6x6 1,397 182.9 x 182.9 3,453

Double hedgerow planting

Spacing N0. of plants per acre Spacing (cm) N0. of plants per hectare
4x2x2 7,345 121.9 x 61 X 61 18,150
4 x 2 x 2½ 6,780 121.9 x 61 x 76.2 16,754
4 x 2½ x 2½ 6,027 121.9 x 76.2 x 76.2 14,892

Rectangular and contour planting

Spacing (ft) No. of plants Spacing (cm) No. of plants per
per acre hectare
4x2 5,624 121.9 x 61.0 13,896
3x3 5,589 91.4 x 91.4 13,810
3¼ x 3¼ 4,762 100.0 x 100.0 11,767
4 x 2½ 4,586 121.9 x 76.2 11,331
3½ x 3½ 4,106 106.7 x 106.7 10,146
4x3 3,916 121.9 x 91.4 9,676
4x4 3,144 121.9 x 121.9 7,768
4½ x 4½ 2,484 137.2 x 137.3 6,139
5x5 2,012 152.4 x 152.4 4,972
6x6 1,397 182.9 x 182.9 3,453

No. of plants per hectare

(1) Square planting: 10,000

d2

*
(2) Rectangular planting 10,000
d1 x d2
d1 d1
(3) Triangular (equilateral) planting: 11,547
d2 d2

In each case, "d" is the distance or one of the distances between the plants in metres.
Conversion of green leaf into made tea
Average % out-turn of green leaf into made tea is 22.5% or 4.5 kg green leaf give 1kg made
tea.
 Appendix III

DEFINITIONS
Acaricide A chemical used for controlling mite pests.
Accumulator: A plant which accumulates in its tissues far more of
a chemical element than it needs for normal growth
and development. The tea plant is an aluminium
accumulator, for example.
Active ingredient (a.i): That part of a pesticide that is actually responsible for
the toxic effect.
Advection: The transference of heat by horizontal motion of the
air in the atmosphere.
Adventitious root: A root which develops from leaf or stem (vegetative)
tissue. All stem cuttings develop adventitious roots.
Agronomy: The study of management of land and the scientific
cultivation of crops.
Albedo: The reflection coefficient for short-wave radiation of
a given surface.
Apical bud: The bud at the top (apex) of a shoot.
Aboricide: An herbicide specifically used against trees and
woody shrubs.
Ascospore: A-sexually produced fungal spore borne in an ascus
(q.v).
Ascus: A sack-like hypha of a fungus containing ascospores
(q.v)
Available water content: The quantity of soil water that can be taken up by the
plant. It is that quantity between field capacity and
permanent wilting point (q.q.v.), and it varies from
one soil type to another.
Axil: The angle between a leaf and the stem.
Axillary bud: The bud found in an axil.
Axillary shoot: A shoot which develops from an axillary bud.
Baghjan pruning: Pruning repeatedly at the same level. This results in
the formation of large callus knobs known as knots
on the ends of the branches; these must eventually be
pruned off.
Banjhi: Dormant: Usually applied to the condition of the
apical bud; such a bud is very small. A bhanji shoot
is a shoot with a dormant apical bud. The term is also
applied to a bush or even to a whole field when the
majority of shoots on that bush or in that field are
banjhi.
Barie: An orchard. Confined to "seed barie:, an orchard
containing plants allowed to grow up for seed
 production. A clonal seed barie is one in which the
seed bearers have been raised by vegetative
propagation from selected parent plants; such baries
are "biclonal", "triclonal", "polyclonal" etc.,
depending upon whether there are two, three or many
clones included.
"Biclonal seed" is seed produced from two clonal
parents. "Polyclonal seed" is from more than 2
clonal parents.
Bending See pegging.
Bheti plants: Plants dug out from the nursery with a cylinder of soil
surrounding the roots.
Boma-site See Hutsite.
Breaking back: Plucking shoots down to the plucking table after the
standard plucking has been completed. Necessary
only when the plucking round is too long.
Bringing into bearing: A pruning, tipping or pegging operation designed to
form the permanent branch system of the plant.
Bullate: Puckered, with raised areas between the leaf veins.
Bund: A ridge of soil to direct or restrict the movement of
water on a slope. The term may also be applied to
ridges formed from uprooted weeds, etc.
Calcicole: A plant species which grows best on soils containing
a high level of calcium.
Calcifuge: A plant species which grows poorly on soils with
high levels of calcium, and prefers acid soils.
Callus: A disorganised tissue, usually creamy white or
brown, which develops on wounded bark. Associated
with the basal cut of a cutting, with pruned branches,
with recovery from insect and mechanical damage to
roots and shoots, and with recovery from branch
canker.
Callused cutting: Any cutting which has developed callus tissue on its
basal cut. Particularly used for such cuttings which
are then transplanted to sleeves or to other nursery
beds.
Catchment: An area of land, typically basin-shaped, in which all
drainage flows to a common point; this may be a
stream or an aquifer. If the catchment has an
impervious stratum beneath it, it is possible by
measuring the stream flow at its exit from the
catchment, to build up a drainage, run-off and plan
water use.
Catechins: A group of carbon compounds found in tea leaves.
They are the precursors of theaflavins and
thearubigins (q.q.v.), major flavour components of
black tea.
Centering: (Also de-centering). Pruning the central stem or
stems of a plant to encourage the growth of lateral
shoots. An essential operation on young sleeved
plants. Not always effective on older plants,
especially if they are suffering from potassium
deficiency.
Cheel hoe: A hoe with a blade about 35cm across, which cuts
weed roots within the top 2cm of soil.
Chloroform test: See page 38.
Chlorosis: The abnormal yellowing of leaves, due to inhibition
of chlorophyll synthesis. In tea this is usually caused
by mineral imbalance.
Cleaning out: Removing shoots which are thin, dead, cross over
each other or are too close to other shoots at the time
of cut-across pruning. Also used in the form "clean
pruning".
Clonal seed: Seed from a clonal plant or from a clonal barie (see
Barie).
Clone: Any population of plants raised by vegetative
propagation to form a single parent plant. Members
of the same clone may be growing in several different
places at the same time or at different times and may
be several generations removed from the original
parent. Genetically, all plants of the same clone are
identical.
Coarse plucking: Plucking shoots of three or more leaves and the bud.
Collar: The part of the plant which is at soil level.
Contact herbicide: An herbicide which kills plants only if it comes into
contact with the above-ground parts of the plant.
Cotyledons: The "first leaves" of a seedling. In the tea plant the
two cotyledons are fleshy and fill the seed. They
remain below the soil surface after germination and
supply food to the developing seedling.
Couch: A general term applied to any grass with long
rhizomes (q.v). The most common example in East
Africa is Digitaria scalarum.
CTC (crush, tear and curl): Type of tea manufacture in which withered leaf is
passed between serrated cylindrical rollers revolving
in different directions and at different speeds to
efficiently mince leaf into fine pieces. The resulting
cell and cell membrane destruction is more extensive
than in orthodox manufacture (q.v.).
Cut-across prune: Pruning at a set level without any cleaning out.
De-centering: See centering.
Deficiency: The presence of a nutrient in quantities below that
required for optimum plant growth.
Dormancy: A rest period when a whole plant or a plant tissue
shows no growth.
Endemic: A situation where a host and its parasite have co-
evolved for a long time, and as a result the disease
presence is permanent.
Epinasty: The greater growth of the upper surface of an organ,
compared with the lower, causing the organ to bend
downwards. (This may be caused by nutrient
deficiency).
Epiphyte: A fungus or bacterium existing on the surface of a
plant or plant organ without causing infection.
Evaporation: The loss of vapour to the atmosphere from the surface
of a liquid; used most commonly in respect of water.
Evapotranspiration: The loss of water from land (and vegetation),
including both evaporation and transpiration (q.q.v.)
Experiment: An investigation from which the data can be
subjected to statistical treatment. In most work this
presupposes adequate replication and randomisation
(q.q.v.) so that the effects of irrelevant factors, such
as soil variation, can be eliminated. A clonal field
trial is formally an experiment.
Feeder roots: Mat-like rootlets present on, or close to, the soil
surface near the tea bush. Mulching enhances
formation of feeder roots.
Fermentation: The term used in tea processing for the biochemical
processes during which the leaf turns brown. This is
the oxidation of certain cell constituents (catechins,
q.v.) in the presence of an enzyme (polyphenol
oxidase, q.v.) by air.
Fertilizers: Manufactured chemical compounds or mixtures of
chemical compounds, which contain controlled
amounts of plant nutrients. They generally contain a
higher concentration of nutrients than organic
manures.
Field capacity: The moisture content in freely draining soil two days
after heavy rainfall or irrigation.
Fine plucking: Plucking shoots of one or two leaves and the bud.
Firing: Removal of moisture and termination of enzyme
activity by heating at the end of fermentation to
achieve 2.5 - 5% moisture to be stored over a period
of time.
Fish leaf: Usually taken to be the topmost scale leaf (q.v.). It is
usually serrated only along the leaf margin furthest
from the stalk.
Fixation of nutrients: A process by which a soil nutrient is made
unavailable to the plant temporarily or permanently.
Floater: A seed which floats in water (does not sink),
especially one which still floats after 24 hours.
Flushing: Applied to an actively-growing apical or axillary
bud. Also applied to a bush or even to a whole field
when the majority of shoots on that bush or in that
field are flushing.
Food reserves: See Starch reserves.
Fordham effect: A special type of flush in which a large number of
shoots on each stem grow at the same time, including
shoots which would normally be dormant. This
usually occurs when a long period of adverse weather
condition is suddenly terminated.
Fork jembe: A digging tool having three or four prongs at right
angles to the shaft. Sometimes used for removing
deep-rooted weeds, but causes damage to tea roots.
Formative pruning: See Bringing into bearing.
Fructification: A product of spores by a fungus.
Fruiting body: A complex fungal structure containing spores.
Fungicide: A chemical used for controlling fungal diseases.
Growth regulator: A natural or artificial compound which induces easily
detectable growth modification or change in the
plant.
Hard banjhi: Applied to a shoot when its apical bud has been
banjhi (q.v.) for a long time and the upper stem and
leaves have become hard. Such shoots are unsuitable
for manufacture.
Hard plucking: A plucking system which restricts the addition of
young leaves to the maintenance foliage. Cropping
then becomes over dependent upon the old
maintenance foliage. Most usually affected by
plucking right down to the plucking table.
Hardening off: The process of acclimatising a nursery plant to the
conditions to which it will be exposed after
transplanting in the field.
Hardpans: Soil layers of variable texture which may, in extreme
cases, exhibit rocklike properties (also termed
fragipans, or Orstein) and become almost totally
impenetrable to plant roots, water and air.
Height-reduction prune: Low pruning carried out after several pruning cycles
to rejuvenate the bushes that otherwise have become
too tall to produce green leaf efficiently.
Herbicide: A chemical used for killing plants, especially weeds.
Hermetic sealing: The sealing of a container in such a manner that it is
airtight, thus lengthening the storage life of the
contents.
Hidden (latent) nutrient Deficiency which occurs but does not cause any
deficiency: symptoms. It can only be detected by tissues analysis.
Humus: Decaying organic matter in the soil.
Hutsite: A restricted area of land in which tea grows poorly
because of an accumulation of basic material which
usually causes an increase in the soil pH (q.v.). Often
the sites of huts or manyattas where organic refuse
and lime from buildings has collected, or of livestock
pounds (cattle bomas, etc) where there has been a
concentration of manure. Similar effects can be
caused locally by burning large trees or heaps of
brushwood; in these cases the heat can destroy the
surface soil structure.
Hypha (plural Hyphae): A fine thread-like fungal growth.
Infill: Any plant used to replace a dead or weak plant in the
field.
Infiltration: The process of water entry into the soil, generally by
downward flow through all or part of the soil surface.
Infiltration capacity: The amount of water that has infiltrated a soil during,
a specific period of time and is expressed in volume
units per surface area (units: cm3/cm2/min or
cm/min).
Insecticide: A chemical used for controlling insects.
Internode: The length between two leaves of a shoots.
Janum: The topmost and largest unserrated scale-leaf on a
shoot, immediately below the fish leaf (q.v). A
common term in India, but only infrequently used in
Kenya.
Jat: A seedling population raised from seeds produced by
a particular group of parent trees. Any seedling seed
barie will produce a jat more or less distinct from all
other jats. A clonal seed barie will produce a jat
similar to those from the same clonal baries
established elsewhere.
LD50: Lethal Dose. The concentration of a chemical which
would kill 50% of the target organism within a
specified period.
Leaching: The removal of nutrients from the soil by dissolving
in the soil water which then drains away.
Lenticel: A breathing pore on the bark. Often enlarged in the
absence of oxygen (e.g. water logging, clay soils) and
when certain fungi infect the plant.
Light plucking: A plucking system which permits an unnecessary
number of young leaves to be added to the
maintenance foliage. Most usually effected by
leaving a leaf on the shoots above the plucking table
at each plucking round so that the table rises rapidly.
Used to add new foliage after adverse phenomenon
like hail or drought.
LTP (Laurie Tea Processor): A type of tea manufacture in which the withered leaf
is chopped into narrow strips. The machinery used is
similar to a tobacco cutter or hammer mill. Fineness
of the chopped leaf is controlled to be close to that of
CTC (q.v.) manufacture.
Luxury consumption: The presence of nutrient levels in the plant which are
above normal but not toxic. This can only be
diagnosed by tissue analysis.
Maintenance foliage: The layer of leaves below the plucking table. These
leaves produce the food to permit the development of
new shoots and the accumulation of starch reserves
in the roots and stems. The leaves become less
efficient as they grow older, and gets thinner as
pruning cycle progresses.
Manure: A natural organic material such as farmyard manure,
compost, bone-meal etc., which contains plant
nutrients. They are often variable in composition and
the proportion of nutrients tends to be low.
Mature leaf: For leaf analysis purposes, a hard and dark leaf which
has stopped expanding.
Mature tea: An arbitrary age of tea plants used for accounting
purposes. Logically, mature tea is tea which is being
plucked after having completed its formative
pruning; the term is used in this sense throughout this
handbook.
Meniscus: The name given to the curved surface of a liquid
when it is enclosed, and which is especially evident
when water is in a narrow cylinder.
Moribund tea: An old tea plantation whose productivity has
stagnated or is declining, despite optimal cultural
practices being applied to it.
Mother bush: Any bush from which cuttings are taken, especially
when the bush is used solely for this purpose as in a
multiplication plot.
Mother leaf: The original leaf of a standard cutting.
Mulch: Any material used to cover the soil surface to prevent
soil loss during wet weather, to reduce evaporation
from the soil, and to increase the humus content of
the soil.
Multiplication plot: A clonal plot which is used solely as source of supply
of cuttings.
Mutation: A sudden and permanent change in the genetic make-
up of a plant. Such changes can be passed on to the
plant's offsprings. Spontaneous mutation is rare, but
induced mutation is used in plant breeding.
Mycelium: Mass of hyphae (q.v) of a fungus. Exemplified by the
white growth beneath the bark of plants infected by
Armillaria, root rot disease.
Necrosis: The death of a group of cells while still part of an
organ of the living plant.
Nematicide: A chemical used for controlling nematodes
(eelworms).
Net radiation: The difference between the total radiation energy
incident on a surface and the radiation energy
reflected and emitted by the surface.
Node: The point of attachment of a leaf to the stem.
NPK: Symbols for nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P) and
potassium (K).
Nurse crop: A temporary crop grown to protect the main crop
while the latter is young.
Nutrient toxicity: Abnormality (symptoms) or death caused by the
excess of an essential nutrient in the plant organ.
Orthodox manufacture: Tea manufacture where the mixing of enzymes and
polyphenols is achieved by rolling (q.v.). This is
achieved by compressing and turning the leaf over,
while keeping it in continual motion. Leaf disruption
is less drastic than in unorthodox manufacture.
Parasite: An organism which obtains its food from the tissues
of another living organism.
Pegging: Increasing the spread of a bush by bending the
branches away and sloping from the vertical and
pegging them down, using wooden or metal pegs.
Permanent wilting point: The water content of the soil at which plants
permanently wilt even when the air is humid. This is
the lower limit of available soil water.
Permanent frame: The part of the branch system which lies below the
lowest level at which the bush will be pruned after
reaching maturity.
Penman's equation: Used to estimate the potential rate of transpiration
(q.v) of a crop using meteorological data (e.g.
sunshine, air, temperature, humidity and wind).
Persistent herbicide: An herbicide which retains its herbicidal properties
for a prolonged period after its application.
Pesticide: A chemical used for controlling pests. Acaricides,
fungicides, herbicides, insecticides, rodenticides and
nematicides (q.q.v.) are all categories of pesticides.
Petiole: The stalk of a leaf.
pH: An index of acidity, formally "the negative logarithm
of the hydrogen ion concentration expressed in moles
per litre". Neutrality is pH 7.0. Most suitable tea soils
lie within the range 4.0 to 5.6 though higher pH may
be found in hutsites and certain rich soils. The scale
 is logarithmic, so that a soil of pH 4.0 is ten times
more acid than one of pH 5.0 and one hundred times
more acid than one of pH 6.0.
Photosynthesis: The process by which the plant uses the energy of
sunlight to convert carbon dioxide gas from the air
into food.
Photosynthetically Active That radiation energy within the 400-700mm
Radiation(PAR): waveband of the total sun's radiation, which is useful
for green plant photosynthesis.
Plasmolysis: The shrinking of the cell contents away from the cell
wall due to loss of water. At early stages this is
reversible, but further loss causes permanent damage.
Ploidy: The constant number of chromosomes in all the
nuclei of the cells of a plant. A reproductive cell is
usually haploid (half the diploid) and a normal cell
diploid (two basic sets). Genetic diversification can
produce triploid (3), tetraploid (4) and polyploid
(>two basic sets ) plant nuclei.
Plucking: The routine removal of young (harvesting) shoots for
manufacture.
Plucking round: The interval between successive pluckings of the
same bush or field.
Plucking table: The upper surface of a bush at which level the shoots
are plucked.
Polyphenol oxidase: The naturally occurring enzyme (biological catalyst)
that converts catechins (q.v.) into other flavour
components during black tea manufacture.
Potential evapotranspiration: The possible combined loss of water from a given
area of land and vegetation during a specified period
of time by evaporation from the soil surface and by
transpiration from plants.
Pre-emergence herbicide: A herbicide used for preventing the germination of
seeds.
Pruning: The use of a special knife, saw or secateurs to cut out,
or reduce the length of branches or shoots.
Pruning cycle: The interval between successive prunings of mature
bush.
Randomisation: The random allocation of treatments to plots in an
experiment.
Replication: The allocation of several plots to each treatment in an
experiment.
Rhizome: An underground creeping stem, exemplified by those
of couch grass.
Rhizomorph: Melanised strand arising from an aggregation of
fungal hyphae.
Rich soil: A soil which contains a large proportion of mineral
bases.
Rodenticide: A chemical used for controlling rodents, e.g. moles,
rats, etc.
Rogue: A sport or variation from the standard type of a
variety. Also commonly used of a clonal plant which
is planted in a plot of another clone.
Rolling The twisting and breaking up of the leaf to allow the
juices to mix and fermentation to begin. The stage of
manufacture after withering.
Rotorvane: An elaborate disintegrator in the fashion of a
domestic mincing machine. In the manufacture, a
rotor shaft, armed with projecting vanes, propels the
leaf along the enclosing barrel against the resistance
of counter vanes projecting from the casing, thus
causing cell disruption.
Saprophyte: An organism, usually microscopic, that uses dead
organic matter for food.
Scale-leaf: A minute unserrated leaf found at the base of a
seedling or young clonal plant or shoot. They often
fall off as the shoot matures.
Scheme plucking: Estate management plucking design whereby
experienced pluckers are confined to individualised
plucking units in each field in order to optimise
productivity under minimum supervision.
Seed at stake: Planting seeds directly in the field near marking stake
so that the seedling is never transplanted.
Serrations: The small tooth-like edgings to the leaf-margin.
Shelterbelt: A belt of trees and/or shrubs arranged as s protection
against strong winds; a type of windbreak. The trees
may be specially planted or left standing when the
original forest is cut.
Single-stemmer: A young plant which produces a single main vertical
branch after being pruned.
Sinker: A seed which sinks in water, especially one which
sinks within 24 hours.
Skiffing: A very light prune to level-off a plucking table and
sometimes used in place of a harder prune to extend
the pruning cycle in mature tea.
Sleeve: A soil container, generally of thin polythene, used for
growing cuttings or seedlings. Either in the form of
bags, sealed to some extent at the base, or of
cylinders, completely open at the base.
Slope pruning Pruning parallel to the ground, irrespective of the
slope of the ground.
Soft banjhi: Applied to a shoot when its apical bud has only
recently gone banjhi and upper stem and leaves are
still soft. Such shoots are suitable for manufacture.
Soil compaction: Dynamic soil behaviour as a result of applied loads
or pressure causing the density of the soil to increase.
Soil drying and shrinkage may also cause soil
compaction.
Soil sterilant: A chemical applied to the soil to provide control of
soil borne pests, pathogens and weed propagules.
Starch reserves: The food reserves found mainly in the roots, stem and
to some extent in large shoots and derived from the
carbohydrates formed in the leaves. They are used
when new roots or shoots develop.
Starch test: A simple qualitative test for the presence of starch.
The test is carried out as follows: Solution: One litre
of water; 3g iodine crystals; 6g potassium iodine.
Keep well stoppered in a dark cupboard and
preferably in a dark bottle.
Test: Cut across the root to be tested; smooth the cut
if necessary. Apply the solution evenly over the cut.
The solution turns the starch grains dark blue. The cut
surface will turn nearly black if the reserves are at
their maximum. If there are no reserves there will be
no colour change.
Stomata: Pores found in large numbers on the surface of leaves
through which gaseous exchange takes place.
Stump: The bare root of a nursery plant about two years old.
A seedling stump consists of the tap-root, cut back if
necessary to a length of about 45cm. The stems are
normally cut 10cm above the nursery soil level.
Sub-soil: The lower humus-free layers of soil, largely mineral
in character, containing the disintegration products of
rock. Its composition depends mainly upon the type
of parent rock. In tea areas subsoils are usually
deficient in available nutrients because these have
been leached out of the soil.
Surface run-off: This occurs when rainfall intensity exceeds the rate
at which water can be absorbed by the soil. Soil
particles are detached from their positions in the soil
mass and they may then be transported by the run-off
flowing on the ground surface, causing soil erosion.
Surfactant: A substance introduced into a liquid in order to affect
(usually to increase) its spreading, wetting, and
similar properties (i.e. properties which depend upon
its surface tension).
Systemic compound: A chemical that when applied to a plant is absorbed
by the roots or the leaves, and is translocated to
different parts of the plant.
Systemic herbicide: An herbicide which is absorbed into the plant and
moves within the plant, finally killing it.
Systemic pesticide: A pesticide that is absorbed by the roots or leaves of
a plant and carried through the whole of the plant. It
is thus able to kill pests at parts of the plant away
from sites of application.
Tap-root: The single root possessed by a young seedling but
rare on mature plants. Cuttings do not develop tap-
roots.
Theaflavins: Products of enzyme initiated oxidative
decarboxylation and condensation between a simple
catechin and a gallocatechin in the presence of
oxygen. Briskness and brightness of black tea are due
to these compounds.
Thearubigins: Condensation and polymerisation products formed
during fermentation of tea. Their structures are
unknown. The thickness, body and colour of black
tea are due to this group of compounds.
Tipping: Increasing the spread of a bush by removal of the
shoots at gradually increasing heights.
Tipping-in: Removing the tops of shoots of a recently pruned or
pegged bush so as to form a flat plucking table at
specified height above pruning level.
Topsoil: The upper humus-rich layers of soil. Topsoil forms
under mature tea from the leaf litter and prunings
especially if there is no cultivation or disturbance of
that soil; this layer is biologically highly active and
contains a high proportion of available nutrients
which can be exploited by the tea roots providing the
roots are not killed by hoeing.
Translocated herbicide: A herbicide which when absorbed into the plant via
the leaves or roots moves within it, finally killing it.
Translocation: The movement of soluble material through the plant.
Transpiration: The loss of water as a vapour from plants through
(mainly) pores in the leaves known as stomata (q.v.).
Trial: A simple investigation, the data from which are at
times unsuitable for statistical treatment. Trials are
usually simple comparisons between treatments or
varieties and may precede a formal experiment.
Tubercles: Wart-like processes on a fungal mycelium.
Unorthodox manufacture: Manufacture by CTC, LTP or Rotorvane. The leaf is
cut into fine pieces ensuring more membrane break-
up and allowing more mixing of enzymes,
polyphenols and oxygen. Leaf disruption is more
drastic than orthodox manufacture (q.v.).
Wetting agent: A chemical or mixture of chemicals added to sprays
of insecticide, fungicides, herbicides and mineral
sprays to improve wetting and thereby cover of leaf
surface better.
Windbreak: Any device normally in form of trees designed to
obstruct wind flow and intended for protection
against any ill effects of wind, such as soil erosion or
evaporation.
Withering: The removal of moisture from plucked leaf during
processing accompanied by an increase of the
permeability of the cell membranes that enables
considerable mingling of enzyme, polyphenols and
oxygen during fermentation. An increase of soluble
amino acids and caffeine contents of plucked tea
shoots also occurs.
Young tea: Plants on which the formation of permanent frames
has not yet been completed.
Vegetative propagation: A method of multiplying plants without the use of
seed. In tea taking cuttings of the parent plant usually
does it. These develop into plants that are genetically
identical to the mother bush.
 Appendix IV

SERVICES PROVIDED BY
THE TEA RESEARCH FOUNDATION OF KENYA
(a) Publications
(i) Annual Report
The Annual Report contains the full results of all experiments, investigations and progress
reports on long-term experiments on which the Foundation has been engaged during the year.
It is circulated from the Foundation to recipients who are included on the official
circulation list prepared by the Director of Tea Research Foundation of Kenya. Licensed
producers with 8 ha or more of tea receive one copy free and larger producers receive one
free copy for each 200 ha of their tea. The sale price for extra copies and for others who
require the report will be quoted on application to the Director, TRFK, from whom copies
of the report may be obtained.

(ii) Tea Growers Handbook

"Tea Growers Handbook" is distributed on the same basis as the Foundation's Annual
Report. The sale price will be provided on request.

(iii) "Tea"
"Tea" is the official journal of the Tea Board of Kenya and is published twice a year. In
addition to its content of general information of interest to the tea industry, it includes
technical papers and reviews prepared by the staff of the Foundation and external authors.

(iv) Quarterly Bulletin

The Quarterly Bulletin is a new addition to a list of publications produced by the Foundation.
For the time being it will be circulated to the tea industry and whoever requests free of charge.
It is intended to reach a wider audience than the above publications, the use of which are
restricted by virtue of their contents.

(b) Visiting days at the Foundation

Tuesday of each week is normally set aside as a visitors' day at the Foundation. Intending
visitors should make their appointments in advance, by application to the Foundation.
 Appendix V

SERVICES PROVIDED BY
THE TEA RESEARCH FOUNDATION OF KENYA
FOR THE KENYA TEA INDUSTRY ONLY
(a) Research Programme
Kenyan tea producers are directly concerned with the assignment of priorities in the research
programme of the Tea Research Foundation through its Tea Research Advisory Committee, in
which the interests of small and large producers are represented.
The research programme is reviewed twice annually. The first is in March/April when the
results of the previous year's investigations are discussed. The second is in September and
concentrates on research projects to be undertaken the following year. These are then
forwarded to the Foundation's Board of Directors in the November meeting for final approval.
The research programme, having relevance to the general problems that confront Kenyan
producers, has priority over specific technical demands from individual producers.
Most of the research projects embrace field trials, some of which are carried out with active
and generous assistance from the estates and small-scale growers on which the trials are located.

(b) Technical visits from Foundation staff

Visits to tea producing areas are planned so that most producers are visited as frequently as
possible. These visits are then followed by detailed reports from the Foundation.
Request for special visits at other times are complied with at the discretion of the Director,
having regard to the time and staff available. The costs of such visits are borne by the
Foundation.

(c) Soil analysis

Soil samples will be tested for pH when requested. The Foundation also has the equipment to do
complete analysis of major elements in soil and this can be done on request. Samples should be
taken as described on page 5 and sent to: -

Director,
Tea Research Foundation of Kenya,
P. O. BOX 820,
KERICHO.

Soil samples should be packed in polythene bags. Put in each bag a label that will not disintegrate
when wet, and fix a similar label on the outside of the bag. Each label, together with a fully
completed form which can be provided to all producers by the Foundation on request, must carry
full details including the name of the estate/grower, the date, field number, identification number
within the field and depth from which the sample is taken. Very many soil samples are received
and they can be confused unless these details are given in full.
Where samples are despatched by parcel post, bus or other carriers a letter should be sent
separately giving details of the samples, method of transport and a copy of the consignment note
if possible. The Foundation can then ensure then that the samples are received. A copy of the
letter should be put in the parcel with the samples.
A small fee (see page 162) is charged for the pH tests per sample and also for complete soil
analysis. A remittance for the appropriate amount should be sent with the samples or
covering letter.

(d) Leaf analysis

The Foundation operates a service on the tea plant nutritional and fertilizer use problems based
on analysis of mature leaves. The method for taking samples is described on page 5.
In addition to the use of the leaf analysis to diagnose the cause of a low yielding area, it is
advisable to have all fields tested once in a pruning cycle, preferably just before pruning. This
will enable trends towards incorrect nutrition to be detected and corrected before yields fall.
The best time to sample is towards the end of the cycle (between 4 and 5 months before
pruning). This will enable the results to be available and remedial applications, if necessary, to
be assessed in time for these to be given to the tea immediately before or after pruning.
One sample should be taken from an area of roughly one hectare. Each sample should have at
least 100 mature leaves. Detailed instructions are given below. Where the tea is fairly even,
samples should be taken as above. Where the tea is very variable samples should represent a
well defined area in which the tea is uniform.

(e) Instructions for taking leaf samples for technical analysis

The most recent research at the Foundation has shown that the uppermost mature leaf in the
plucking table is a better indicator of fertilizer induced nutrient trends than any of the younger
leaves. All growers who are interested in sending leaf samples for analysis are therefore requested
to send the uppermost mature leaf only unless otherwise suggested.
The uppermost leaf is hard, dark and full in size. It is comparable to the lower maintenance
foliage. It is the uppermost such leaf on a twig that bears or had previously borne, one or more
growing shoots that is sampled and not on the edge of the plucking table or from inside the
bush.
For each plot, sample at least 100 bushes, taking one leaf from each bush. The bushes must be
uniformly scattered over the whole area, but avoid rows which adjoin roads, paths or large vacant
patches. Sampling should be done on the same day. Put the leaves into a clean paper bag and seal
with adhesive tape. Do not use staples or pins. Do not use polythene or cloth bags. Preferably dry
the leaf as far as possible on very clean surface, but do not crush it.
Send the samples to TRFK, as described in soil analysis section with details of any problem and
past history of the area. For this analysis a small fee per sample is charged (see page 162).

(f) Testing and calibrating instruments

The Foundation will test and calibrate simple instruments such as pH meters and tea moisture
meters which are used by the tea industry. Advice will also be given on the purchase of
instruments and associated apparatus, and the method of use will be demonstrated to suitable
employees. The Foundation does not repair instruments.
(g) Analysis of fertilizers
The Foundation will analyse purchased fertilizers for growers wishing to verify their nutrient
contents with that given by manufacturers. A small fee per sample is charged (see page 162).

(h) Miniature manufacture of clonal leaf

The TRFK will manufacture samples of green leaf by a standardised procedure and obtain tasters'
reports on the made tea. At present, the only method of manufacture is CTC. Producers wishing
to avail themselves of this service should carefully follow the following instructions. This should
only be done with prior arrangement with the TRFK.
1. Samples must contain at least 600g of green leaf. If a grower wishes to have more than
one sample from the same source manufactured, this can be done by submitting another
sample separately.
2. The detailed origin of each sample must be disclosed. The TRFK will not divulge this
information to other producers or the tasters or any other person without permission from
the sender. The TRFK reserves the right to use the information and tasters' reports for
research investigation. If this is done and results are published, the source of the leaf will
be divulged without permission from the sender.
3. Leaf delivered a long distance from Kericho must be transported in such a way that
natural withering takes place in transit without over-withering. The final degree of
withering can be adjusted in the factory for under-withered leaf but over-withered leaf
will not be accepted.
4. Leaf must be plucked to a good standard of "two leaves and bud" only. Badly plucked
leaf is not acceptable.
5. Growers wishing to send leaf for manufacture must write well in advance stating when
they wish to send samples. They must not send the leaf unless they receive
acknowledgement that their leaf can be accepted. This is essential so that a programme
for manufacture of TRFK and leaf from out growers can be drawn up well in advance.
6. The maximum number of samples which can be processed at present in one day is 12.
Control sample (see page 44) should be included in each batch of samples. If the number
of samples exceed one day's work, the same control should be repeated on each day to
serve as a standard for comparison of each day's manufacture.
7. The manufacture of 600g of green leaf normally produces sufficient unsorted made tea
for at least one standard tasting. The unsorted tea is normally sent for professional tasting
and some is retained at TRFK. If the grower wishes to receive some or all of the
manufactured leaf he should inform the TRFK when submitting the samples.
8. A small fee is charged for processing each sample.

(i) Release of TRFK clones

The Foundation clones are released as soon as they have shown, in trial plots, to be superior to
commercially available seedlings in both yield and cup quality characters.
These clones can be tested at the TRFK substations, when established, and sometimes in the
growers’ farms. These places do not represent all the various soils and climatic conditions in
which the clones are likely to be grown. It is therefore quite impossible for TRFK to
guarantee the performance of its clones under various conditions and it is the responsibility of
the buyers of these clones to verify them for their local conditions.
Clones being tried in a locality for the first time should always be included in a rooting and
field trial as described on pages 39-41. As at 1st January 1999, the TRFK released clones were: -

6/8 7/9 12/12 31/8 100/5

7/3 11/4 12/19 31/11 108/82
303/156 303/577 337/3 337/138 303/348
303/199 303/999 303/186 303/156 303/388
7/14 303/366 347/314 347/366 31/27
347/326 347/573 303/1199 31/29 303/791
303/179 31/28 303/745 303/13 303/231
303/259 55/56 100/5 303/35 100/8
55/55 303/978 56/89
This list may change from time to time as new clones become available for release or as demand
for any of the clones ceases.

(j) Instructions to applicants

The release of the above clones will normally be restricted to 200 cuttings/clone/buyer/year, but
large scale release may be considered on special occasions and if the material for cuttings is
available. Clonal plants can be sold if available. The applications are sent to the Director of the
Foundation.
The TRFK cannot always supply cuttings or plants at the time requested by the applicant and
some correspondence is usually necessary. Applications should be in writing and not by
telephone. Applicants for cuttings are advised to send their applications at least six months in
advance to give the Foundation enough time to prepare the mother bushes. Orders will not be
entered into the Order Book until full payment has been made.
If a new clone is released, following an announcement in the "Tea" Journal, or any other
publication, the number of cuttings or plants which can be sold to each applicant will only be
decided after an accurate assessment of demand has been made. Applicants should in this case,
indicate the maximum number of plants or cuttings which they wish to purchase.

(k) Fresh cuttings

These will normally be released to purchasers who can plant the cuttings within 24 hours of
removal from the mother bushes.
1. If 200 cuttings or fewer per clone are purchased the cuttings will be prepared
individually and packed in polythene bags and cardboard boxes by the TRFK. For larger
orders see (I) above.
2. For larger orders the TRFK will provide the purchaser with either prepared cuttings or
the prunings from mother bushes. The purchaser will be responsible for transporting
these prunings and for preparing the cuttings from them.
Fresh cuttings are sold on a graduated scale depending on the number required and the
availability of any particular clone. A quotation of the price will be given on request.

(l) Other services

The Foundation also provides other services on plant protection, which include routine single
identification and diagnosis of nematodes, fungi, bacteria and pests in the lab. Pesticides for
registration and used in the field is also done.

m) Callused cuttings
For a very long time now there has not been a request for callused cuttings. However, these
will normally be released to purchasers who will plant the cuttings more than 24 hours after
their removal from mother bushes. They will be ready four to six weeks after being planted in
the TRFK callusing beds. For small orders (200 cuttings per clone or fewer) the cuttings will
be packed in polythene bags and cardboards boxes by the TRFK. For larger orders the
purchaser must provide suitable containers for the cuttings. The cost of callused cuttings will
be given on request.
In addition, plants of miscellaneous clones, all of which are as good as or better than seedlings
plants in all respects, but are not up to the standard of release clones and also those not fully
tested, will be sold to the growers at a price which will be given on request.
The grower is responsible for ensuring that he is satisfied with the standard of the plants when
they are removed from the nursery.
Notes to the buyers
Your requirements should be stated clearly and the application should include the following
information: -
1. Your name and address.
2. The clones and number of cuttings or plants of each you require.
3. If you are ordering cuttings, state whether you want fresh cuttings or callused cuttings.
4. When you want cuttings or plants, it helps if you specify the exact date and time of
collection.
5. If the order is small and you wish TRFK to dispatch the cuttings to you, please let the
Foundation know how you want them sent, giving full details as the Foundation staff are
not always conversant with your local facilities.
6. Do not forget to pay in advance. Your order does not exist until full payment has been
made.
7. You are reminded that you must comply with local regulations concerning the
movement and planting of tea.

(n) Plain Tea Quality Parameter

This involves analysis of chemical parameters such as theaflavins and thearubigins and other
parameters like total colour and brightness.

(o) Aroma analysis

For a long time there was a belief that Kenyan tea is of plain quality only. It has now been
established that some of our teas are flavoury as well. The Foundation is now capable of
analysing compounds responsible for aroma in our teas.

(p) ISO 3720/Kenya Bureau of Standards specification for tea

Most of our processed tea is exported (about 90%). There are strict minimum quality
standards that the majority of buyers now require. In case you would like to ensure that your
tea meet these minimum standards TRFK can do the analysis for you.
 Appendix VI

EQUIPMENT FOR CHEMICAL APPLICATION

(a) Spraying equipment
The equipment available for application of chemicals range from such simple device as puff
dusters and syringes to complex machines such as mist blowers, drift sprayers and ultra low
volume (ULV) sprayers. For the purpose of this handbook those that are relevant to tea are
discussed.
Spraying equipment is used in tea for a number of purposes:
(i) for application of insecticides to control insects on tea
(ii) application of acaricides for the control of mites on tea
(iii) application of fungicides and bacteriocides for control of tea diseases
(iv) application of herbicides to kill weeds
(v) Application of plant nutrients of foliar sprays such as zinc on tea.
The main function of sprayers is to atomise the spray fluid, which may be a solution, an
emulsion or a suspension, into small droplets and eject the same with some force for
distributing it properly. Another function is to regulate the amount of pesticide to avoid
excessive application that might prove harmful or wasteful. They are designed for applying
three types of pesticidal sprays: (i) space sprays (ii) residual or surface sprays and (iii) dual
purpose sprays.
The atomization of a liquid in a sprayer is accomplished by one of the following
mechanisms: (i) forcing a liquid through the nozzle by either hydraulic pressure or air
pressure as in compressed air sprayer, (ii) by the use of high velocity air streams into which
flows a jet of liquid of coarsely atomized liquid or coarsely atomised liquid as a motorised
knapsack sprayer and (iii) by centrifugal force in which the liquid is fed under low pressure
to the centre of a high speed rotating device such as disc or cup and is atomized by centrifugal
force as it leaves the periphery.

Parts of sprayer
The important parts of a sprayer are tank, pump, agitator, power source, pressure gauze,
valves, filters, air chamber, hose, spray lance and cut-off valve, booms and nozzles.

(i) Tank
The spray fluid has to be held in some kind of container while it is being sprayed. The
capacity of the tanks coupled with the sprayer varies from less than one litre to over 2,700
litres. For tea there is a trend towards smaller tanks, unless aerial spraying is carried out.
Tanks ranging from 5 to 20 litres capacity are commonly used. Material used for the
construction of the tank is usually non-corrosive, being steel, brass or plastic.

(ii) Pump
Pumps are necessary for atomization of the spray fluid. The sprayer may be equipped with
one of the following types of pumps: air pumps (pneumatic pumps), positive
displacement pumps (plunger, rotary and diaphragm types).
1. Air pumps.
They are used in compressed air sprayers. They force air into the air-tight spray tank
and do not pump liquid directly.
2. Positive displacement pumps.
The pumps take in a definite volume of liquid from the inlet and transfer it without
possibility of escape, to the outlet.
3. Centrifugal or impeller type pumps.
These pumps are fitted to many spray blowers used for spraying crops. A centrifugal
pump consists of a cylinder, inside which a multiblade impeller rotates at high speed
around a control axis.

(iii) Agitator
The pesticidal materials in spray-fluids are not always in solution. Therefore, most of the
sprayers are provided with agitators for keeping the pesticidal material uniformly dispersed.
For different spray-fluids, agitation requirements are different.
There are two methods of agitating the spray liquids, namely, hydraulic agitation where it
is provided by return of excess spray material from the pump, or mechanical agitation
provided by paddles or propellers.

(iv) Power source

Source of power for power-operated equipment is gasoline engines and the trend has been
towards air cooled engines because they weigh less. However, most of the sprayers are
manually operated.

(i) Pressure gauge

It is sometimes provided in discharge line as a quick means of assessing whether the
components of the machine are functioning correctly and for guiding the operator in properly
adjusting the pressure for each spray job.

(vi) Valves
The valves constitute an important part of any spraying apparatus, because they govern the
direction of the flow of the spray material. They are fitted into the pipe system so that they
allow the liquid to pass in the direction of the nozzles. They are of two types; Ball valves and
Spring loaded valves.

(vii) Filters
The liquid must well-filtered to protect the pump from abrasion, to avoid interference with
the function of valves and prevent blocking of the nozzles. There may be several
filters in the spray assembly.

(viii) Nozzle
Field, high pressure and most aircraft sprayers rely upon the principle of hydraulic
atomization. The nozzle in these sprayers is a vital part as it breaks the stream of the liquid
and spreads it out into spry droplets.
Nozzles are designed for either high or low pressure, for producing a fan-shaped,
solid-cone or hollow-cone spray patters (Fig A).
 Figure A: Spray patterns

Factors influencing operation of nozzles

Factors such as increase in pump pressure, diameter of disc orifice and depth of the eddy
chamber influence the operation of nozzles (Table A). Increase in pump pressure results in
smaller spray droplets (Table A) and increased carry of droplets, spray cone and discharge.
The output from the hydraulic nozzles varies approximately as the square root of the applied
pressure. It is, therefore, necessary to change the nozzle (or the disc, where such a provision
is made) to make gross changes in the output. However, their finer adjustments can be made
by regulation of the pressure. Increase in the diameter of the orifice results in increase in the
size of droplets, carry of the droplets, discharge of the spray fluid and the spray cone.

Manually-operated sprayers
According to the source of motive power the available spraying machines can be classified
as (a) manually operated and (b) power operated.
Many simple yet efficient manually operated pesticide application machines are
available. They are equally useful for both small and large scale tea growers. The
manually operated sprayers either work on a pump, as in a Knapsack sprayer or on a
compression system.
Table A: Factors affecting performance of nozzles
Effect desired Adjustment required in
Pump Eddy-chamber Disc Disc-orifice
pressure depth thickness diameter
Faster output Increase Increase Increase Increase
Finer droplets Increase Decrease Decrease Decrease
Longer carry Increase Increase Nil Increase
Wider cone Increase Decrease Decrease Decrease

Knapsack sprayers
It has a flat or bean-shaped tank designed to fit comfortably on the back of the operator. The
capacity of the tank is 15-20 litres, It is generally made of plastic.
In a Knapsack sprayer, the tank is provided with either a single pump and pressure barrel
having a piston pump and mechanical agitator or with a diaphragm type with a lever for
operating. Higher outputs are provided by the plunger type pumps than by the diaphragm
pumps. However, the latter type of pumps require comparatively less energy for operating
and also less maintenance. In addition, these pumps stand wear very much better than the
plunger type pumps, especially with abrasive materials such as water dispersible powders.
Provision is sometimes made for changing the operating lever from one side of the sprayer
to the other so that it may be used in either the right or the left hand. Some models are
equipped with a double-acting externally-mounted pump. A pressure chamber is provided
to eliminate pulsations and to give a uniform spray. However, the pump has to be operated
continuously while spraying for maintaining the necessary pressure. The spray line
consists of a short rubber pipe, a lance and a nozzle. Settling of wettable powders in the
tank of the sprayer is prevented in many cases by provision of a mechanical agitator
consisting of a plate which is moved up and down inside the container by the pump lever.
Some models employ hydraulic or jet agitation from a small jet of the fluid issuing from
the bottom of the pump. The pressure developed in these sprayers depends on the pump and
varies from 3 to 12kg/cm2 which is more than that developed in a compressed air sprayer.
However, a pressure of 3-4 kg/cm2 can be maintained in most cases without much effort.
The sprayer can be used for spraying low crops, and nursery plants. It is also useful for spot
treatment. These pumps are very commonly used in the tea growing areas. With these
sprayers, the job of the operator is tiring, especially over a long period. The operator has to
bear the weight of the sprayer containing the fluid and simultaneously required to operate
the pump lever with one hand and the spray lance with the other hand. Under this situation,
the lighter the equipment and lesser the effort needed for operation, the better.
 Knapsack sprayer

Pneumatic hand sprayer

This machine has a container of 0.5 to 5.0 litre capacity. The container has in some cases a
built-in pump (Fig B) while, in other cases, the air pump is mounted externally. In both cases,
an outlet pipe is suspended in the container. The outer end of the pipe terminates in a nozzle.
The container is filled to approximately three-fourths of its capacity and air is compressed in
the remaining space by means of the pump.
Before use, the plunger type pump is worked to develop an air pressure of 0.15 - 3.00
kg/cm2. The spray comes out from the nozzle usually via a suitable trigger-control valve. On
opening the release by depressing the valve lever, the liquid rushes through the nozzle under
the pressure of the air above the spray liquid to emerge in the form of continuous fine spray.
These machines, when fully charged with compressed air, normally run for about 5 minutes
before they require recharging.
Since they are charged prior to each operation, all the attention of the operator can be
devoted to directing the spray and ensuring a good coverage. The application rate ranges
from 45 to 112 litres per hectare. In some cases however, continuous pumping is needed to
maintain the necessary air pressure in the container. These sprayers are used extensively for
spraying in the nursery. They are valuable for use in glass houses. They are less tiring to
operate than most atomizers. However if plants are low (below 60 cm in height), the operator
is likely to get tired quickly due to bending unless an extension rods to permit directing the
spray at any desired angle is fitted.
 Power operated sprayers
Use of mechanically-operated sprayers powered by means of gasoline engines for the
application of the spray fluid is recommended in place of the manually-operated type
wherever the nature of the past problem permits this change and economic considerations
justify it. Such sprayers result in saving cost of treatment. The treatments are more rapidly
completed and may result in additional savings because of prompt control of the pests.
In some cases, mechanically-operated sprayers may prove to be superior in performance.
Hydraulic pressure atomizes the liquid and carries it to the plant surface in some sprayers,
while in others this function is performed by current of air or gas, or by other non-hydraulic
means.

Ultra low volume applicators (rarely used in tea fields).

Efforts directed to reduce the amount of pesticidal carriers without affecting the uniform
distribution of the toxicants led to the development of ultra low volume applicators.
Development of special nozzles that were capable of producing fine droplets led to reduction
in pesticidal carriers. Ultra low volume spraying, commonly referred to as ULV spraying, is
a new concept in pest control It enables treatment of large areas quickly. With this technique,
the pesticides are applied in small quantities (usually 0.5 to 2.0 1/ha for field crops) in a
highly concentrated from. The pesticide is not diluted with water before spraying. ULV spray
rates require the use of small droplets of 30 to 150 microns. Such small droplets cannot be
forcibly propelled over a distance and their distribution, therefore, depends on gravity and
air movement. The basic requirements of ULV spraying are (i) narrow and controllable
droplet spectrum, (2) an accurately controllable emission rate and (3) non-volatile pesticide
formulations of suitable viscosity and density.

Use of aircraft in pest control and fertilizer application (Fertilizer application only).
Use of aircraft enables coverage of large areas rapidly, timely and economically. Fixed-
wing aeroplanes have been used for nutrient (zinc) application in tea in Kenya. They are
hardly used for pesticide application.

Advantages of aerial application

For controlling pest and disease outbreaks, quick action is necessary to cover large areas
within the shortest possible time. An ordinary aircraft flying at 130-160 km/hr can dust or
spray 4 to 16 ha per minute depending upon the effective swath width which varies from 15
to 60 metres. Thus, in a day of 6 hours, over 400 ha can be dusted depending upon the
weather, the terrain and other factors. Normally, however, dusting may be possible only for
a few hours in a day as dusts are very prone to drift. Fertilizer can be applied by aircraft at
the same rate as dusting.
In aerial spray applications, the volume of the spray fluid used per unit area is appreciably
reduced because of the limitation of the load. With conventional spray nozzles delivering
15-20 litres of spray fluid per ha from a height of 2-4 metres above the crop, about 320-400
ha can be sprayed in one day. However, with ULV nozzles, spraying from a height of about
10m, over 1200 ha can be treated in a day.
Limitations of aerial application
Aircraft application has, however, certain limitations. In aerial application, most of the
spray/dust is primarily airborne. The droplets/particles lose their kinetic energy derived from
emission within about one metre form the point of discharge and thereafter, their trajectories
are determined by gravity and wind. Thus, drift is a serious problem. It is calculated that
droplet of 100 microns emitted 3 m from the ground will drift 15 m in a 4.8 km/hr wind and
48 m in a 16 km/hr wind, while a 10 micron droplet will drift approximately 100 times more.
The usual recovery of the pesticide sprayed from the air, on plants, is 85 per cent in
conventional spraying and 70 per cent in ULV spraying. However, the effects of droplet
displacement due to turbulence can be very serious. Under high turbulence conditions,
recoveries of droplets less than 200 microns may be as low as 40 per cent of the recovery
achieved under low turbulence conditions.
The degree of thoroughness of application that can be attained with ground equipment
is usually not attainable with airborne equipment. In the control of certain pests, a good
deposit of the pesticide on the under side of leaves have, however, been obtained by flying
at lower height and slower speeds.
Dependency of aerial application on optimum weather conditions is also a great drawback.
Weather conditions may not permit the aircraft to take off from the base or the operating site.
Air currents affect the performance of aircraft appreciably in both dusting and spraying
operations. Favorable conditions usually occur during early morning/late evening when the
air is relatively cool and humid. It is often less expensive to treat small acreage with ground
equipment than with aircraft.

(b) Soil injecting guns

Most soil fumigants are formulated as liquids. They can be applied by various kinds of soil
injectors in required amounts at regular intervals and at the desired depth in the soil. The
hand-carried applicators (Fig. C) are impracticable for large areas, but are useful for small
ones. Small hand-operated soil injectors with a capacity of about 2.25-3.5 1itres of soil
fumigant are commonly used for fumigating soil to a depth of 15-22 cm for controlling soil
pests, particularly nematodes. They are quite light, weighing only 3.6-5.75 kilograms.
Using this equipment, one can treat about 0.4 ha in a day. All fillings should be done in
the open air using a funnel, preferably fitted with an air vent. It is most important to
check by removing the filter cap that the filter is in place, because it is essential to
prevent dirt from entering the tank in order to get a long trouble-free service. It is
necessary to ensure that the filter is clean. If necessary, the dirt from the filter can be
removed with kerosene. Furthermore, on first filling or at any time after the tank has
been emptied and refilled, it is essential to ensure that all air is removed from the valves
and pipes. This is done by pushing down the injection handle. Gumming ad corrosion
may occur if soil fumigant is allowed to remain in the injector for long periods. It is,
therefore, advisable that on completing fumigation the tank be emptied by lifting the
filter. By depressing the injection handle several times, the fumigant remaining in the
lance can also be ejected. Further, for proper storage of the soil fumigant injector for long
periods, recharge the tank with approximately 1 litre of a mixture containing equal
amounts of a lubricating oil and kerosene. Thoroughly agitate the mixture and depress
the injection handle a number of times until the soil injector is empty. Outside of the
injector should also be cleaned with a similar mixture and, finally, it can be wiped with
an oily rag before storage.
 Index
Abnormalities, 142 Chafer Grub, 179
Acacia mearnsii,213 China species, 38
Accessibility (of land), 5 China Tea, 150
Accumulator, 229 China, 1, 2
Acidity (of soils), 5, 135, 141 Chloroform Test, 38, 47
Agrotis segetun (common cutworm), 178 Clania destructor, 178
Air-drying (of fuelwood), 214 Clonal Field Trials, 40.
Alavangas, 69 Clonal selection,36
Albizzia spp.,4 Colletotrichum cammelliae Massee, 166*
Aluminium accumulator,4 Colletotrichum coffeanum, 145
Aluminium sulphate, 110, 112, 141 Common cutworm,178
Amino acid,201,202,205,211 Composts,120,122
Ammonium sulphate nitrate,109, 113 Conversion Tables,221
Ammonium, sulphate of (ammonium Copper deficiency, 146
sulphate), 109, 113 Crop Protection Chemicals Ltd., 220
Annual Reports of Tea Research Foundation Cropping, 133, 134, 139
of Kenya, 104,242 Crotalaria, 25, 26
Annual Reports of Tea Research Institute, 104 Crush, Tear, & Curl, CTC, 206, 207, 209
Aperitmetus brunneous, 179 Cutting nurseries, 124
Aphids (citrus), 176 Cuttings, preparation of, 60
Armillaria, 4, 9, 17, 18, 89, 171, 187.198 Cypress, 213
Assamica (var. of Camellia sinensis), 31
Assam-type plants, 31, 47 Daily Green Leaf Summary, 99
Astringency, 201 Daily Muster Sheet, 98
Auger (sampling tool),6 Dalapon,187,188,194
Darjeeling, 2
baits,196 Diammonium phosphate, 118, 123, 124, 126
barie, 36, 51, 225 Diazinon, 215
bhanji shoots, 85, 224 Digitaria scalarum,187
Black Thrips (Heliothrips haemorrhoidalis) Diquat, 190, 191, 193, 195
182 Diseases of tea, 170.
Black wattle, 214 Diuron,189,190, 192, 195
Borreria princeae,4 Drying - Fluid bed dryer, 209
Bracken (Pteridium acquilimum),4 - conventional dryer, 209
Brevipalpus californicus,176
Bringing-into-bearing, 70. Emulsifiable concentrates (EC), 195
Briskness, 200, 201 Endosulfan, 62.
Brown blight, 145, 172 Epicatechin gallate (ECG), 36, 201, 210
Bud mite (Brevipalpus californicus), 171 Epicatechin, 36, 201, 210
Burma, tea in,1 Epigallocatechin, 36, 201, 210
Epigallocatechin gallate,36, 201, 210
Calacarus carinatus, 176 Epsom salts,111, 118
Calcium Ammonium Nitrate Erosion (of soil), 21
(CAN),112,144 Eucalyptus 27, 213, 214, 215
Calcium excess, 149 Fermentation , 201-203, 205, 207-211
Calcium Nitrate, 112, 134, 150 Fermentation temperature, 202
Canna, 139 Fermentation duration, 202
Case hardening, 203 Fertiliser analysis, 162, 245
Catechins, 201,202,210 Fertilizers for tea, 122.
Field Trials,39. Liquor strength, 200, 201
"fine" plucking,84
"Firing" of leaf, 193 Maceration, orthodox , 200, 206, 207
Fluazifop-butyl, 178,179,185 Maceration, unorthodox, 200, 206, 207
Fomes, 18 Magnesium deficiency, 135, 149
"frilling",14 Magnesium excess, 109,110,146
Fuelwood species, 213 Magnesium, 111,
Fumigants, 196 Manganese excess, 150
Manganese, 135
Georgia (USSR), 93 Manufacturing process, 203, 206
Glyphosate, 18 May and Baker Ltd., 207
Grafted seed bearers, 138 Microtermis natalensis, 183
Gramoxone, 18, 51 Miniature manufacture of clonal tea, 235
Green Leaf Register, 100 Ministry of Agriculture,1
Green Leaf Sheet, 99 Miscible Liquids,186
Grevillea robusta, 28 Tobacco Crickets (Brachytrupes
Grey blight, 173 Membranaceus) 173
Guatemala grass, 18, 23, 24, 25 Molybdenum, 164
Mother bushes, 59.
Hail-damaged tea, 88 Mount Elgon, 137
Hakea, 27 Moving Belt Fermenter, 197
"Hardening-off, 62,63 Mulches, 22, 27,117, 118, 119, 120, 131
Helopeltis schoutedemi 183 Multiplication plots, 42
Heliothrips haemmorrhoidalis, 182 Muriate of potash, 109,125,136
Hoechst (E.A) Ltd., 219
Hydrangea macrophylla, 4 Napier grass 9,24
Hypoxylon Serpens, 171 Nitrogen deficiency,121, 143
NPK, 123, 124, 129, 146, 163
Indicator plants, 3 NPKS compound fertilizer, 124, 125, 126,
Infectious diseases; different types of 170. 146, 163
Infusion, 206 Nurseries, seedling, 38,123
Irrigation for tea, 93. Nursery site, 38,53, 54, 55

Japan, 2 "O" Line 10,11

Oats, 10, 24, 25, 26, 27
Kenya Grain Growers Union (KGGU) 205, Orchards (tea), 31
206, 207 Oxidase, 200
Kenya Meteorological Department, 91
Kenya Tea Development Authority Paraquat, 18, 51, 190
(KTDA), 95,191 Pesticides, 188
Khus Khus, 20 Pests of tea, 174
Kikuyu grass, 18 Phomopsis theae, 164,165
"Killing" trees, 14 Phosphorous, 23, 105, 108
Plasmolysis, 152
Lawrie Tea Processor (LTP), 206, 235 Pneumatic hand-sprayer, 241
Leaching, 137 Polygonum spp., 183
Leaf analysis, 244 Polyphenol oxidase, 200, 203
Leaf collection, 203 Precursor,202, 210, 211
Leaf maceration, 206 Potassium, 24, 106, 109, 133, 142
Leaf, firing of, 203, 211 Protein,201, 205, 211
Lightning damage, 198 Pruning, 64, 67, 70, 83
Liquor Colour, 200, 201, 203
Rain gauges, 92 Terpene glycoside , 201, 202, 211, 212,
Red Crevice Mite, 174 Temperature – inlet, 203
Rehabilitation of moribund tea, 87 Temperature – outlet, 203
Rentokil Ltd., 220 Theaflavin, 201, 202
Rhizomorphs, infection by, 163 Thearubigin, 201, 202
Rootstock, 34, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51 Thiodan, 62, 188, 217
Tipping, 70, 74, 85
sampling, 5,159 Tobacco Crickets, 181
Seedling stumps, 64, 134 Trials, 39
Service charges, 159 Twiga Chemicals, 220
Scion, 46, 47, 48, 50
Sorting made tea, 209 Vegetative propagation, 50
Shipping, 209 Volatile flavour compound, 36 201, 202
Sickle-leaf, 145 Volatile flavour component, 201, 211
Sleeved clonal plants, 46, 54, 62, 75, 134. Weed control, 186,181
Soil analysis, 159 Wellcome (K) Ltd., 208
Sorting seed, 52 Wettable powders, 185
Sorting tea, 209 Withering, 205
Spraying equipment, 249 Withering - physical, 205, 206, 207
Strength, 200, 201 Withering –chemical,203, 205, 206
Sulphate of ammonia, 108, 109, 124
Sulphur, 108, 123, 124, 140 Yellow tea mite, 175
Sulhur deficiency, 151
Suregrain (oats variety), 25 Zinc deficiency, 114, 146,147, 149
Zinc foliar sprays, 114
Tea Board of Kenya, 232 Zinc oxidase, 113
Tea Research Foundation of Kenya (TRFK), Zinc sulphate, 115, 116
1, 7, 23, 35, 36, 44, 49, 62, 76, 77, 117, 127,
157, 232, 233
 KENYA TEA DEVELOPMENT AGENCY LTD.
A new beginning from a successful past
THE CHAIRMAN, BOARD OF DIRECTORS,
MANAGING DIRECTOR AND THE STAFF OF
KENYA TEA DEVELOPMENT AGENCY LTD.
congratulate
The Tea Research Foundation of Kenya for the production of the revised edition of the TEA GROWERS
HANDBOOK
 KENYA TEA DEVELOPMENT AGENCY LTD. was incorporated on 5th May, 2000 and took
over the assets and liabilities of its predecessor Kenya Tea Development Authority as from 1 st July,
2000.
 KTDA Ltd. is one of the largest Tea Management Agencies in the world.
 K.T.D.A. Ltd’s mission statement is “To provide effective management services to the small-scale
tea sub-sector for efficient production processing and marketing of high quality tea for the benefit
of farmers and other stakeholders.
 K.T.D.A. Ltd’s vision is “To aim at being the best tea management agent in the production,
processing and marketing of high quality tea in the world.
 K.T.D.A. Ltd produces 59% of tea output in Kenya
 It manages 45 tea factories in the smallholder tea sub-sector with nine additional factories under
construction.
 K.T.D.A. Ltd. sells most of her teas through the Mombasa Auction, about 75-80%. It also sells tea
directly to overseas buyers, about 15%.
 It also sells tea to local packers and direct ex-factory customers
 K.T.D.A. Ltd. teas are most sought after in the world because of their superior quality. The policy
of two-leaves-and-a-bud is maintained.
 Approximately 360,000 small-scale tea growers participate in the scheme with an average of 0.25
ha. of tea per grower.
 K.T.D.A. Ltd authors the policy, articulates governance process, organizational strategy and
company development. The Agency sets the corporate goals, objectives and priorities.
 Smallholder tea subsector makes a sizeable contribution to the national economic development and
the improvement of the societal living standards.
 Smallholder teas are used basically to improve the quality of value added teas when blended with
teas from other origins
 K.T.D.A. Ltd contributes approximately 60% of fundings to the Tea Board of Kenya which in turn
provides financial support for tea research programmes conducted by Tea Research Foundation of
Kenya.
TEA BRINGS PEOPLE TOGETHER
KTDA Ltd.
MAKERS OF QUALITY TEA FOR PEOPLE WITH GREAT TASTE

KENYA TEA DEVELOPMENT AGENCY LIMITED

Farmers Building, Moi Avenue,
P.O. Box 30213, NAIROBI
Tel.: 331053 221441-4
Fax: 210636 245773 211240
E-Mail: ktda @ ktda. co. ke